Cadillac | 2005 SRX | Specifications | Cadillac 2005 SRX Specifications

2005 Cadillac SRX Owner Manual
Seats and Restraint Systems ........................... 1-1
Front Seats ............................................... 1-2
Rear Seats
............................................... 1-8
Safety Belts ............................................. 1-10
Child Restraints
....................................... 1-28
Airbag System
......................................... 1-47
Restraint System Check
............................ 1-58
Features and Controls ..................................... 2-1
Keys
........................................................ 2-3
Doors and Locks
....................................... 2-8
Windows ................................................. 2-13
Theft-Deterrent Systems ............................ 2-17
Starting and Operating Your Vehicle
........... 2-20
Mirrors .................................................... 2-35
OnStar® System
...................................... 2-40
HomeLink® Transmitter
............................. 2-42
Storage Areas
......................................... 2-47
Sunroof
.................................................. 2-50
Vehicle Personalization
............................. 2-53
Instrument Panel ............................................. 3-1
Instrument Panel Overview .......................... 3-4
Climate Controls
...................................... 3-25
Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators
........ 3-33
Driver Information Center (DIC)
.................. 3-48
Audio System(s) ....................................... 3-80
M
Driving Your Vehicle ....................................... 4-1
Your Driving, the Road, and Your Vehicle ........ 4-2
Towing
................................................... 4-50
Service and Appearance Care .......................... 5-1
Service ..................................................... 5-3
Fuel ......................................................... 5-5
Checking Things Under the Hood
............... 5-10
All-Wheel Drive
........................................ 5-46
Rear Axle
............................................... 5-48
Front Axle
............................................... 5-49
Bulb Replacement
.................................... 5-50
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement
......... 5-50
Tires
...................................................... 5-52
Appearance Care
..................................... 5-83
Vehicle Identification
................................. 5-92
Electrical System ...................................... 5-92
Capacities and Specifications
................... 5-102
Maintenance Schedule ..................................... 6-1
Maintenance Schedule ................................ 6-2
Customer Assistance and Information .............. 7-1
Customer Assistance and Information
........... 7-2
Reporting Safety Defects ........................... 7-11
Index ................................................................ 1
Canadian Owners
A French language copy of this manual can be obtained
from your dealer or from:
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem, CADILLAC,
the CADILLAC Crest and Wreath, and the name SRX are
registered trademarks of General Motors Corporation.
This manual includes the latest information at the time it
was printed. We reserve the right to make changes to
the product after that time without notice. For vehicles
first sold in Canada, substitute the name “General
Motors of Canada Limited” for Cadillac Motor Car
Division whenever it appears in this manual.
Keep this manual in the vehicle, so it will be there if it
is needed while you are on the road. If the vehicle
is sold, leave this manual in the vehicle.
Litho in U.S.A.
Part No. 05SRX A First Edition
ii
How to Use This Manual
Many people read the owner manual from beginning to
end when they first receive their new vehicle. If this
is done, it can help you learn about the features
and controls for the vehicle. Pictures and words work
together in the owner manual to explain things.
Index
A good place to quickly locate information about the
vehicle is the Index in the back of the manual. It is an
alphabetical list of what is in the manual and the
page number where it can be found.
© Copyright General Motors Corporation 05/14/04
All Rights Reserved
Safety Warnings and Symbols
There are a number of safety cautions in this book.
We use a box and the word CAUTION to tell about
things that could hurt you if you were to ignore
the warning.
You will also find a circle
with a slash through it in
this book. This safety
symbol means “Do Not,”
“Do Not do this” or “Do Not
let this happen.”
{CAUTION:
These mean there is something that could hurt
you or other people.
In the caution area, we tell you what the hazard is.
Then we tell you what to do to help avoid or reduce
the hazard. Please read these cautions. If you do not,
you or others could be hurt.
iii
Vehicle Damage Warnings
Vehicle Symbols
Also, in this manual you will find these notices:
The vehicle has components and labels that use
symbols instead of text. Symbols are shown along with
the text describing the operation or information
relating to a specific component, control, message,
gage, or indicator.
Notice: These mean there is something that could
damage your vehicle.
A notice tells about something that can damage the
vehicle. Many times, this damage would not be covered
by your vehicle’s warranty, and it could be costly. But
the notice will tell what to do to help avoid the damage.
When you read other manuals, you might see
CAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different colors
or in different words.
There are also warning labels on the vehicle. They use
the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.
iv
If you need help figuring out a specific name of a
component, gage, or indicator, reference the
following topics:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Seats and Restraint Systems in Section 1
Features and Controls in Section 2
Instrument Panel Overview in Section 3
Climate Controls in Section 3
Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators in Section 3
Audio System(s) in Section 3
Engine Compartment Overview in Section 5
These are some examples of symbols that may be found on the vehicle:
v
✍ NOTES
vi
Section 1
Seats and Restraint Systems
Front Seats ......................................................1-2
Manual Passenger Seat ..................................1-2
Power Seats ..................................................1-2
Power Lumbar ...............................................1-3
Heated Seats .................................................1-4
Reclining Seatbacks ........................................1-5
Head Restraints .............................................1-7
Rear Seats .......................................................1-8
Rear Seat Operation .......................................1-8
Stowable Seat ...............................................1-8
Safety Belts ...................................................1-10
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone ................1-10
Questions and Answers About Safety Belts ......1-14
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly .................1-15
Driver Position ..............................................1-15
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ..................1-21
Right Front Passenger Position .......................1-22
Rear Seat Passengers ..................................1-22
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for
Children and Small Adults ..........................1-25
Safety Belt Pretensioners ...............................1-27
Safety Belt Extender .....................................1-27
Child Restraints .............................................1-28
Older Children ..............................................1-28
Infants and Young Children ............................1-31
Child Restraint Systems .................................1-34
Where to Put the Restraint .............................1-37
Top Strap ....................................................1-38
Top Strap Anchor Location .............................1-39
Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) ...........................1-40
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for
the LATCH System ....................................1-42
Securing a Child Restraint in a
Rear Seat Position ....................................1-42
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Right Front Seat Position ............................1-45
Airbag System ...............................................1-47
Where Are the Airbags? ................................1-50
When Should an Airbag Inflate? .....................1-54
What Makes an Airbag Inflate? .......................1-55
How Does an Airbag Restrain? .......................1-55
What Will You See After an
Airbag Inflates? .........................................1-56
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ...........1-58
Restraint System Check ..................................1-58
Checking Your Restraint Systems ...................1-58
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash ............................................1-59
1-1
Front Seats
Power Seats
Manual Passenger Seat
If your vehicle is equipped with power front seats,
the controls are located on the outboard sides of the
front seat cushions.
Your vehicle may have a manual passenger seat.
To adjust the seat, lift the bar under the front of the seat
to unlock it. Slide the seat to where you want it and
release the bar. Try to move the seat back and forth with
your body to be sure the seat is locked in place.
1-2
• Move the front of the horizontal control up or down
Power Lumbar
to raise or lower the front portion of the cushion.
• Move the rear of the horizontal control up or down
to raise or lower the rear portion of the cushion.
• Lift up or push down on the center of the horizontal
control to move the entire seat up or down.
• To move the seat forward or rearward, slide the
horizontal control forward or rearward.
See Reclining Seatbacks on page 1-5 for more
information.
Your vehicle may have this
feature. The driver’s and
passenger’s seatback
lumbar support can
be adjusted by moving
the control located on
the outboard side of the
seat cushions.
To increase or decrease support, hold the control
forward or rearward. Keep in mind that as your seating
position changes, as it may during long trips, so
should the position of your lumbar support. Adjust the
seat as needed.
1-3
Heated Seats
If your vehicle is equipped
with heated front seats, the
buttons are located on
the climate control panel.
There is one button for the driver and one for the front
passenger. Each button has three settings, LO, HI
and off. The active setting appears on the climate control
panel display. The LO setting warms the seatback
and cushion until the seat approximates normal body
temperature. The HI setting has a slightly higher
temperature.
1-4
To turn on the heated seats, press the button once.
The seat will heat to the HI setting. Press the button
again to switch to the LO setting. Pressing the button a
third time turns the system off.
The heated seats can only be used when the ignition is
turned on. When the vehicle is turned off, the heated
seats automatically turn off. If you wish to have the
heated seats on once the vehicle is restarted, press the
button again.
Reclining Seatbacks
Power Recliner
Manual Recliner
If your vehicle has manual reclining front seatbacks,
the levers are located on the outboard sides of the
front seats.
If your vehicle has power reclining front seatbacks,
the control is located on the outboard side of the
front seats.
Press the top of the vertical control forward or rearward
to adjust the seatback angle.
Lift the lever to release the seatback, then move the
seatback to where you want it. Release the lever to lock
the seatback in place. To return the seatback to the
upright position, pull up on the lever without pushing on
the seatback.
1-5
{CAUTION:
Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicle
is in motion can be dangerous. Even if you
buckle up, your safety belts can not do their
job when you are reclined like this.
The shoulder belt can not do its job. In a
crash, you could go into it, receiving neck or
other injuries.
The lap belt can not do its job either. In a crash
the belt could go up over your abdomen.
The belt forces would be there, not at your
pelvic bones. This could cause serious
internal injuries.
But don’t have a seatback reclined if your vehicle is
moving.
1-6
For proper protection when the vehicle is in
motion, have the seatback upright. Then sit
well back in the seat and wear your safety belt
properly.
Head Restraints
Adjust your head restraint so that the top of the restraint
is closest to the top of your head. This position
reduces the chance of a neck injury in a crash.
The front seat head restraints move up and down.
Press the button located at the bottom of the head
restraint to raise or lower the head restraint. The head
restraints tilt forward and rearward, also.
The third row head rests are not adjustable. They are
removable. They must be removed before the third row
seat can be folded. To remove the third row head
rests, press the button located on the top of the
seatback and pull up on the head rest.
Store the head rests in the storage compartment
behind the third row. Open the cover and insert the
head rest posts through the slats in the storage area.
The head rests must be stored with the front of the rest
facing up. Position and snap the head rests in the
provided storage tray.
The second row outboard head rests work the same as
the front seat head restraints except they do not tilt.
1-7
Rear Seats
Stowable Seat
Rear Seat Operation
If your vehicle has a third row seat, it is a power
folding seat.
Adjusting the Second Row Seat
The second row seat can be adjusted forward or
rearward. Pull up on the lever under the seat cushion
and slide the seat with your body. Release the lever and
try to move the seat forward and rearward to be sure
it is locked into place.
The head rests need to be removed before folding the
third row seat. See Head Restraints on page 1-7 for
instructions for removing the third row seat head rests.
The seatback will not fold all of the way down if the
head rests are not removed.
Entering or Exiting the Third Row Seat
The passenger’s side of the second row seat has an
easy entry feature. This makes it easy to get in and out
of the third row seat, if your vehicle has one.
To operate the seat, pull the release handle located on
the top of the seatback. Fold the seatback down
then pull the release handle on the top of the seatback
to release the seat to tumble forward.
Be sure to return the seat to the passenger position
when finished. Push and pull on the seat to make sure
it is locked in place.
Inside Liftgate
The buttons that are used to operate the power folding
third row seat are located inside of the liftgate and
behind the second row seat on the passenger’s side of
the vehicle.
1-8
Two buttons are located inside the liftgate. One button
is to tilt the seatback forward for added storage
space or when storing a flat tire. The other button is
the power folding seat button. The button behind
the second row seat is also a power folding seat button.
After the seat has folded, the panel on the seat must be
folded forward to create the flat floor.
Before folding or unfolding the third row seat, all of
the following conditions must be met:
Before returning the third row seat to the passenger
seating position, the panel must be folded back
upon itself. Press one of the power folding seat
buttons and the seat will unfold into the seating position.
If the seat is not unfolded fully into the seating position,
a chime will sound when the vehicle is shifted out
of PARK (P).
• The liftgate or passenger’s side rear door
must be open.
• The unlock button on either the remote keyless
entry transmitter or the door must be pressed
three times to enable the rear seat for two minutes,
or the ignition must be in ON or ACCESSORY.
If the seat’s path is blocked it will stop and back away.
Press the button again to return the seat to its
previous position.
• The vehicle must be in PARK (P).
• The vehicle cannot have a low battery.
1-9
Safety Belts
{CAUTION:
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone
This part of the manual tells you how to use safety
belts properly. It also tells you some things you should
not do with safety belts.
{CAUTION:
Do not let anyone ride where he or she can not
wear a safety belt properly. If you are in a
crash and you are not wearing a safety belt,
your injuries can be much worse. You can hit
things inside the vehicle or be ejected from it.
You can be seriously injured or killed. In the
same crash, you might not be, if you are
buckled up. Always fasten your safety belt,
and check that your passengers’ belts are
fastened properly too.
1-10
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo
area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a
collision, people riding in these areas are more
likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not
allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle
that is not equipped with seats and safety
belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a
seat and using a safety belt properly.
Your vehicle has a light
that comes on as a
reminder to buckle up.
See Safety Belt Reminder
Light on page 3-36.
In most states and in all Canadian provinces, the law
says to wear safety belts. Here is why: They work.
You never know if you will be in a crash. If you do have
a crash, you do not know if it will be a bad one.
Why Safety Belts Work
When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast as
it goes.
A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be so
serious that even buckled up, a person would not
survive. But most crashes are in between. In many of
them, people who buckle up can survive and sometimes
walk away. Without belts they could have been badly
hurt or killed.
After more than 30 years of safety belts in vehicles,
the facts are clear. In most crashes buckling up
does matter...a lot!
Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it is just a seat
on wheels.
1-11
Put someone on it.
1-12
Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The rider
does not stop.
The person keeps going until stopped by something.
In a real vehicle, it could be the windshield...
or the instrument panel...
1-13
Questions and Answers About
Safety Belts
Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after an accident
if I am wearing a safety belt?
A: You could be — whether you are wearing a safety
belt or not. But you can unbuckle a safety belt,
even if you are upside down. And your chance of
being conscious during and after an accident,
so you can unbuckle and get out, is much greater if
you are belted.
Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why should I have to
wear safety belts?
A: Airbags are in many vehicles today and will be
or the safety belts!
With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does.
You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance,
and your strongest bones take the forces. That is why
safety belts make such good sense.
1-14
in most of them in the future. But they are
supplemental systems only; so they work with
safety belts — not instead of them. Every airbag
system ever offered for sale has required the use of
safety belts. Even if you are in a vehicle that has
airbags, you still have to buckle up to get the most
protection. That is true not only in frontal collisions,
but especially in side and other collisions.
Q: If I am a good driver, and I never drive far from
home, why should I wear safety belts?
A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you are in an
accident — even one that is not your fault — you
and your passengers can be hurt. Being a good
driver does not protect you from things beyond your
control, such as bad drivers.
Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km) of
home. And the greatest number of serious injuries
and deaths occur at speeds of less than 40 mph
(65 km/h).
Driver Position
Lap-Shoulder Belt
The driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here is how to wear
it properly.
1. Close and lock the door.
2. Adjust the seat so you can sit up straight. To see
how, see “Seats” in the Index.
Safety belts are for everyone.
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
This part is only for people of adult size.
Be aware that there are special things to know about
safety belts and children. And there are different
rules for smaller children and babies. If a child will be
riding in your vehicle, see Older Children on page 1-28
or Infants and Young Children on page 1-31. Follow
those rules for everyone’s protection.
First, you will want to know which restraint systems your
vehicle has.
We will start with the driver position.
3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Do not let it get twisted.
The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt across
you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt go back
slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt across you
more slowly.
1-15
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt
Extender on page 1-27.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
5. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the
shoulder belt.
The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on
the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this applies
force to the strong pelvic bones. And you would be less
likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it, the
belt would apply force at your abdomen. This could cause
serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go
over the shoulder and across the chest. These parts of
the body are best able to take belt restraining forces.
The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop or crash,
or if you pull the belt very quickly out of the retractor.
1-16
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt
is too loose. In a crash, you would move
forward too much, which could increase injury.
The shoulder belt should fit against your body.
A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not give nearly
as much protection this way.
1-17
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt is
buckled in the wrong place like this. In a crash,
the belt would go up over your abdomen.
The belt forces would be there, not at the
pelvic bones. This could cause serious internal
injuries. Always buckle your belt into the
buckle nearest you.
A: The belt is buckled in the wrong place.
1-18
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if you wear the
shoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, your
body would move too far forward, which would
increase the chance of head and neck injury.
Also, the belt would apply too much force to
the ribs, which are not as strong as shoulder
bones. You could also severely injure internal
organs like your liver or spleen.
A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It should
be worn over the shoulder at all times.
1-19
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt.
In a crash, you would not have the full width of
the belt to spread impact forces. If a belt is
twisted, make it straight so it can work
properly, or ask your dealer to fix it.
A: The belt is twisted across the body.
1-20
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant
women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to be
seriously injured if they do not wear safety belts.
To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.
The belt should go back out of the way.
Before you close the door, be sure the belt is out of the
way. If you slam the door on it, you can damage
both the belt and your vehicle.
A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt, and
the lap portion should be worn as low as possible,
below the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.
The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the mother.
When a safety belt is worn properly, it is more likely that
the fetus will not be hurt in a crash. For pregnant women,
as for anyone, the key to making safety belts effective is
wearing them properly.
1-21
Right Front Passenger Position
Rear Seat Passengers
To learn how to wear the right front passenger’s safety
belt properly, see Driver Position on page 1-15.
It is very important for rear seat passengers to buckle
up! Accident statistics show that unbelted people in
the rear seat are hurt more often in crashes than those
who are wearing safety belts.
The right front passenger’s safety belt works the same
way as the driver’s safety belt — except for the following.
If you ever pull the shoulder portion of the belt out all
the way, you will engage the child restraint locking
feature. If this happens, just let the belt go back all the
way and start again.
Rear passengers who are not safety belted can be
thrown out of the vehicle in a crash. And they can strike
others in the vehicle who are wearing safety belts.
Lap-Shoulder Belt
All rear seating positions have lap-shoulder belts.
Here is how to wear one properly.
If the belt stops before it reaches the buckle, tilt the
latch plate and keep pulling until you can buckle the belt.
1-22
2. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
When the shoulder belt is pulled out all the way,
it will lock. If it does, let it go back all the way and
start again. If the belt is not long enough,
see Safety Belt Extender on page 1-27.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Do not let it get twisted.
The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt
across you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt
go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt
across you more slowly.
3. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the
shoulder part.
1-23
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt
is too loose. In a crash, you would move
forward too much, which could increase injury.
The shoulder belt should fit against your body.
The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on
the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash this applies
force to the strong pelvic bones. And you would be less
likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it, the
belt would apply force at your abdomen. This could cause
serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go
over the shoulder and across the chest. These parts of
the body are best able to take belt restraining forces.
1-24
To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for
Children and Small Adults
Your vehicle may have this feature. If not, you can get it
from your dealer.
Rear shoulder belt comfort guides provide added safety
belt comfort for older children who have outgrown
booster seats and for small adults. When attached to a
shoulder belt, the comfort guide better positions the
belt away from the neck and head.
There is one guide available for each of the rear outside
passenger positions in the second row. Here is how
to attach the comfort guide to the shoulder belt.
1. Slide the guide off of its storage clip located
between the interior body and the seatback.
1-25
2. Slide the guide under and past the belt. The elastic
cord must be under the belt. Then, place the guide
over the belt and insert the two edges of the
belt into the slots of the guide.
1-26
3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies flat.
The elastic cord must be under the belt and the
guide on top.
Safety Belt Pretensioners
Your vehicle has safety belt pretensioners. You will find
them on the buckle end of the safety belts for the
driver and right front passenger. They help the safety
belts reduce a person’s forward movement in a
moderate to severe frontal and near frontal crash.
Pretensioners work only once. If they activate in a crash,
you will need to get new ones, and probably other
new parts for your safety belt system. See Replacing
Restraint System Parts After a Crash on page 1-59.
Safety Belt Extender
4. Buckle, position and release the safety belt as
described in Rear Seat Passengers on page 1-22.
Make sure that the shoulder belt crosses the
shoulder.
To remove and store the comfort guides, squeeze the
belt edges together so that you can take them out of the
guides. Slide the guide back on its storage clip located
between the interior body and the seatback.
If the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you,
you should use it.
But if a safety belt is not long enough, your dealer will
order you an extender. It is free. When you go in to
order it, take the heaviest coat you will wear, so
the extender will be long enough for you. To help avoid
personal injury, do not let someone else use it, and
use it only for the seat it is made to fit. The extender has
been designed for adults. Never use it for securing
child seats. To wear it, just attach it to the regular safety
belt. For more information, see the instruction sheet
that comes with the extender.
1-27
Child Restraints
Older Children
Q: What is the proper way to wear safety belts?
A: If possible, an older child should wear a
lap-shoulder belt and get the additional restraint a
shoulder belt can provide. The shoulder belt
should not cross the face or neck. The lap belt
should fit snugly below the hips, just touching the
top of the thighs. It should never be worn over
the abdomen, which could cause severe or even
fatal internal injuries in a crash.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear seat.
In a crash, children who are not buckled up can strike
other people who are buckled up, or can be thrown
out of the vehicle. Older children need to use safety
belts properly.
Older children who have outgrown booster seats should
wear the vehicle’s safety belts.
1-28
Q: What if a child is wearing a lap-shoulder belt,
but the child is so small that the shoulder belt
is very close to the child’s face or neck?
A: If the child is sitting in a seat next to a window,
move the child toward the center of the vehicle.
If the child is sitting in the center rear seat
passenger position, move the child toward the
safety belt buckle. In either case, be sure that the
shoulder belt still is on the child’s shoulder, so
that in a crash the child’s upper body would have
the restraint the belts provide.
If the child is sitting in a rear seat outside position,
see Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for Children
and Small Adults on page 1-25.
{CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here two children are wearing the same belt.
The belt can not properly spread the impact
forces. In a crash, the two children can be
crushed together and seriously injured. A belt
must be used by only one person at a time.
1-29
{CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here a child is sitting in a seat that has a
lap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part is
behind the child. If the child wears the belt in
this way, in a crash the child might slide under
the belt. The belt’s force would then be applied
right on the child’s abdomen. That could cause
serious or fatal injuries.
Wherever the child sits, the lap portion of the belt
should be worn low and snug on the hips, just touching
the child’s thighs. This applies belt force to the child’s
pelvic bones in a crash.
1-30
Infants and Young Children
Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! This includes
infants and all other children. Neither the distance
traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes
the need, for everyone, to use safety restraints. In fact,
the law in every state in the United States and in
every Canadian province says children up to some age
must be restrained while in a vehicle.
Every time infants and young children ride in vehicles,
they should have the protection provided by appropriate
restraints. Young children should not use the vehicle’s
adult safety belts alone, unless there is no other choice.
Instead, they need to use a child restraint.
{CAUTION:
People should never hold a baby in their arms
while riding in a vehicle. A baby does not
weigh much — until a crash. During a crash a
baby will become so heavy it is not possible
to hold it. For example, in a crash at only
25 mph (40 km/h), a 12-lb (5.5 kg) baby will
suddenly become a 240-lb (110 kg) force on a
person’s arms. A baby should be secured in
an appropriate restraint.
1-31
Q: What are the different types of add-on
child restraints?
A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased by the
vehicle’s owner, are available in four basic types.
Selection of a particular restraint should take
into consideration not only the child’s weight, height,
and age but also whether or not the restraint will
be compatible with the motor vehicle in which it will
be used.
{CAUTION:
Children who are up against, or very close to,
any airbag when it inflates can be seriously
injured or killed. Airbags plus lap-shoulder
belts offer protection for adults and older
children, but not for young children and
infants. Neither the vehicle’s safety belt system
nor its airbag system is designed for them.
Young children and infants need the protection
that a child restraint system can provide.
1-32
For most basic types of child restraints, there are
many different models available. When purchasing a
child restraint, be sure it is designed to be used
in a motor vehicle. If it is, the restraint will have a
label saying that it meets federal motor vehicle
safety standards.
The restraint manufacturer’s instructions that come
with the restraint state the weight and height
limitations for a particular child restraint. In addition,
there are many kinds of restraints available for
children with special needs.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Newborn infants need complete support,
including support for the head and neck.
This is necessary because a newborn infant’s
neck is weak and its head weighs so much
compared with the rest of its body. In a crash,
an infant in a rear-facing seat settles into
the restraint, so the crash forces can be
distributed across the strongest part of an
infant’s body, the back and shoulders. Infants
always should be secured in appropriate infant
restraints.
The body structure of a young child is quite
unlike that of an adult or older child, for whom
the safety belts are designed. A young child’s
hip bones are still so small that the vehicle’s
regular safety belt may not remain low on the
hip bones, as it should. Instead, it may settle
up around the child’s abdomen. In a crash,
the belt would apply force on a body area
that is unprotected by any bony structure.
This alone could cause serious or fatal
injuries. Young children always should be
secured in appropriate child restraints.
1-33
Child Restraint Systems
An infant car bed (A), a special bed made for use in a
motor vehicle, is an infant restraint system designed
to restrain or position a child on a continuous flat
surface. Make sure that the infant’s head rests toward
the center of the vehicle.
1-34
A rear-facing infant seat (B) provides restraint with
the seating surface against the back of the infant.
The harness system holds the infant in place and,
in a crash, acts to keep the infant positioned in
the restraint.
A forward-facing child seat (C-E) provides restraint for
the child’s body with the harness and also sometimes
with surfaces such as T-shaped or shelf-like shields.
A booster seat (F-G) is a child restraint designed to
improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety belt system.
Some booster seats have a shoulder belt positioner,
and some high-back booster seats have a five-point
harness. A booster seat can also help a child to see out
the window.
1-35
Q: How do child restraints work?
A: A child restraint system is any device designed for
use in a motor vehicle to restrain, seat, or position
children. A built-in child restraint system is a
permanent part of the motor vehicle. An add-on
child restraint system is a portable one, which
is purchased by the vehicle’s owner.
For many years, add-on child restraints have used
the adult belt system in the vehicle. To help reduce
the chance of injury, the child also has to be
secured within the restraint. The vehicle’s belt
system secures the add-on child restraint in
the vehicle, and the add-on child restraint’s harness
system holds the child in place within the restraint.
One system, the three-point harness, has straps
that come down over each of the infant’s shoulders
and buckle together at the crotch. The five-point
harness system has two shoulder straps, two hip
straps and a crotch strap. A shield may take
the place of hip straps. A T-shaped shield
has shoulder straps that are attached to a
flat pad which rests low against the child’s body.
A shelf- or armrest-type shield has straps that
are attached to a wide, shelf-like shield that swings
up or to the side.
1-36
When choosing a child restraint, be sure the child
restraint is designed to be used in a vehicle. If it is, it will
have a label saying that it meets federal motor vehicle
safety standards.
Then follow the instructions for the restraint. You may
find these instructions on the restraint itself or in a
booklet, or both. These restraints use the belt system or
the LATCH system in your vehicle, but the child also
has to be secured within the restraint to help reduce the
chance of personal injury. When securing an add-on
child restraint, refer to the instructions that come with the
restraint which may be on the restraint itself or in a
booklet, or both, and to this manual. The child restraint
instructions are important, so if they are not available,
obtain a replacement copy from the manufacturer.
Where to Put the Restraint
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat.
We, therefore, recommend that child restraints be
secured in a rear outside seat position including an
infant riding in a rear-facing infant seat, a child riding
in a forward-facing child seat and an older child
riding in a booster seat. Never put a rear-facing child
restraint in the front passenger seat. Here is why:
CAUTION:
(Continued)
If you need to secure a forward-facing child
restraint in the right front seat, always move
the front passenger seat as far back as it will
go. It is better to secure the child restraint in a
rear seat outside position.
Wherever you install it, be sure to secure the child
restraint properly.
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because
the back of the rear-facing child restraint
would be very close to the inflating airbag.
Always secure a rear-facing child restraint in
a rear seat outside position.
CAUTION:
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure
any child restraint in your vehicle — even when no child
is in it.
(Continued)
1-37
Top Strap
Some child restraints have a top strap, or “top tether.”
It can help restrain the child restraint during a collision.
For it to work, a top strap must be properly anchored
to the vehicle. Some top strap-equipped child restraints
are designed for use with or without the top strap
being anchored. Others require the top strap always
to be anchored. Be sure to read and follow the
instructions for your child restraint. If yours requires that
the top strap be anchored, do not use the restraint
unless it is anchored properly.
If the child restraint does not have a top strap, one can
be obtained, in kit form, for many child restraints.
Ask the child restraint manufacturer whether or not a kit
is available.
1-38
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top strap, and that the strap be
anchored. In the United States, some child restraints
also have a top strap. If your child restraint has a
top strap, it should be anchored.
{CAUTION:
Each top tether bracket is designed to anchor
only one child restraint. Attaching more than
one child restraint to a single bracket could
cause the anchor to come loose or even break
during a crash. A child or others could be
injured if this happens. To help prevent injury
to people and damage to your vehicle, attach
only one child restraint per bracket.
Anchor the top strap to one of the following anchor
points. Be sure to use an anchor point located on the
same side of the vehicle as the seating position
where the child restraint will be placed.
Raise the head restraint and route the top strap under
it. See Head Restraints on page 1-7.
Once you have the top strap anchored, you will be
ready to secure the child restraint itself. Tighten the top
strap when and as the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions say.
Top Strap Anchor Location
The top strap anchors are located on the floor of the
vehicle behind the second row seat. There is one anchor
for each second row seat position.
Do not secure a child restraint with a top strap in the right
front passenger’s position or in the third row if a national
or local law requires that the top strap be anchored, or if
the instructions that come with the child restraint say that
the top strap must be anchored. There is no place to
anchor the top strap in these positions.
1-39
Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers
for Children (LATCH System)
Your vehicle has the LATCH system. You will find
anchors for the second row outboard passenger
positions.
This system, designed to make installation of child
restraints easier, does not use the vehicle’s safety belts.
Instead, it uses vehicle anchors and child restraint
attachments to secure the restraints. Some restraints
also use another vehicle anchor to secure a top
tether strap.
A. Lower Anchorage
B. Lower Anchorage
C. Top Tether
1-40
To assist you in locating
the lower anchors for this
child restraint system, each
seating position with the
LATCH system has a label
on the seatback at each
lower anchor position.
The labels are located near the base of the second row
outboard seating positions.
{CAUTION:
A. Lower Anchorage
B. Lower Anchorage
In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle,
you need a child restraint designed for that system.
If a LATCH-type child restraint is not attached
to its anchorage points, the restraint will not
be able to protect the child correctly. In a
crash, the child could be seriously injured or
killed. Make sure that a LATCH-type child
restraint is properly installed using the
anchorage points, or use the vehicle’s safety
belts to secure the restraint, following the
instructions that came with that restraint, and
also the instructions in this manual.
1-41
Securing a Child Restraint Designed
for the LATCH System
1. Find the LATCH anchorages for the seating
position you want to use, where the bottom of the
seatback meets the back of the seat cushion.
See Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) on page 1-40.
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
3. Attach and tighten the LATCH attachments on the
child restraint to the LATCH anchorages in the
vehicle. The child restraint instructions will show
you how.
4. If the child restraint is forward-facing, attach and
tighten the top tether to the top tether anchorage.
The child restraint instructions will show you
how. Also see Top Strap on page 1-38.
5. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, simply unhook the
top tether from the top tether anchorage and then
disconnect the LATCH attachments from the
LATCH anchorages.
1-42
Securing a Child Restraint in a
Rear Seat Position
If your child restraint is equipped with the LATCH
system, see Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) on page 1-40. See Top Strap
on page 1-38 if the child restraint has one.
There are no top strap anchors in the third row seating
positions. Do not secure a child restraint in the third
row if a national or local law requires that a top strap be
anchored or if the instructions that come with the
restraint say that the top strap must be anchored.
If your child restraint does not have the LATCH system,
you will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the
child restraint in this position. Be sure to follow the
instructions that came with the child restraint. Secure
the child in the child restraint when and as the
instructions say.
{CAUTION:
In a crash, a child secured in a rear-facing child
restraint in the center rear seating position
could be injured by the vehicle’s armrest.
To reduce this risk, the armrest should first be
secured with a special armrest retention strap.
You can get this from your dealer.
Install the armrest retention strap following the
instructions that come with it.
1. Put the child restraint on the seat.
2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
3. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
Center Seat Armrest Retention Strap
1-43
4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.
5. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,
pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the
lap portion of the belt and feed the shoulder
belt back into the retractor. If you are using a
forward-facing child restraint, you may find it helpful
to use your knee to push down on the child restraint
as you tighten the belt.
6. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety
belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an
adult or larger child passenger.
1-44
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Right Front Seat Position
If your child restraint is equipped with the LATCH
system, see Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) on page 1-40.
There is no top strap anchor in the right front
passenger’s position. Do not secure a child seat in this
position if a national or local law requires that the
top strap be anchored, or if the instructions that come
with the child restraint say that the top strap must
be anchored. See Top Strap on page 1-38 if the child
restraint has one.
Your vehicle has a right front passenger airbag. Never
put a rear facing child restraint in this seat. Here is why:
A rear seat is a safer place to secure a forward-facing
child restraint. If you need to secure a forward-facing
child restraint in the right front seat, you will be using the
lap-shoulder belt to secure the child restraint in this
position. Be sure to follow the instructions that came with
the child restraint. Secure the child in the child restraint
when and as the instructions say.
1. Because your vehicle has a right front passenger’s
airbag, always move the seat as far back as it will
go before securing a forward-facing child restraint.
See Power Seats on page 1-2 or Manual Passenger
Seat on page 1-2.
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because
the back of the rear-facing child restraint
would be very close to the inflating airbag.
Always secure a rear-facing child restraint in
a rear seat.
1-45
4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
1-46
5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.
Airbag System
Your vehicle has six airbags:
• A frontal airbag for the driver and another frontal
airbag for the right front passenger,
• a seat-mounted side impact airbag for the driver
and another for the right front passenger,
• a roof-mounted side impact airbag for the driver
and passenger directly behind the driver, and
• a roof-mounted side impact airbag for the right front
passenger and the person seated directly behind
that passenger.
6. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,
pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the
lap portion of the belt and feed the shoulder
belt back into the retractor. You may find it helpful
to use your knee to push down on the child
restraint as you tighten the belt.
Frontal airbags are designed to help reduce the risk of
injury from the force of an inflating airbag. But these
airbags must inflate very quickly to do their job
and comply with federal regulations.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety
belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an
adult or larger child passenger.
1-47
Here are the most important things to know about the
airbag system:
{CAUTION:
You can be severely injured or killed in a crash
if you are not wearing your safety belt — even if
you have airbags. Wearing your safety belt
during a crash helps reduce your chance of
hitting things inside the vehicle or being ejected
from it. Airbags are “supplemental restraints” to
the safety belts. All airbags are designed to
work with safety belts but do not replace them.
Frontal airbags for the driver and right front
passenger are designed to deploy only in
moderate to severe frontal and near frontal
crashes. They are not designed to inflate in
rollover, rear or low-speed frontal crashes, or in
many side crashes. And, for some unrestrained
occupants, frontal airbags may provide less
protection in frontal crashes than more
forceful airbags have provided in the past.
The seat-mounted side impact airbags and
roof-mounted side impact airbags are designed
CAUTION:
1-48
(Continued)
CAUTION:
(Continued)
to inflate only in moderate to severe crashes
where something hits the side of your vehicle.
They are not designed to inflate in frontal,
in rollover or in rear crashes. Everyone in
your vehicle should wear a safety belt
properly — whether or not there is an airbag
for that person.
{CAUTION:
Both frontal and side impact airbags inflate
with great force, faster than the blink of an
eye. If you are too close to an inflating airbag,
as you would be if you were leaning forward,
it could seriously injure you. Safety belts help
keep you in position for airbag inflation before
and during a crash. Always wear your safety
belt even with frontal airbags. The driver
should sit as far back as possible while still
maintaining control of the vehicle. Occupants
should not lean on or sleep against the door.
{CAUTION:
Anyone who is up against, or very close to,
any airbag when it inflates can be seriously
injured or killed. Airbags plus lap-shoulder
belts offer the best protection for adults, but
not for young children and infants. Neither the
vehicle’s safety belt system nor its airbag
system is designed for them. Young children
and infants need the protection that a child
restraint system can provide. Always secure
children properly in your vehicle. To read how,
see Older Children on page 1-28 or Infants and
Young Children on page 1-31.
There is an airbag
readiness light on the
instrument panel, which
shows the airbag symbol.
The system checks the airbag electrical system for
malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical
problem. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3-37
for more information.
1-49
Where Are the Airbags?
The front passenger’s frontal airbag is in the instrument
panel on the passenger’s side.
The driver’s frontal airbag is in the middle of the
steering wheel.
1-50
The driver’s side impact airbag is in the side of the
driver’s seatback closest to the door.
The right front passenger’s side impact airbag is in the
side of the passenger’s seatback closest to the door.
1-51
The roof-mounted side impact airbag for the driver and
the passenger directly behind the driver is in the
ceiling above the side windows.
1-52
The roof-mounted side impact airbag for the front
passenger and the passenger directly behind the front
passenger is in the ceiling above the side windows.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
If something is between an occupant and an
airbag, the airbag might not inflate properly or
it might force the object into that person
causing severe injury or even death. The path
of an inflating airbag must be kept clear.
Do not put anything between an occupant and
an airbag, and do not attach or put anything
on the steering wheel hub or on or near any
other airbag covering. Do not let seat covers
block the inflation path of a side impact airbag.
If something is between an occupant and an
airbag, the bag might not inflate properly or it
might force the object into that person causing
severe injury or even death. The path of an
inflating airbag must be kept clear. Do not put
anything between an occupant and an airbag,
and do not attach or put anything on the
steering wheel hub or on or near any other
airbag covering. And, because your vehicle
has side impact airbags, never secure anything
to the roof of your vehicle by routing the rope
or tiedown through any door or window
opening. If you do, the path of an inflating side
impact airbag will be blocked. The path of an
inflating airbag must be kept clear.
1-53
When Should an Airbag Inflate?
The driver’s and right front passenger’s frontal airbags
are designed to inflate in moderate to severe frontal
or near-frontal crashes. But they are designed to inflate
only if the impact exceeds a predetermined deployment
threshold. Deployment thresholds take into account
a variety of desired deployment and non-deployment
events and are used to predict how severe a crash
is likely to be in time for the airbags to inflate and help
restrain the occupants. Whether your frontal airbags
will or should deploy is not based on how fast your
vehicle is traveling. It depends largely on what you hit,
the direction of the impact and how quickly your
vehicle slows down.
In addition, your vehicle has “dual stage” frontal airbags,
which adjust the restraint according to crash severity.
Your vehicle is equipped with an electronic frontal
sensor, which helps the sensing system distinguish
between a moderate frontal impact and a more severe
frontal impact. For moderate frontal impacts, these
airbags inflate at a level less than full deployment.
For more severe frontal impacts, full deployment occurs.
If the front of your vehicle goes straight into a wall that
does not move or deform, the threshold level for the
reduced deployment is about 12 to 16 mph (19 to
26 km/h), and the threshold level for a full deployment is
about 18 to 24 mph (29 to 38.5 km/h). (The threshold
level can vary, however, with specific vehicle design,
so that it can be somewhat above or below this range.)
Airbags may inflate at different crash speeds.
For example:
• If the vehicle hits a stationary object, the airbag
could inflate at a different crash speed than if
the object were moving.
• If the object deforms, the airbag could inflate at a
different crash speed than if the object does not
deform.
• If the vehicle hits a narrow object (like a pole) the
airbag could inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle hits a wide object (like a wall).
• If the vehicle goes into an object at an angle the
airbag could inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle goes straight into the object.
The frontal airbags (driver and right front passenger)
are not intended to inflate during vehicle rollovers, rear
impacts, or in many side impacts because inflation
would not likely help the occupants.
1-54
The side impact airbags are designed to inflate in
moderate to severe side crashes. A side impact airbag
will inflate if the crash severity is above the system’s
designed “threshold level.” The threshold level can vary
with specific vehicle design. Side impact airbags are
not designed to inflate in frontal or near-frontal impacts,
rollovers or rear impacts, because inflation would not
likely help the occupant. A side impact airbag will
only deploy on the side of the vehicle that is struck.
In any particular crash, no one can say whether
an airbag should have inflated simply because of the
damage to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs
were. For frontal airbags, inflation is determined by
the angle of the impact and how quickly the vehicle
slows down in frontal and near-frontal impacts. For side
impact airbags, inflation is determined by the location
and severity of the impact.
What Makes an Airbag Inflate?
In an impact of sufficient severity, the airbag sensing
system detects that the vehicle is in a crash. For both
frontal and side impact airbags, the sensing system
triggers a release of gas from the inflator, which inflates
the airbag. The inflator, airbag and related hardware
are all part of the airbag modules inside the steering
wheel, instrument panel, the side of the front seatbacks
closest to the door and the ceiling of the vehicle,
near the side windows.
How Does an Airbag Restrain?
In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions,
even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel or
the instrument panel. In moderate to severe side
collisions, even belted occupants can contact the inside
of the vehicle. The airbag supplements the protection
provided by safety belts. Airbags distribute the force of
the impact more evenly over the occupant’s upper
body, stopping the occupant more gradually. But the
frontal airbags would not help you in many types
of collisions, including rollovers, rear impacts, and many
side impacts, primarily because an occupant’s motion
is not toward the airbag. Side impact airbags would not
help you in many types of collisions, including frontal
or near frontal collisions, rollovers, and rear impacts,
primarily because an occupant’s motion is not toward
those airbags. Airbags should never be regarded
as anything more than a supplement to safety belts, and
then only in moderate to severe frontal or near-frontal
collisions for the driver’s and right front passenger’s
frontal airbags, and only in moderate to severe
side collisions for the side impact airbags.
1-55
What Will You See After an
Airbag Inflates?
After the airbag inflates, it quickly deflates,
so quickly that some people may not even realize
the airbag inflated. Some components of the airbag
module — the steering wheel hub for the driver’s airbag,
the instrument panel for the right front passenger’s
bag, the side of the seatback closest to the door for
the seat-mounted side impact airbags and the area
along the ceiling of your vehicle near the side
windows — will be hot for a short time. The parts of
the bag that come into contact with you may be warm,
but not too hot to touch. There will be some smoke
and dust coming from the vents in the deflated airbags.
Airbag inflation does not prevent the driver from
seeing or being able to steer the vehicle, nor does it
stop people from leaving the vehicle.
1-56
{CAUTION:
When an airbag inflates, there is dust in the
air. This dust could cause breathing problems
for people with a history of asthma or other
breathing trouble. To avoid this, everyone in
the vehicle should get out as soon as it is safe
to do so. If you have breathing problems but
can not get out of the vehicle after an airbag
inflates, then get fresh air by opening a
window or a door. If you experience breathing
problems following an airbag deployment,
you should seek medical attention.
Your vehicle has a feature that will automatically unlock
the doors and turn the interior lamps on when the
airbags inflate (if battery power is available). You can
lock the doors again and turn the interior lamps off
by using the door lock and interior lamp controls.
The hazard warning flashers will also come on when the
airbags deploy. If you want to turn them off, press the
hazard warning flasher button twice.
In many crashes severe enough to inflate the airbag,
windshields are broken by vehicle deformation.
Additional windshield breakage may also occur from the
right front passenger airbag.
• Airbags are designed to inflate only once. After an
airbag inflates, you will need some new parts for
your airbag system. If you do not get them, the air
bag system will not be there to help protect you
in another crash. A new system will include airbag
modules and possibly other parts. The service
manual for your vehicle covers the need to replace
other parts.
• Your vehicle is equipped with a crash sensing and
Notice: If you damage the covering for the driver’s
or the right front passenger’s airbag, or the airbag
covering on the driver’s and right front passenger’s
seatback, or the side impact airbag covering on
the ceiling near the side windows, the bag may
not work properly. You may have to replace
the airbag module in the steering wheel, both the
airbag module and the instrument panel for the right
front passenger’s airbag, the airbag module and
seatback for the driver’s and right front passenger’s
seat-mounted side impact airbags, or side impact
airbag module and ceiling covering for the
roof-mounted side impact airbag. Do not open or
break the airbag coverings.
diagnostic module which records information after
a crash. See Vehicle Data Collection and Event
Data Recorders on page 7-10.
• Let only qualified technicians work on your airbag
systems. Improper service can mean that an
airbag system will not work properly. See your
dealer for service.
1-57
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle
Airbags affect how your vehicle should be serviced.
There are parts of the airbag system in several places
around your vehicle. Your dealer and the service manual
have information about servicing your vehicle and the
airbag system. To purchase a service manual, see
Service Publications Ordering Information on page 7-12.
Restraint System Check
Checking Your Restraint Systems
Now and then, make sure the safety belt reminder light
and all your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors
and anchorages are working properly. Look for any other
loose or damaged safety belt system parts. If you see
anything that might keep a safety belt system from doing
its job, have it repaired.
{CAUTION:
Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in a
crash. They can rip apart under impact forces. If a belt
is torn or frayed, get a new one right away.
For up to 10 seconds after the ignition key is
turned off and the battery is disconnected, an
airbag can still inflate during improper service.
You can be injured if you are too close to an
airbag when it inflates. Avoid wires wrapped
with yellow tape, yellow coverings or yellow
connectors. They are probably part of the
airbag systems. Be sure to follow proper
service procedures, and make sure the person
performing work for you is qualified to do so.
Also look for any opened or broken airbag covers, and
have them repaired or replaced. (The airbag system
does not need regular maintenance.)
The airbag system does not need regular maintenance.
1-58
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash
{CAUTION:
A crash can damage the restraint systems in
your vehicle. A damaged restraint system
may not properly protect the person using it,
resulting in serious injury or even death in a
crash. To help make sure your restraint
systems are working properly after a crash,
have them inspected and any necessary
replacements made as soon as possible.
If you have had a crash, do you need new belts or
LATCH system parts?
After a very minor collision, nothing may be necessary.
But if the belts were stretched, as they would be if
worn during a more severe crash, then you need
new parts.
If the LATCH system was being used during a more
severe crash, you may need new LATCH system parts.
If belts are cut or damaged, replace them. Collision
damage also may mean you will need to have LATCH
system, safety belt or seat parts repaired or replaced.
New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the belt
or LATCH system was not being used at the time of
the collision.
If an airbag inflates, you will need to replace airbag
system parts. See the part on the airbag system
earlier in this section.
If the frontal airbags inflate, you will also need to
replace the driver’s and right front passenger’s safety
belt buckle assembly. Be sure to do so. Then the
new buckle assembly will be there to help protect you
in a collision.
After a crash you may need to replace the driver and
front passenger’s safety belt buckle assemblies, even if
the frontal airbags have not deployed. The driver
and front passenger’s safety belt buckle assemblies
contain the safety belt pretensioners. Have your safety
belt pretensioners checked if your vehicle has been
in a collision, or if your airbag readiness light stays on
after you start your vehicle or while you are driving.
See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3-37.
1-59
✍ NOTES
1-60
Section 2
Features and Controls
Keys ...............................................................2-3
Remote Keyless Entry System .........................2-5
Remote Keyless Entry System Operation ...........2-6
Doors and Locks .............................................2-8
Door Locks ....................................................2-8
Central Door Unlocking System ........................2-9
Power Door Locks ..........................................2-9
Delayed Locking .............................................2-9
Programmable Automatic Door Locks ..............2-10
Rear Door Security Locks ..............................2-10
Lockout Protection ........................................2-11
Liftgate ........................................................2-12
Windows ........................................................2-13
Power Windows ............................................2-14
Sun Visors ...................................................2-16
Theft-Deterrent Systems ..................................2-17
Theft-Deterrent System ..................................2-17
Immobilizer ..................................................2-18
Immobilizer Operation ....................................2-19
Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ................2-20
New Vehicle Break-In ....................................2-20
Ignition Positions ..........................................2-21
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ...................2-22
Starting Your Engine .....................................2-23
Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal ................2-23
Engine Coolant Heater ..................................2-24
Automatic Transmission Operation ...................2-25
All-Wheel Drive ............................................2-28
Parking Brake ..............................................2-28
Shifting Into Park (P) .....................................2-30
Shifting Out of Park (P) .................................2-32
Parking Over Things That Burn .......................2-33
Engine Exhaust ............................................2-33
Running Your Engine While You Are Parked .......2-34
Mirrors ...........................................................2-35
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
with OnStar® ............................................2-35
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
with OnStar® and Compass ........................2-35
Outside Power Heated Mirrors ........................2-38
Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror ..................2-39
Outside Curb View Assist Mirror .....................2-39
Outside Convex Mirror ...................................2-39
OnStar® System .............................................2-40
HomeLink® Transmitter ...................................2-42
Programming the HomeLink® Transmitter .........2-43
2-1
Section 2
Features and Controls
Storage Areas ................................................2-47
Glove Box ...................................................2-47
Cupholder(s) ................................................2-47
Cell Phone Storage Area ...............................2-47
Front Storage Area .......................................2-47
Center Console Storage Area .........................2-47
Map Pocket .................................................2-47
Assist Handles .............................................2-47
Luggage Carrier ...........................................2-48
2-2
Convenience Net ..........................................2-49
Cargo Cover ................................................2-49
Cargo Management System ...........................2-49
Sunroof .........................................................2-50
Sunroof (UltraView) .......................................2-50
Sunroof (UltraView Plus) ................................2-51
Vehicle Personalization ...................................2-53
Memory Seat and Mirrors ..............................2-53
Keys
{CAUTION:
Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition
key is dangerous for many reasons. They could
operate the power windows or other controls or
even make the vehicle move. The children or
others could be badly injured or even killed.
Do not leave the keys in a vehicle with children.
2-3
One key works all of
the lock cylinders on
the vehicle.
If a replacement key or any additional key is needed,
you must purchase it from your dealer. The key will have
PK3+ stamped on it. Keep the bar code tag that came
with the original keys. Give this tag to your dealer if
you need a new key made. For more information
on Immobilizer see Immobilizer Operation on page 2-19.
Notice: If you ever lock your keys in your vehicle,
you may have to damage the vehicle to get in.
Be sure you have spare keys.
In an emergency, contact Cadillac Roadside Assistance.
See Roadside Service on page 7-6.
Your vehicle has an Immobilizer Vehicle Theft-Deterrent
System. The key has a transponder in the key head
that matches a decoder in the vehicle’s steering column.
2-4
If your vehicle is equipped with the OnStar system with
an active subscription and you lock your keys inside
the vehicle, OnStar may be able to send a command to
unlock your vehicle. See OnStar® System on page 2-40
for more information.
Remote Keyless Entry System
Your keyless entry system operates on a radio
frequency subject to Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
At times you may notice a decrease in range. This is
normal for any remote keyless entry system. If the
transmitter does not work or if you have to stand closer
to your vehicle for the transmitter to work, try this:
• Check the distance. You may be too far from your
vehicle. You may need to stand closer during
rainy or snowy weather.
• Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may
be blocking the signal. Take a few steps to the
left or right, hold the transmitter higher, and
try again.
• Check to determine if battery replacement is
necessary. See “Battery Replacement” under
Remote Keyless Entry System Operation on
page 2-6.
• If you are still having trouble, see your dealer or a
qualified technician for service.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
2-5
Remote Keyless Entry System
Operation
If your vehicle is programmed for remote confirmation,
the doors must be closed for this feature to work.
If a door is open, remote confirmation will be canceled.
With this feature, you can lock and unlock the doors or
the liftgate and turn on your vehicle’s interior lamps
from about 10 feet (3 m) away using the remote keyless
entry transmitter supplied with your vehicle.
W(Unlock):
Q (Lock): Press this
symbol on the remote
keyless entry transmitter
to lock the doors.
This also arms the
theft-deterrent system.
You can program your vehicle so that the exterior lamps
will flash and/or the horn will sound when you lock
the doors with the remote keyless entry transmitter.
See DIC Vehicle Personalization on page 3-66 for more
information on programming this feature.
2-6
Press this symbol on the remote
keyless entry transmitter to unlock the driver’s door.
This also disarms the theft-deterrent system. Press the
button again to unlock the rest of the doors.
You can program your vehicle so that the exterior
lamps will flash when you unlock the doors with the
remote keyless entry transmitter. See DIC Vehicle
Personalization on page 3-66 for more information on
programming this feature.
If your vehicle is programmed for remote confirmation,
the doors must be closed for this feature to work.
If a door is open, remote confirmation will be canceled.
L(Panic Alarm): The remote keyless entry
transmitter comes equipped with an instant panic alarm.
Press the horn symbol when the ignition is turned off.
The horn will sound and the exterior lamps will flash for
up to 30 seconds. To stop the instant panic alarm,
press the symbol again or turn the ignition to ON.
The remote keyless entry transmitter can be used to
recall the memory settings for up to two drivers.
For more information, see DIC Vehicle Personalization
on page 3-66 and Memory Seat and Mirrors on
page 2-53.
Matching Transmitter(s) to Your Vehicle
Each remote keyless entry transmitter is coded to
prevent another transmitter from unlocking your vehicle.
If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement can
be purchased through your dealer. Remember to bring
any remaining transmitters with you when you go to
your dealer. When the dealer matches the replacement
transmitter to your vehicle, any remaining transmitters
must also be matched. Once your dealer has coded the
new transmitter, the lost transmitter will not unlock
your vehicle. Each vehicle can have a maximum
of four transmitters matched to it.
Battery Replacement
Under normal use, the battery in your remote keyless
entry transmitter should last about four years.
You can tell the battery is weak if the transmitter won’t
work at the normal range in any location. If you have
to get close to your vehicle before the transmitter works,
it’s probably time to change the battery.
Notice: When replacing the battery, use care not to
touch any of the circuitry. Static from your body
transferred to these surfaces may damage the
transmitter.
1. Use a flat thin object to pry open the transmitter.
2. Once the transmitter is separated, use a pencil
or similar object to remove the old battery. Do not
use a metal object.
3. Insert the new battery as the instructions under the
cover indicate.
4. Snap the transmitter back together tightly to be sure
no moisture can enter.
5. Press any button on the remote keyless entry
transmitter to resynchronize the transmitter.
6. Check the operation of the transmitter.
2-7
Doors and Locks
Door Locks
{CAUTION:
Unlocked doors can be dangerous.
• Passengers — especially children — can
easily open the doors and fall out of a
moving vehicle. When a door is locked,
the handle will not open it. You increase
the chance of being thrown out of the
vehicle in a crash if the doors are not
locked. So, wear safety belts properly and
lock the doors whenever you drive.
• Young children who get into unlocked
vehicles may be unable to get out. A child
can be overcome by extreme heat and can
suffer permanent injuries or even death
from heat stroke. Always lock your vehicle
whenever you leave it.
• Outsiders can easily enter through an
unlocked door when you slow down or
stop your vehicle. Locking your doors can
help prevent this from happening.
2-8
There are several ways to lock and unlock your vehicle.
Because your vehicle has the theft-deterrent system,
you must unlock the doors from the outside with the key
or remote keyless entry transmitter to avoid setting off
the alarm. If the windows are down and the doors
are locked, don’t reach in to manually unlock the vehicle
because you will set off the alarm.
From the inside, use the
manual lock levers located
on the door panels near
the windows.
Push down on the manual lock lever to lock the door.
To unlock the door, pull up on the lever.
Central Door Unlocking System
Delayed Locking
Your vehicle has a central door unlocking feature.
When unlocking the driver’s door, you can unlock the
other doors by holding the key in the turned position for
a few seconds or by quickly turning the key twice in
the lock cylinder.
With this feature, you can delay the actual locking of
the doors.
Power Door Locks
The power door lock
switches are located on
the front doors.
When the power door lock switch or the lock button on
the remote keyless entry transmitter is pressed when
the key is not in the ignition and the driver’s door
is opened, a chime will sound three times indicating that
delayed locking is active.
When all the doors are closed, the doors will lock
automatically after five seconds. If a door is reopened
before five seconds have elapsed, the five second timer
will reset itself once all the doors are closed again.
You can press the door lock switch or the lock button
on the remote keyless entry transmitter again to override
this feature and lock the doors immediately.
Press the bottom part of the power door lock switch to
lock or the top of the switch to unlock all the doors
at once.
You can turn this feature off using the Driver Information
Center (DIC). When delayed locking is off, the doors
will lock immediately when you press the power
door lock switch or the lock button on the remote keyless
entry transmitter. See DIC Vehicle Personalization on
page 3-66 for more information.
The rear doors do not have power door lock switches.
You must use the manual levers to lock and unlock
the rear doors when riding in the rear seat.
2-9
Programmable Automatic
Door Locks
Your vehicle is programmed so that when the doors are
closed, the ignition is on and the shift lever is moved
out of PARK (P), all the doors will lock. The front
door inside handles will remain active. The doors will
unlock every time you stop the vehicle and move
the shift lever back into PARK (P).
Rear Door Security Locks
Your vehicle is equipped with rear door security locks
that prevent passengers from opening the rear doors on
your vehicle from the inside.
The rear door security
locks are located on
the inside edge of each
rear door. You must
open the rear doors to
access them.
If someone needs to exit the vehicle once the doors are
locked, have that person use the manual lever or
power door lock switch for the rear doors. The front
doors will remain unlocked from inside the vehicle.
When the door is closed again, it will not lock
automatically. Use the manual lever or the power door
lock switch to lock the door.
The power door locks can be programmed through
prompts displayed on the Driver Information
Center (DIC). These prompts allow you to choose
various lock and unlock settings. For more information
on programming, see DIC Vehicle Personalization
on page 3-66.
To use these locks, do the following:
1. Insert your key into the slot next to the rear door
security lock label and turn it to engage the lock.
2. Close the door.
3. Repeat the steps for the other rear door.
The rear doors on your vehicle cannot be opened from
the inside when this feature is in use.
2-10
When you want to open a rear door when the security
lock is on, do the following:
1. Unlock the door using the remote keyless entry
transmitter, the front door power lock switch or
by lifting the rear door manual lock.
2. Then open the door from the outside.
To cancel the rear door security lock, do the following:
1. Unlock the door and open it from the outside.
2. Insert your key into the slot next to the rear
door security lock label and turn it to disengage
the lock.
Lockout Protection
If you press the power door lock switch when the key is
in the ignition and any door is open, all the doors will
lock and only the driver’s door will unlock. If you
close the doors, you can lock them using the remote
keyless entry transmitter. Be sure to remove the
key from the ignition when locking your vehicle.
This feature can be overridden by pressing the lock
button on the remote keyless entry transmitter or
by pressing the power lock switch a second time.
3. Repeat the steps for the other lock.
The rear door locks will now work normally.
2-11
Liftgate
To unlock the liftgate from the outside, turn the key in
the driver’s door cylinder counterclockwise or use
the remote keyless entry transmitter. To lock the
liftgate using the key, turn the key clockwise in the
driver’s door.
Open the liftgate using the handle located below the
license plate. Once slightly opened, the liftgate will rise
by itself.
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to drive with the liftgate
open because carbon monoxide (CO) gas can
come into your vehicle. You can not see or
smell CO. It can cause unconsciousness and
even death. If you must drive with the liftgate
open or if electrical wiring or other cable
connections must pass through the seal
between the body and the liftgate:
• Make sure all other windows are shut.
• Turn the fan on your heating or cooling
system to its highest speed and select the
control setting that will force outside air
into your vehicle. See Dual Climate Control
System on page 3-25.
• If you have air outlets on or under the
instrument panel, open them all the way.
See Engine Exhaust on page 2-33.
To close the liftgate, pull down on the handle, then
firmly shut the liftgate. Don’t drive with the liftgate open,
even slightly. See Engine Exhaust on page 2-33.
2-12
Windows
{CAUTION:
Leaving children, helpless adults, or pets in a
vehicle with the windows closed is dangerous.
They can be overcome by the extreme heat
and suffer permanent injuries or even death
from heat stroke. Never leave a child, a
helpless adult, or a pet alone in a vehicle,
especially with the windows closed in warm
or hot weather.
2-13
Power Windows
Express-Down Window
This feature is on all the power windows. Press the
down arrow on the switch to the second position
to activate the express-down feature. If you want to stop
the window as it is lowering, press the down arrow on
the switch again.
Express-Up Window
This feature is on both front power windows. Press the
up arrow on the switch to the second position to
activate the express-up feature. If you want to stop the
window as it is raising, press the up arrow on the
switch again.
Programming the Power Windows
The power window switches are located on the armrest
near each window. Press the up or down arrows on
the switches to raise or lower the windows.
Your vehicle has Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
that allows you to use the power windows once
the ignition has been turned off for up to 10 minutes.
See Retained Accessory Power (RAP) on page 2-22.
2-14
If the battery on your vehicle has been recharged,
disconnected or is not working, you will need to
reprogram each front power window for the express-up
feature to work. Before reprogramming, you will need
to replace or recharge your vehicle’s battery.
To program each front window, follow these steps:
1. With the ignition in ACCESSORY, ON or when
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) is active, close
all doors.
2. Press and hold the down arrow on the power
window switch until the window has fully opened.
3. Press the up arrow on the power window switch
until the window is fully closed.
4. Continue holding the up arrow on the switch for
approximately two seconds after the window is
completely closed.
The window is now reprogrammed. Repeat the process
for the other front window.
Anti-Pinch Feature
If any object is in the path of the window when the
express-up is active, the window will stop at the
obstruction and auto-reverse to a preset factory position.
Weather conditions such as severe icing may also
cause the window to auto-reverse. The window will
return to normal operation once the obstruction
or condition is removed.
{CAUTION:
If express override is activated, the window
will not reverse automatically. You or others
could be injured and the window could be
damaged. Before you use express override,
make sure that all people and obstructions are
clear of the window path.
Express Window Override
A condition may exist that causes auto-reversal of the
window due to weather or an obstruction. In an
emergency, the anti-pinch feature can be overridden in
a supervised mode. Hold the window switch all the
way down in the express position. The window will rise
for as long as the switch is held. Once the switch is
released, the express mode is re-activated.
In this mode, the window can still close on an object in
its path. Use care when using the override mode.
2-15
Window Lockout
To restore power to the passenger windows, press the
button again. The light on the button will go out.
This feature allows you to disable the passenger
window switches.
The passenger window
lockout button is located
below the power window
switches on the driver’s
door armrest.
You can program this feature to disable all passenger
windows or only the rear passenger windows.
See DIC Vehicle Personalization on page 3-66 for
more information.
Sun Visors
Swing down the primary visor to block out glare. It can
also be detached from the center mount and moved
to the side to block glare from that direction.
The driver’s sunshade may also have buttons for a
built-in garage door opener. See HomeLink® Transmitter
on page 2-42 for more information.
Press the button to disable the passenger window
controls. The light on the button will illuminate, indicating
that the feature is in use. The passenger windows still
can be raised or lowered using the driver’s window
switches when the lockout feature is active.
2-16
Lighted Visor Vanity Mirror
Pull the visor down and lift the cover. The light will
automatically come on. The light will go out when you
close the cover.
Theft-Deterrent Systems
Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some cities.
Although your vehicle has a number of theft-deterrent
features, we know that nothing we put on it can make it
impossible to steal.
Theft-Deterrent System
The security light is
located on the instrument
panel cluster.
If a door or a liftgate is opened without a key or a
remote keyless entry transmitter, the horn will sound
and the lamps will flash for up to 30 seconds.
The theft-deterrent system will not arm if you lock the
doors with a key, use the manual door lock or if
the liftgate is ajar. It activates only if you use the remote
keyless entry transmitter or the power door lock.
To avoid activating the alarm by accident do the
following:
• The vehicle should be locked with the door key or
the manual door lock after the doors are closed if
you don’t want to arm the theft-deterrent system.
• Always unlock a door with a key or use the remote
If the ignition is off and a door is open, the security light
will flash, reminding you to arm the theft-deterrent system.
To arm the system, do the following:
1. Lock the door using the remote keyless entry
transmitter or the power door lock switch.
2. Close all the doors. The security light will illuminate.
It should go off within approximately 30 seconds.
keyless entry transmitter. Pressing the unlock
button on the remote keyless entry transmitter
disarms the theft-deterrent system. Unlocking a
door any other way while the system is armed
will activate the alarm when a door or the liftgate
is opened.
If you activate the alarm by accident, unlock the driver’s
door with your key. You can also turn off the alarm
by using the unlock button on the remote keyless
entry transmitter, or by starting the vehicle with a
valid key.
2-17
Testing the Alarm
1. From inside the vehicle, roll down the window, then
get out of the vehicle, keeping the door open.
2. From outside of the vehicle, with the door open,
lock the vehicle using the power door lock switch
or the remote keyless entry transmitter and
close the door. Wait approximately 30 seconds until
the security light goes off.
3. Reach in and unlock the door using the manual
lock and open the door. The horn will sound and
the exterior lamps will flash.
You can turn off the alarm by unlocking the driver’s door
with your key, using the unlock button on the remote
keyless entry transmitter or by starting the car with
a valid key.
If the alarm does not sound when it should, check to
see if the horn works. The horn fuse may be blown.
To replace the fuse, see Fuses and Circuit Breakers on
page 5-93. If the fuse does not need to be replaced,
you may need to have your vehicle serviced.
To reduce the possibility of theft, always arm the
theft-deterrent system when leaving your vehicle.
2-18
Immobilizer
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
Immobilizer Operation
Your vehicle is equipped
with a passive
theft-deterrent system.
If the engine still does not start, and the key appears to
be undamaged, try another ignition key. At this time,
you may also want to check the fuse. See Fuses
and Circuit Breakers on page 5-93. If the engine still
does not start with the other key, your vehicle needs
service. If your vehicle does start, the first key
may be faulty. See your dealer who can service the
theft-deterrent system to have a new key made.
It is possible for the theft-deterrent system decoder to
learn the transponder value of a new or replacement
key. Up to 10 additional keys may be programmed for
the vehicle. This procedure is for learning additional
keys only.
The system works when you turn the key to ON.
The key uses a transponder that matches an immobilizer
control unit in your vehicle. The correct key will start
the vehicle. If the key is ever damaged, you may not be
able to start your vehicle.
Canadian Owners: If you lose or damage your keys,
only a GM dealer can service the theft-deterrent system
to have new keys made. To program additional keys
you will require two current driver’s keys. You must add
a step to the following procedure. After Step 2, repeat
Steps 1 and 2 with the second current driver’s key.
Then continue with Step 3.
When trying to start the vehicle, if the engine does not
start and the security light comes on, the key may
have a damaged transponder. Turn the ignition off and
try again.
2-19
To program a new key do the following:
1. Verify that the new key has PK3+ stamped on it.
2. Insert the current driver’s key in the ignition
and start the engine. If the engine will not start see
your dealer for service.
3. After the engine has started, turn the key to OFF,
and remove the key.
4. Insert the key to be programmed and turn it to ON
within ten seconds of removing the previous key.
5. The security light will turn off once the key has been
programmed. It may not be apparent that the
security light went on due to how quickly the key is
programmed.
6. Repeat the Steps 1 through 4 if additional keys are
to be programmed.
If you are ever driving and the security light comes on
and stays on, you will be able to restart your engine
if you turn it off. The theft-deterrent system, however,
is not working properly and must be serviced by
your dealer. Your vehicle is not protected by the
theft-deterrent system at this time.
In an emergency, contact Cadillac Roadside Assistance.
See Roadside Service on page 7-6.
2-20
Starting and Operating
Your Vehicle
New Vehicle Break-In
Notice: Your vehicle does not need an elaborate
“break-in.” But it will perform better in the
long run if you follow these guidelines for the
first 500 miles (805 km):
• Do not drive at any one speed — fast or slow.
• Do not exceed 70 mph (113 km/h).
• Do not make full-throttle starts; also refrain
from using the full throttle while driving.
If these procedures are not followed, your engine,
axle or other parts could be damaged.
Avoid making hard stops for the first 200 miles
(322 km) or so. During this time your new brake
linings are not yet broken in. Hard stops with new
linings can mean premature wear and earlier
replacement. Follow this break-in guideline every
time you get new linings.
Do not tow a trailer during break-in. See Towing a
Trailer on page 4-52 for more information.
Ignition Positions
With the key in the ignition switch, you can turn the key
to four different positions.
A (OFF): This is the only position in which you can
insert or remove the key. This position locks the ignition,
steering wheel and transmission. It is a theft-deterrent
feature.
B (ACCESSORY): This position allows you to use
things like the radio and the windshield wipers when the
engine is off. This position will allow you to turn off
the engine, but still turn the steering wheel.
C (ON): This position is for driving. If your vehicle has
an automatic transmission and you turn off the engine,
the transmission will lock. If you need to shift the
transmission out of PARK (P), the ignition key has to
be in ON.
D (START): This position starts the engine.
Notice: If your key seems stuck in OFF and you
can’t turn it, be sure you are using the correct key;
if so, is it all the way in? If it is, then turn the
steering wheel left and right while you turn the key
hard. Turn the key only with your hand. Using a
tool to force it could break the key or the ignition
switch. If none of these works, then your vehicle
needs service.
2-21
Steering Column Ignition Lock Release
If your vehicle has a dead battery or a battery with
low voltage, you can still release the ignition lock and
remove the key. Use the following procedure to release
the steering column:
3. Insert a narrow, pointed object into the hole in the
steering column cover and press the spring.
4. Then, turn the ignition switch to OFF and remove
the key.
Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
The following accessories on your vehicle may be used
for up to 10 minutes after the ignition key is turned
from ON to OFF:
•
•
•
•
Radio
Power Windows
Audio Steering Wheel Controls (if programmed)
Sunroof
Power to these accessories stops after 10 minutes or
if a door is opened. If you want power for another
10 minutes, close all the doors and turn the ignition key
to ON and then back to OFF.
1. Locate the plastic screw head on the underside of
the plastic cover for the steering column.
2. Insert a flat, thin object into the slot and turn it
until the plastic piece detaches from the steering
column cover.
2-22
Starting Your Engine
Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal
Move your shift lever to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
Your engine will not start in any other position — that is
a safety feature. To restart when you are already
moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only.
If your vehicle is equipped with this feature, you can
change the position of the throttle and brake pedals.
Notice: Do not try to shift to PARK (P) if your
vehicle is moving. If you do, you could damage the
transmission. Shift to PARK (P) only when your
vehicle is stopped.
1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn your
ignition key to START. Then, let go of the key; the
engine will start automatically. The idle speed
will go down as your engine gets warm.
2. If your engine will not start, or starts but then stops,
it could be flooded with too much gasoline.
Try pushing your accelerator pedal all the way to
the floor and holding it there as you turn the key to
START. If the vehicle starts briefly but then stops
again, do the same thing.
Notice: Your engine is designed to work with the
electronics in your vehicle. If you add electrical
parts or accessories, you could change the way the
engine operates. Before adding electrical equipment,
check with your dealer. If you do not, your engine
might not perform properly.
The vehicle must be in PARK (P) for this feature
to operate.
The switch used to
adjust the pedals is
located on the side of
the steering column.
Move the switch rearward to move the pedals closer
to your body. Move the switch forward to move the
pedals away from your body.
2-23
Engine Coolant Heater
Your vehicle may be equipped with an engine
coolant heater.
In very cold weather, 0°F (−18°C) or colder, the engine
coolant heater can help. You will get easier starting
and better fuel economy during engine warm-up.
Usually, the coolant heater should be plugged in a
minimum of four hours prior to starting your vehicle.
At temperatures above 32°F (0°C), use of the coolant
heater is not required.
To Use the Engine Coolant Heater
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord.
The cord is located in the engine compartment
on the driver’s side of the vehicle near the engine
oil dipstick. See Engine Compartment Overview
on page 5-12 for more information on location.
You must remove the plastic cap to access the plug.
2-24
3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110-volt AC outlet.
{CAUTION:
Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet
could cause an electrical shock. Also, the
wrong kind of extension cord could overheat
and cause a fire. You could be seriously
injured. Plug the cord into a properly grounded
three-prong 110-volt AC outlet. If the cord will
not reach, use a heavy-duty three-prong
extension cord rated for at least 15 amps.
4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug and
store the cord as it was before to keep it away
from moving engine parts. If you do not, it could be
damaged.
How long should you keep the coolant heater plugged
in? The answer depends on the outside temperature, the
kind of oil you have, and some other things. Instead
of trying to list everything here, we ask that you contact
your dealer in the area where you will be parking
your vehicle. The dealer can give you the best advice
for that particular area.
Automatic Transmission Operation
The shift lever is located on the center console between
the front seats.
There are several different
positions for the shift lever.
PARK (P): This position locks the rear wheels. It is
the best position to use when you start the engine
because your vehicle cannot move easily.
{CAUTION:
It is dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the
shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.
Do not leave your vehicle when the engine is
running unless you have to. If you have left the
engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly.
You or others could be injured. To be sure your
vehicle will not move, even when you are on
fairly level ground, always set your parking
brake and move the shift lever to PARK (P).
See Shifting Into Park (P) on page 2-30. If you
are pulling a trailer, see Towing a Trailer on
page 4-52.
2-25
Ensure the shift lever is fully in PARK (P) before starting
the engine. Your vehicle has an automatic transmission
shift lock control system. You must fully apply your
regular brakes before you can shift from PARK (P)
when the ignition key is in ON. If you cannot shift out of
PARK (P), ease pressure on the shift lever. Push the
shift lever all the way into PARK (P) while pressing the
button on the shift lever as you maintain brake
application. Then move the shift lever into the gear you
wish. See Shifting Out of Park (P) on page 2-32.
Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your vehicle
is moving forward could damage the transmission.
The repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
Shift to REVERSE (R) only after your vehicle is
stopped.
NEUTRAL (N): In this position, the engine does not
connect with the wheels. To restart when you are
already moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only. You can also
use NEUTRAL (N) when your vehicle is being towed.
{CAUTION:
Shifting into a drive gear while your engine is
running at high speed is dangerous. Unless
your foot is firmly on the brake pedal, your
vehicle could move very rapidly. You could
lose control and hit people or objects. Do not
shift into a drive gear while your engine is
running at high speed.
REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up.
At low vehicle speeds, you can also use REVERSE (R)
to rock your vehicle back and forth to get out of
snow, ice or sand without damaging your transmission.
See If You Are Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow on
page 4-44 for additional information.
2-26
Notice: Shifting out of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N)
with the engine running at high speed may damage
the transmission. The repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. Be sure the engine is not
running at high speed when shifting your vehicle.
AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D): This position is for
normal driving. If you need more power for passing,
and you are:
• Going less than 35 mph (55 km/h), push the
accelerator pedal about halfway down.
• Going about 35 mph (55 km/h) or more, push the
accelerator all the way down.
The transmission will shift down to a lower gear
and have more power.
Notice: Spinning the tires or holding the vehicle in
one place on a hill using only the accelerator
pedal may damage the transmission. If you are
stuck, do not spin the tires. When stopping on a hill,
use the brakes to hold the vehicle in place.
FOURTH (4): This position is also used for normal
driving. However, it offers more power and lower fuel
economy than AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D).
Here are examples for using FOURTH (4) instead of
AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D).
• When driving on hilly, winding roads.
• When going down a steep hill.
Driver Shift Control (DSC)
Your automatic transmission has a Driver Shift Control
(DSC) feature that allows you to change gears similar to a
manual transmission. To use the DSC feature:
1. Slide the shift lever over from AUTOMATIC
OVERDRIVE (D) to the right into the DSC area.
When the transmission is
in DSC mode the sport
mode light in the
instrument panel cluster
will come on.
If you do not move the shift lever forward or
rearward, the vehicle will be in sport mode. While
driving in sport mode, the transmission may remain
in a gear longer than it would in normal driving
mode based on braking, throttle input and vehicle
lateral acceleration.
2. Press the shift lever forward to upshift or rearward
to downshift.
This position may also offer improved trailer towing
performance in certain driving conditions.
2-27
The odometer on the instrument panel cluster will
change to show the requested gear range when moving
the shift lever forward or rearward.
While using the DSC feature the vehicle will have firmer
shifting and increased performance. You can use this
for sport driving or when climbing hills to stay in
gear longer or to down shift for more power or
engine braking.
Parking Brake
The parking brake pedal
is located on the lower
portion of the instrument
panel to the left of the
steering wheel.
The transmission will only allow you to shift into
gears appropriate for the vehicle speed and rpm.
The transmission will not automatically shift to the next
higher gear if the engine rpm is too high.
All-Wheel Drive
If your vehicle is equipped with this feature, engine
power is sent to all four wheels all the time.
This is like four-wheel drive, but it is fully automatic.
2-28
To set the parking brake, hold the regular brake pedal
down with your right foot and push the parking brake
pedal down with your left foot.
If the ignition is on, the brake system warning light on
the instrument panel cluster should come on. If it
does not, you need to have your vehicle serviced.
See Brake System Warning Light on page 3-38 for
more information.
Notice: Driving with the parking brake on can
overheat the brake system and cause premature
wear or damage to brake system parts. Verify that
the parking brake is fully released and the brake
warning light is off before driving.
A warning chime will sound if the parking brake is set,
the ignition is on and the vehicle begins to move.
To stop the chime, fully release the parking brake.
If you are towing a trailer and parking on a hill,
see Towing a Trailer on page 4-52 for more information.
To release the parking brake, pull the release lever
located to the left of the steering wheel on the
instrument panel.
2-29
Shifting Into Park (P)
To shift into PARK (P), use the following steps:
1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot.
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle
if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with
the parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can
roll. If you have left the engine running, the
vehicle can move suddenly. You or others
could be injured. To be sure your vehicle will
not move, even when you are on fairly level
ground, use the steps that follow. If you are
pulling a trailer, see Towing a Trailer on
page 4-52.
2-30
2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) by pressing the
button on the front of the shift lever while pushing
the lever all the way toward the front of the vehicle.
Release the button.
3. With your right foot still holding the brake pedal
down, set the parking brake with your left foot.
See Parking Brake on page 2-28 for more
information.
4. Turn the key to OFF.
5. Remove the key from the ignition switch and take it
with you. If you can leave your vehicle with the key
in your hand, the vehicle is in PARK (P).
Leaving Your Vehicle With the
Engine Running
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to leave your vehicle with
the engine running. Your vehicle could move
suddenly if the shift lever is not fully in
PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly set.
And, if you leave the vehicle with the engine
running, it could overheat and even catch fire.
You or others could be injured. Do not leave
your vehicle with the engine running.
Torque Lock
If you are parking on a hill and you do not shift your
transmission into PARK (P) properly, the weight of the
vehicle may put too much force on the parking pawl
in the transmission. You may find it difficult to pull the
shift lever out of PARK (P). This is called “torque lock.”
To prevent torque lock, set the parking brake and
then shift into PARK (P) properly before you leave the
driver’s seat. To find out how, see “Shifting Into
PARK (P)” listed previously.
If torque lock does occur, you may need to have
another vehicle push yours a little uphill to take some of
the pressure from the parking pawl in the transmission,
so you can pull the shift lever out of PARK (P).
If you have to leave your vehicle with the engine
running, be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P) and your
parking brake is firmly set before you leave it. After you
have moved the shift lever into PARK (P), hold the
regular brake pedal down. Then, see if you can move
the shift lever away from PARK (P) without first pushing
the button on the shift lever. If you can, it means that
the shift lever was not fully locked into PARK (P).
2-31
Shifting Out of Park (P)
Shift Lock Release
Your vehicle has an automatic transmission shift lock
control system. You have to fully apply your regular
brakes before you can shift from PARK (P) when the
ignition is in ON. See Automatic Transmission Operation
on page 2-25 for more information.
If your vehicle has a dead battery or a battery with low
voltage, you can still shift the vehicle into PARK (P)
and remove the ignition key. Use the following
procedure to release the shift lever:
If you cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease the pressure
on the shift lever. Push the shift lever all the way
into PARK (P) while pushing the button on the shift lever
as you maintain brake application. Then move the
shift lever into the gear you want. If you ever hold the
pedal down but still cannot shift out of PARK (P),
try the following:
1. Use a tool to remove
the cap with the lock
symbol located
next to the shift lever.
1. Turn the ignition key to ACCESSORY. Open and
close the driver’s door to turn off the RAP feature.
2. Apply and hold the brake until the end of Step 4.
3. Shift to NEUTRAL (N).
4. Start the vehicle and then shift to the drive gear
you want.
5. Have the vehicle fixed as soon as you can.
2-32
2. Using a narrow, pointed tool, press down on the
mechanism under the cap so that you can move
the shift lever.
Parking Over Things That Burn
Engine Exhaust
{CAUTION:
Engine exhaust can kill. It contains the gas
carbon monoxide (CO), which you cannot
see or smell. It can cause unconsciousness
and death.
{CAUTION:
You might have exhaust coming in if:
• Your exhaust system sounds strange
or different.
• Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.
• Your vehicle was damaged in a collision.
• Your vehicle was damaged when driving
over high points on the road or over
road debris.
• Repairs were not done correctly.
• Your vehicle or exhaust system had been
modified improperly.
Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust
parts under your vehicle and ignite. Do not
park over papers, leaves, dry grass or other
things that can burn.
If you ever suspect exhaust is coming into
your vehicle:
• Drive it only with all the windows down to
blow out any CO; and
• Have your vehicle fixed immediately.
2-33
Running Your Engine While You
Are Parked
It is better not to park with the engine running. But if
you ever have to, here are some things to know.
{CAUTION:
Idling the engine with the climate control
system off could allow dangerous exhaust into
your vehicle. See the earlier caution under
Engine Exhaust on page 2-33.
Also, idling in a closed-in place can let deadly
carbon monoxide (CO) into your vehicle
even if the climate control fan is at the highest
setting. One place this can happen is a garage.
Exhaust — with CO — can come in easily.
NEVER park in a garage with the engine
running.
Another closed-in place can be a blizzard.
See Winter Driving on page 4-40.
2-34
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle
if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with
the parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can
roll. Do not leave your vehicle when the engine
is running unless you have to. If you have left
the engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured.
To be sure your vehicle will not move, even
when you are on fairly level ground, always set
your parking brake and move the shift lever
to PARK (P).
Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle will not
move. See Shifting Into Park (P) on page 2-30.
If you are pulling a trailer, see Towing a Trailer on
page 4-52.
Mirrors
Cleaning the Mirror
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
with OnStar®
When cleaning the mirror, use a paper towel or similar
material dampened with glass cleaner. Do not spray
glass cleaner directly on the mirror as that may cause
the liquid cleaner to enter the mirror housing.
The vehicle may have an automatic dimming inside
rearview mirror with OnStar® controls. For more
information about OnStar®, see OnStar® System on
page 2-40.
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
with OnStar® and Compass
O (On/Off): The on/off button, located on the lower
left side of the mirror, is used for the automatic dimming
functions of the rearview mirror.
The vehicle may have an automatic dimming inside
rearview mirror with a compass and OnStar® controls.
For more information about OnStar®, see OnStar®
System on page 2-40.
Mirror Operation
The automatic dimming feature comes on each time the
vehicle is started. Automatic dimming reduces the
glare of lights from behind the vehicle.
To turn the automatic dimming feature on or off, press
and release the on/off button. The indicator light will
illuminate when this feature is on.
The mirror has an eight-point compass display in the
upper right corner of the mirror. When on, the compass
automatically calibrates, or sets the driving direction,
as the vehicle is driven. If the vehicle has the navigation
option, the direction the vehicle is facing will be
displayed on the navigation screen.
O (On/Off): The on/off button is located on the lower
left side of the mirror and is used for the automatic
dimming and compass functions of the rearview mirror.
2-35
Mirror Operation
The automatic dimming feature comes on each time the
vehicle is started.
To turn the automatic dimming feature on or off, press
the on/off button. The indicator light will illuminate
when this feature is on.
Compass Operation
Press the on/off button once to turn the compass
on or off.
When the ignition and the compass feature are on,
the compass will show two character boxes for
approximately two seconds. After two seconds, the
mirror will display the current compass direction.
Compass Calibration
If after two seconds the display does not show a
compass direction, (N for North for example), there may
be a strong magnetic field interfering with the compass.
Such interference may be caused by a magnetic
antenna mount, note pad holder, or similar object. If the
letter C appears in the compass window, the compass
may need to be reset or calibrated.
2-36
The mirror can be calibrated by driving the vehicle in
circles at 5 mph (8 km/h) or less until the display reads
a direction.
The compass can be calibrated by pressing and
holding the on/off button until a C is shown in the
compass display.
Compass Variance
Compass variance is the difference between earth’s
magnetic north and true geographic north. If the mirror
is not adjusted for compass variance, the compass
could give false readings.
The mirror is set in zone eight upon leaving the factory.
It will be necessary to adjust the compass to
compensate for compass variance if the vehicle is
driven outside zone eight. Under certain circumstances,
such as a long distance, cross-country trip, it will be
necessary to adjust the compass variance.
To adjust for compass variance, do the following:
1. Find your current location and variance zone
number on the zone map that follows.
2. Press and hold the on/off button until a zone
number appears on the display.
3. Once the zone number appears on the display,
press the on/off button quickly until you reach
the correct zone number. If C appears in the
compass window, the compass may need
calibration. See “Compass Calibration” listed
previously.
Cleaning the Mirror
When cleaning the mirror, use a paper towel or similar
material dampened with glass cleaner. Do not spray
glass cleaner directly on the mirror as that may cause
the liquid cleaner to enter the mirror housing.
2-37
Outside Power Heated Mirrors
Once the mirror to be adjusted is selected, use the
arrows on the directional control pad to move the mirror.
Adjust each mirror so you can see the side of the
vehicle and the area behind it.
The mirrors can be manually folded inward to prevent
damage when going through an automatic car wash or a
confined space. To fold, push the mirror toward the
vehicle. To return the mirror to its original position, push
outward. Be sure to return both mirrors to their original
unfolded position before driving.
The preferred position can be stored in memory if the
vehicle has the memory option. See Memory Seat
and Mirrors on page 2-53 for more information.
The controls on the driver’s door armrest operates both
outside rearview mirrors.
Press the left or right mirror symbol on the selector
control to choose the driver’s side or passenger’s side
mirror. The center position is off and will not move
the mirrors if the directional control pad is touched.
2-38
When the rear window defogger is turned on, both
outside rearview mirrors are heated to help clear them
of ice, snow, and condensation. See “Rear Window
Defogger” under Dual Climate Control System on
page 3-25 for more information.
Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror
The driver’s outside mirror may have an automatic
dimming feature that helps to reduce glare from other
vehicles headlamps. This feature is controlled by the on
and off settings on the automatic dimming rearview
mirror. See Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
with OnStar® on page 2-35.
Outside Curb View Assist Mirror
If the vehicle has memory seat and mirrors, it will also
be capable of adjusting the passenger’s mirror to
tilt to a preselected position when the vehicle is shifted
into REVERSE (R). Use this feature to view the curb
when parallel parking.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (R) and
after a five-second delay, the passenger’s mirror
will return to its original position.
Outside Convex Mirror
{CAUTION:
A convex mirror can make things (like other
vehicles) look farther away than they really are.
If you cut too sharply into the right lane, you
could hit a vehicle on your right. Check your
inside mirror or glance over your shoulder
before changing lanes.
The passenger’s side mirror is convex. A convex
mirror’s surface is curved so that more can be seen
from the driver’s seat. The mirror does not have
a dimming feature.
If further adjustment is needed after the mirror is tilted,
the mirror controls can be used. See Outside Power
Heated Mirrors on page 2-38 for more information.
2-39
OnStar® System
OnStar® Services
OnStar® uses global positioning system (GPS) satellite
technology, wireless communications, and call centers
to provide you with a wide range of safety, security,
information, and convenience services.
The Directions and Connections Plan is included on
new vehicles for one year from the date of purchase.
The OnStar® subscription can be extended for time
beyond the first year to meet your needs. For more
information, press the OnStar® button to speak with
an advisor.
A complete OnStar® user’s guide and the terms and
conditions of the OnStar® Subscription Service
Agreement are included in the vehicle’s glove box
literature. For more information, visit www.onstar.com
or www.onstarcanada.com. Contact OnStar® at
1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827), or press the
OnStar® button to speak to an OnStar® advisor
24 hours a day, 7 days a week.
Terms and conditions of the Subscription Service
Agreement can be found at www.onstar.com.
2-40
Directions and Connections Plan
• Automatic Notification of Air Bag Deployment
• Emergency Services
• Roadside Assistance
• Stolen Vehicle Tracking
• AccidentAssist
• Remote Door Unlock/Vehicle Alert
• Remote Diagnostics
• Online Concierge
• Driving Directions
• RideAssist
• Information and Convenience Services
OnStar® Personal Calling
OnStar® Steering Wheel Controls
As an OnStar® subscriber, the Personal Calling
capability is a hands-free wireless phone that is
integrated into the vehicle. Calls can be placed
nationwide using simple voice commands with no
additional contracts and no additional roaming charges.
To find out more about OnStar® Personal Calling,
refer to the OnStar® user’s guide in the vehicle’s glove
box, visit www.onstar.com or www.onstarcanada.com;
or speak with an OnStar® advisor by pressing the
OnStar® button or calling 1-888-4-ONSTAR
(1-888-466-7827).
A steering wheel control can be used to interact with the
OnStar® personal calling feature.
OnStar® Virtual Advisor
Virtual Advisor is a feature of OnStar® Personal Calling
that uses minutes to access up-to-date weather and
traffic reports for your area, news and sports updates,
stock quotes, entertainment, and more. You are
also able to listen and reply to E-mail through the
vehicle’s audio system. Customize your information
profile at www.myonstar.com. See the OnStar® user’s
guide for more information.
Press the control with this symbol on the steering wheel
to place a phone call. When calling into voice mail
systems, or to dial directory numbers, press the control,
say the number (s), then say “dial”.
See the OnStar® user’s guide for more information.
2-41
HomeLink® Transmitter
If your vehicle has this
feature, the control buttons
are located on the
driver’s sun visor.
HomeLink® a combined universal transmitter and
receiver, provides a way to replace up to three
hand-held transmitters used to activate devices such as
gate operators, garage door openers, entry door
locks, security systems and home lighting. Additional
HomeLink® information can be found on the internet at
www.homelink.com or by calling 1-800-355-3515.
2-42
If your vehicle is equipped with the HomeLink®
Transmitter, it complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference, including
interference that may cause undesired operation of
the device.
Changes and modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization
to use this equipment.
Programming the HomeLink®
Transmitter
Do not use the HomeLink® Transmitter with any garage
door opener that does not have the “stop and reverse”
feature. This includes any garage door opener model
manufactured before April 1, 1982. If you have a newer
garage door opener with rolling codes, please be
sure to follow steps 6 through 8 to complete the
programming of your HomeLink® Transmitter.
Read the instructions completely before attempting to
program the HomeLink® Transmitter. Because of
the steps involved, it may be helpful to have another
person available to assist you in programming the
transmitter.
Keep the original transmitter for use in other vehicles as
well as for future HomeLink® programming. It is also
recommended that upon the sale of the vehicle,
the programmed HomeLink® buttons should be erased
for security purposes. Refer to “Erasing HomeLink®
Buttons” or, for assistance, contact HomeLink® on the
internet at: www.homelink.com or by calling
1-800-355-3515.
Be sure that people and objects are clear of the garage
door or gate operator you are programming. When
programming a garage door, it is advised to park outside
of the garage.
It is recommended that a new battery be installed in
your hand-held transmitter for quicker and more
accurate transmission of the radio frequency.
2-43
Programming HomeLink®
Your vehicle’s engine should be turned off while
programming the transmitter. Follow these steps to
program up to three channels:
1. Press and hold down the two outside buttons,
releasing only when the indicator light begins to
flash, after 20 seconds. Do not hold down the
buttons for longer than 30 seconds and do not
repeat this step to program a second and/or third
transmitter to the remaining two HomeLink® buttons.
2. Position the end of your hand-held transmitter about
1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink®
buttons while keeping the indicator light in view.
3. Simultaneously press and hold both the desired
button on HomeLink® and the hand-held transmitter
button. Do not release the buttons until Step 4
has been completed.
Some entry gates and garage door openers may
require you to substitute Step 3 with the procedure
noted in “Gate Operator and Canadian
Programming” later in this section.
2-44
4. The indicator light will flash slowly at first and then
rapidly after HomeLink® successfully receives the
frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter.
Release both buttons.
5. Press and hold the newly-trained HomeLink® button
and observe the indicator light.
If the indicator light stays on constantly,
programming is complete and your device should
activate when the HomeLink® button is pressed
and released.
To program the remaining two HomeLink® buttons,
begin with Step 2 under “Programming HomeLink®.”
Do not repeat Step 1 as this will erase all of the
programmed channels.
If the indicator light blinks rapidly for two seconds
and then turns to a constant light, continue with
Steps 6 through 8 following to complete the
programming of a rolling-code equipped device
(most commonly, a garage door opener).
6. Locate in the garage, the garage door opener
receiver (motor-head unit). Locate the “Learn”
or “Smart” button. This can usually be found where
the hanging antenna wire is attached to the
motor-head unit.
7. Firmly press and release the “Learn” or “Smart”
button. The name and color of the button may
vary by manufacturer.
You will have 30 seconds to start Step 8.
8. Return to the vehicle. Firmly press and hold the
programmed HomeLink® button for two seconds,
then release. Repeat the press/hold/release
sequence a second time, and depending on the
brand of the garage door opener (or other rolling
code device), repeat this sequence a third time
to complete the programming.
HomeLink® should now activate your rolling-code
equipped device.
To program the remaining two HomeLink® buttons,
begin with Step 2 of “Programming HomeLink®.”
You do not want to repeat step 1, as this will erase all
previous programming.
Gate Operator and Canadian
Programming
Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter
signals to “time out” or quit after several seconds of
transmission. This may not be long enough for
HomeLink® to pick up the signal during programming.
Similarly, some U.S. gate operators are manufactured
to “time out” in the same manner.
If you live in Canada, or you are having difficulty
programming a gate operator by using the
“Programming HomeLink® ” procedures (regardless of
where you live), replace Step 3 under “Programming
HomeLink® ” with the following:
Continue to press and hold the HomeLink® button while
you press and release every two seconds (cycle)
your hand-held transmitter until the frequency signal has
been successfully accepted by HomeLink®. The
indicator light will flash slowly at first and then rapidly.
Proceed with Step 4 under “Programming HomeLink® ”
to complete.
2-45
Using HomeLink®
Press and hold the appropriate HomeLink® button for
at least half of a second. The indicator light will come on
while the signal is being transmitted.
Erasing HomeLink® Buttons
To erase programming from the three buttons
do the following:
Reprogramming a Single HomeLink®
Button
To program a device to HomeLink® using a HomeLink®
button previously trained, follow these steps:
1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button.
Do not release the button.
2. The indicator light will begin to flash after
20 seconds. While still holding the HomeLink®
button, proceed with Step 2 under “Programming
HomeLink® ” shown earlier in this section.
1. Press and hold down the two outside buttons until
the indicator light begins to flash, after 20 seconds.
Do not hold the two outside buttons for longer
than 30 seconds.
Resetting Defaults
2. Release both buttons.
To reset HomeLink® to default settings do the following:
®
HomeLink is now in the train (learning) mode and can
be programmed at any time beginning with Step 2
under “Programming HomeLink® ” shown earlier in
this section.
Individual buttons cannot be erased, but they can be
reprogrammed. See “Reprogramming a Single
HomeLink® Button” following this section.
2-46
1. Hold down the two outside buttons for about
20 seconds until the indicator light begins to flash.
2. Continue to hold both buttons until the HomeLink®
indicator light turns off.
3. Release both buttons.
For questions or comments, contact HomeLink®
at 1-800-355-3515, or on the internet at
www.homelink.com.
Storage Areas
Front Storage Area
Glove Box
Your vehicle has a closeable storage area inside both of
the front doors. Press the button to open the door.
To open the glove box, lift up on the lever. Use your
door key to lock or unlock it.
Center Console Storage Area
Cupholder(s)
Your vehicle has cupholders located between the front
seats. Slide the cover back to expose them. There are
also cupholders in the armrest of the second row
seat. Press the panel on the front of the armrest to
expose the cupholders. On the outboard sides of
the third row there may also be cupholders.
Your vehicle has a center console storage area located
between the front seats. It includes storage areas,
and accessory power outlet(s) on the rear of the
console.
Map Pocket
There are map pockets located near the bottom of
the front doors.
Cell Phone Storage Area
Assist Handles
Your vehicle has a closeable cell phone/sunglasses
storage area inside both of the front doors. Press
the button to open the door.
Your vehicle has assist handles located above the doors.
2-47
Luggage Carrier
{CAUTION:
If you try to carry something on top of your
vehicle that is longer or wider than the luggage
carrier — like paneling, plywood, a mattress
and so forth — the wind can catch it as you
drive along. This can cause you to lose
control. What you are carrying could be
violently torn off, and this could cause you or
other drivers to have a collision, and of course
damage your vehicle. You may be able to carry
something like this inside. But, never carry
something longer or wider than the luggage
carrier on top of your vehicle.
2-48
If your vehicle has a luggage carrier, you can load
things on top of your vehicle. The luggage carrier has
side rails attached to the roof. You can get sliding
crossrails through your dealer to use for tying things
down. These let you load some things on top of
your vehicle, as long as they are not wider or longer
than the luggage carrier.
Convenience Net
Cargo Management System
If your vehicle has a convenience net, the convenience
net attaches to the floor or back wall of the rear
of the vehicle using six anchor points. The net can be
used like a hammock across the rear of the vehicle
or hooked on the floor. Put small loads, like grocery
bags, behind the net. It can help keep them from falling
over during sharp turns or quick starts and stops.
Your vehicle may have a cargo management system.
It provides extra storage space for the rear of the
vehicle.
The net is not for larger, heavier loads. Store them in
the rear of the vehicle as far forward as you can.
The cargo management system has three
compartments. The one closest to the front of the
vehicle opens from behind the second row. The center
compartment has a divider. The compartment closest
to the rear of the vehicle has a removable storage bin.
Cargo Cover
If your vehicle has a cargo cover, you can use it to
cover items in the rear of the vehicle. Pull the cover from
the passenger’s side to the driver’s side and slide the
ends into the slots to secure it. When it is not in
use, take the ends out of the slots and allow the cover
to roll back up.
2-49
Sunroof
Sunroof (UltraView)
The sunroof/sunshade
switches are located in the
headliner between the
driver and front passenger.
{CAUTION:
People who are in a crash and not wearing a
safety belt properly can suffer much worse
injuries. They can hit things inside the vehicle
or be ejected from it, and be seriously injured
or killed. This is true for any vehicle occupant,
in any motor vehicle, but if you have the
Ultraview roof it is, if anything, even more
important. In a rollover or other crash, the
Ultraview roof can be damaged or destroyed.
People who are unbelted would then be at
even greater risk of being ejected from the
vehicle. Always fasten your safety belt, and
check that your passengers’ belts are fastened
properly too.
The vehicle may have an ultraview sunroof over the first
two rows of seats.
2-50
One switch operates the sunroof and the other switch
operates the sunshade.
Press the back of the sunroof switch to open the
sunroof. When the switch is pressed to the first stop the
sunroof will open to a desired position. Press the
switch to the second stop to express open the sunroof
to a preset comfort position. Press the second stop
again to fully express open the sunroof. Press the front
of the switch to close the sunroof. The first stop will
close the sunroof at a desired position at normal speed,
and the second stop will express close the roof.
Press the back of the sunshade switch to open the
sunshade. Press the front of the switch to the first stop
to close the sunshade to a desired position at a
normal speed. Press the switch forward to the second
stop to express close the sunshade.
Anti-Pinch Feature
If an object is in the path of the sunroof when it is
closing, the anti-pinch feature will detect the object and
stop the sunroof from closing at the point of the
obstruction. The sunroof will then reverse. To close the
sunroof once it has re-opened, remove the obstruction
and press the front of the sunroof switch.
Resynchronization
To resynchronize the sunroof and sunshade, do the
following.
1. With the engine running, press and hold both the
sunroof switch in the open position and the
sunshade switch in the closed position for
six seconds.
2. Release both buttons.
3. Press the sunshade switch in the closed position
until the motor stalls.
4. Press the sunroof switch in the closed position until
the motor stalls.
Sunroof (UltraView Plus)
{CAUTION:
People who are in a crash and not wearing a
safety belt properly can suffer much worse
injuries. They can hit things inside the vehicle
or be ejected from it, and be seriously injured
or killed. This is true for any vehicle occupant,
in any motor vehicle, but if you have the
Ultraview roof it is, if anything, even more
important. In a rollover or other crash, the
Ultraview roof can be damaged or destroyed.
People who are unbelted would then be at
even greater risk of being ejected from the
vehicle. Always fasten your safety belt, and
check that your passengers’ belts are fastened
properly too.
The vehicle may have an ultraview sunroof over the
first two rows of seats and a smaller sunroof over the
third row seat. Both have sunshades, but the back
sunroof does not open.
2-51
The sunroof/sunshade
switches are located in the
headliner between the
driver and front passenger.
Press the switch to the first stop to close the sunroof to
a desired position. Press the front of the switch to
the second stop to express close the sunroof.
Press the back of the front sunshade switch to open it.
Press it to the first stop to open the front sunshade
to a desired position. Press it again to express open
the sunshade. Press the front of the front sunshade
switch to close it. Press to the first stop to close it to a
desired position. Press the switch to the second
stop to express close the front sunshade
Press the back of the rear sunshade switch to open the
rear sunshade. Press the front of the switch to close
the rear sunshade.
One switch operates the front sunroof and another
switch operates the front sunshade. The third switch is
for the rear sunshade.
Press the back of the sunroof switch to open the
sunroof. Press the switch to the first stop to open the
sunroof to a desired position. Press the switch to
the second stop to express open the sunroof to a preset
comfort stop. Press the switch at the second stop
again to express open the sunroof completely. Press
the front of the sunroof switch to close the sunroof.
2-52
Anti-Pinch Feature
If an object is in the path of the sunroof when it is
closing, the anti-pinch feature will detect the object and
stop the sunroof from closing at the point of the
obstruction. The sunroof will then reverse. To close the
sunroof once it has re-opened, remove the obstruction
and press the front of the sunroof switch.
Resynchronization
Vehicle Personalization
To resynchronize the front sunroof and front and rear
sunshades, do the following.
Memory Seat and Mirrors
1. With the engine running, press and hold the
rear sunshade switch in the closed position for
about 15 seconds – the shade will move to the
stop position.
2. Momentarily release the button, and press the
rear sunshade switch in the closed position
again. The shade will now move to the fully open
position and then return to the fully closed position.
Keep the switch pushed in the closed position
for the entire open/close cycle of the shade.
If your vehicle has the memory feature, you can
program and recall memory settings for the driver’s
seating and outside rearview mirror driving positions for
up to two drivers.
The buttons for this feature
are located on the driver’s
door armrest.
3. At the same time, press and hold the front sunroof
switch in the open position and the front sunshade
switch in the closed position for about six seconds.
4. Release both buttons.
5. Press the front sunshade switch in the closed
position until the motor stalls in the closed position.
6. Press the front sunroof switch in the closed position
until the motor stalls in the closed position.
Use the following steps to program the buttons:
1. Adjust the driver’s seat including the seatback
recliner and both outside mirrors.
2. Press and hold button 1 for at least three seconds.
Two beeps will sound to confirm that the seat and
mirror positions have been saved.
3. Repeat the procedure for a second driver using
button 2.
2-53
Press one of the numbered memory buttons to recall
the stored setting. Each time a memory button is
pressed, a single beep will sound.
3. Press and hold the exit button located above
buttons 1 and 2 on the driver’s door armrest
for at least three seconds.
Two beeps will sound to confirm that the exit
position has been saved.
Three chimes will sound and the setting will not be
recalled if you press button 1 or 2 when the vehicle
is not in PARK (P).
4. Repeat the procedure for a second driver using
memory seat button 2 or the remote keyless
entry transmitter with the number 2 on the back.
The vehicle must be in PARK (P) to recall the stored
driving positions.
If you would like the stored driving positions to be
recalled when unlocking your vehicle with the remote
keyless entry transmitter or when you place the
key in the ignition, see DIC Vehicle Personalization on
page 3-66.
To stop recall movement of the memory feature at any
time, press one of the power seat or mirror controls.
Two personalized exit positions can also be
programmed. Use the following steps to program
exit positions:
1. Press memory seat button 1 or the button with
the unlock symbol on the remote keyless entry
transmitter with the number 1 on the back to recall
the driving position.
2. Adjust the driver’s seat to the desired exit position.
2-54
To recall the stored exit positions, press and release the
exit button. One beep will sound, and the seat will
move to the previously stored exit position for the
currently identified driver. If an exit position has not
been stored for this driver, the seat will move all the way
back. The position of the outside mirrors is not stored
or recalled for the exit position.
The vehicle must be in PARK (P) to recall the exit
positions.
Three chimes will sound and the exit setting will not be
recalled if you press the exit button when the vehicle
is not in PARK (P).
If you would like your stored exit position to be recalled
when unlocking the vehicle with the remote keyless
entry transmitter or when the ignition is turned off and
the driver’s door is opened, see DIC Vehicle
Personalization on page 3-66.
Section 3
Instrument Panel
Instrument Panel Overview ...............................3-4
Hazard Warning Flashers ................................3-6
Other Warning Devices ...................................3-6
Horn .............................................................3-6
Tilt Wheel .....................................................3-6
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever .........................3-7
Turn and Lane-Change Signals ........................3-8
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer ..................3-9
Flash-to-Pass .................................................3-9
Windshield Wipers ........................................3-10
Windshield Washer .......................................3-11
Headlamp Washer ........................................3-12
Cruise Control ..............................................3-12
Headlamps ..................................................3-16
Wiper Activated Headlamps ............................3-16
Headlamps on Reminder ................................3-16
Daytime Running Lamps ................................3-17
Fog Lamps ..................................................3-18
Exterior Lighting Battery Saver ........................3-19
Instrument Panel Brightness ...........................3-19
Entry Lighting ...............................................3-19
Parade Dimming ...........................................3-20
Reading Lamps ............................................3-20
Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA) ............3-20
Accessory Power Outlets ...............................3-23
Ashtrays and Cigarette Lighter ........................3-24
Climate Controls ............................................3-25
Dual Climate Control System ..........................3-25
Outlet Adjustment .........................................3-30
Rear Air Conditioning System .........................3-31
Passenger Compartment Air Filter ...................3-32
Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators ............3-33
Instrument Panel Cluster ................................3-34
Speedometer and Odometer ...........................3-35
Trip Odometers ............................................3-35
Tachometer .................................................3-36
Engine Speed Limiter ....................................3-36
Safety Belt Reminder Light .............................3-36
Airbag Readiness Light ..................................3-37
Charging System Light ..................................3-38
Brake System Warning Light ..........................3-38
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light .............3-39
Traction Control System (TCS)
Warning Light ...........................................3-40
Engine Coolant Temperature
Warning Light (CTS) ..................................3-40
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage ..................3-41
Tire Pressure Light .......................................3-41
Malfunction Indicator Lamp .............................3-42
Oil Pressure Light .........................................3-45
Sport Mode Light ..........................................3-45
3-1
Section 3
Instrument Panel
Security Light ...............................................3-46
Fog Lamp Light ............................................3-46
Lights On Reminder ......................................3-46
Cruise Control Light ......................................3-46
Highbeam On Light .......................................3-47
Fuel Gage ...................................................3-47
Driver Information Center (DIC) .......................3-48
System Controls ...........................................3-48
Status of Vehicle Systems .............................3-49
DIC Main Menu ............................................3-53
DIC Warnings and Messages .........................3-57
DIC Vehicle Personalization ............................3-66
3-2
Audio System(s) .............................................3-80
Setting the Time ...........................................3-80
Radio with CD ..............................................3-81
Rear Seat Entertainment System ....................3-98
Navigation/Radio System ..............................3-111
Theft-Deterrent Feature ................................3-111
Audio Steering Wheel Controls ......................3-111
Radio Reception .........................................3-113
Care of Your CDs and DVDs ........................3-113
Care of Your CD and DVD Player .................3-113
Diversity Antenna System .............................3-114
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ............3-114
✍ NOTES
3-3
Instrument Panel Overview
3-4
The main components of the instrument panel are the following:
A. Air Outlets. See Outlet Adjustment on page 3-30.
B. Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever. See Turn
Signal/Multifunction Lever on page 3-7.
C. Steering Wheel Controls. See Audio Steering Wheel
Controls on page 3-111.
D. Instrument Panel Cluster. See Instrument Panel
Cluster on page 3-34.
E. Windshield Wiper Lever. See Windshield Wipers on
page 3-10.
F. Hazard Warning Flasher Button. See Hazard
Warning Flashers on page 3-6.
G. Audio/Navigation System. See Audio System(s) on
page 3-80.
H. Traction Control Button. See Traction Control
System (TCS) on page 4-9.
I. Automatic Transmission Shift Lever. See Automatic
Transmission Operation on page 2-25.
J. Climate Control System. See Dual Climate Control
System on page 3-25.
K. Glove Box. See Glove Box on page 2-47.
3-5
Hazard Warning Flashers
Other Warning Devices
Your hazard warning flashers let you warn others. They
also let police know you have a problem. Your front
and rear turn signal lamps will flash on and off.
If you carry reflective triangles, you can set them up at
the side of the road about 300 feet (100 m) behind
your vehicle.
The hazard warning
flasher button is located
near the center of the
instrument panel.
Horn
Press near or on the horn symbols on your steering
wheel pad to sound the horn.
Tilt Wheel
Your hazard warning flashers work no matter what
position your key is in, and even if the key is not in.
Press the button to make the front and rear turn signal
lamps flash on and off. Press the button again to
turn the flashers off.
When the hazard warning flashers are on, your turn
signals will not work.
3-6
A tilt wheel allows you to adjust the steering wheel
before you drive. You can raise it to the highest level to
give your legs more room when you exit and enter
the vehicle.
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever
The lever on the left side of the steering column
includes the following:
• G Turn and Lane-Change Signals. See Turn and
Lane-Change Signals on page 3-8.
The lever that allows you to tilt the steering wheel is
located on the left side of the steering column.
To tilt the wheel, hold the steering wheel and pull the
lever. Then move the steering wheel to a comfortable
position and release the lever to lock the wheel in place.
• P Headlamps. See Headlamps on page 3-16.
• 3 Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer. See
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer on page 3-9.
• Flash-To-Pass Feature. See Flash-to-Pass
on page 3-9.
• - Fog Lamps. See Fog Lamps on page 3-18.
• I Cruise Control. See Cruise Control on
page 3-12.
3-7
Turn and Lane-Change Signals
To signal a turn, move the lever all the way up or
down. The lever returns automatically when the turn
is complete.
An arrow on the instrument
panel cluster will flash
in the direction of the turn
or lane change.
Raise or lower the lever until the arrow starts to flash
to signal a lane change. Hold it there until the lane
change is complete. The lever returns to its original
position when it’s released.
3-8
Arrows that flash rapidly when signaling for a turn or
lane change may be caused by a burned-out signal bulb.
Other driver’s won’t see the signal.
Replace burned-out bulbs to help avoid possible
accidents. Check the fuse and for burned-out bulbs if
the arrow fails to work when signaling a turn. See Fuses
and Circuit Breakers on page 5-93 for more information.
Turn Signal On Chime
If the turn signal is left on for about 1 mile (1.6 km),
a warning chime will sound and the Turn Signal
On message will appear on the Driver Information
Center (DIC) display. See “Turn Signal On” under
DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-57 for more
information.
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
Flash-to-Pass
Push forward on the turn signal/multifunction lever
to change the headlamps from low to high beam.
Pull the lever back and then release it to change from
high to low beam.
This feature allows you to use the high-beam headlamps
to signal the driver in front of you that you want to pass.
This light on the
instrument panel cluster
will be on, indicating
high-beam usage.
Pull and hold the turn signal/multifunction lever toward
you to use this feature. When you do, the following
will occur:
• If the headlamps are off, in low-beam or in Daytime
Running Lamps (DRL) mode, the high-beam
headlamps will turn on. They’ll stay on as long as
you hold the lever there. Release the lever to
turn them off.
• If the headlamps are in high-beam mode, they will
switch to low beam. To return to high-beam, push
the lever away from you.
3-9
Windshield Wipers
x (Delay Adjustment):
Use this band to set the
length of the delay between wipes when using the delay
feature. The closer you move the band toward mist,
the longer the delay. The windshield wiper lever must be
in delay for this feature to work.
6 (Low Speed): Put the lever in this position for
slow, steady wiping cycles.
1 (High Speed):
The lever on the right side of the steering column
operates the windshield wipers.
7 (Mist):
Pull the lever down and release it for a
single wiping cycle. The lever will return to its original
position. For more cycles, hold the lever down before
releasing it.
9 (Off):
Put the lever in this position to turn off
the wipers.
& (Delay):
Put the lever in this position to set a delay
between wipes. Turn the delay adjustment band to
set the length of the delay.
3-10
Put the lever in this position for
rapid wiping cycles.
If the windshield wipers are in use for about six seconds
while you are driving, the exterior lamps will come on
automatically if the exterior lamp control is in AUTO.
See Wiper Activated Headlamps on page 3-16 for
more information.
Be sure to clear ice and snow from the wiper blades
before using them. If they’re frozen to the windshield,
gently loosen or thaw them. If the blades do become
damaged, install new blades or blade inserts. For more
information, see Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement
on page 5-50.
Heavy snow or ice can overload the wiper motor.
A circuit breaker will stop the motor until it cools down.
Clear away snow or ice to prevent an overload.
Windshield Washer
{CAUTION:
If the headlamps are on when you wash the windshield,
the headlamp washer (if equipped) will turn on.
Both the windshield and the headlamps will be washed.
See Headlamp Washer on page 3-12.
Rear Washer/Wiper
In freezing weather, do not use your washer
until the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the
washer fluid can form ice on the windshield,
blocking your vision.
The switch for the rear
washer/wiper is located in
the overhead console.
The windshield washer button is located at the end of
the windshield wiper lever.
K (Washer Fluid):
Press the button with this symbol
located at the end of the windshield washer lever to
wash the windshield. Washer fluid will squirt onto
the windshield and the wipers will run for a few cycles
to clear the windshield. For more wash cycles, press and
hold the button.
If your vehicle is low on washer fluid, the Check Washer
Fluid message will appear on the Driver Information
Center (DIC) display. See DIC Warnings and Messages
on page 3-57 for more information.
Press the top of the switch for regular wipe, press the
bottom of the switch for intermittent wipe and press
the center of the switch to wash the rear window.
3-11
Headlamp Washer
Your vehicle may have headlamp washers.
The headlamp washers clear debris from the
headlamp lenses.
The headlamps must be on to be washed. If the
headlamps are off, only the windshield will be washed
when the washer button is pressed. If the washer fluid is
low, the headlamp washers will not work.
See Windshield Washer on page 3-11 for additional
information.
Cruise Control
These controls are located
on the end of the
multifunction lever.
The headlamp washers are located to the inside of
the headlamps.
To wash the headlamps, press the washer button
located at the end of the windshield wiper lever.
Both the headlamps and the windshield will be washed.
3-12
9(Off):
R(On):
This position turns the system off.
This position activates the system.
+ (Resume/Accelerate): Push the lever to this symbol
to make the vehicle resume to a previously set speed
or to accelerate when cruise is already active.
T(Set/Decrease):
Press this button to set the speed
or to decrease the speed when cruise is already active.
With cruise control, you can maintain a speed of about
25 mph (40 km/h) or more without keeping your foot
on the accelerator. This can really help on long
trips. Cruise control does not work at speeds below
about 25 mph (40 km/h).
If you apply your brakes, the cruise control will shut off.
{CAUTION:
Cruise control can be dangerous where you
cannot drive safely at a steady speed. So, do
not use your cruise control on winding roads
or in heavy traffic.
Cruise control can be dangerous on slippery
roads. On such roads, fast changes in tire
traction can cause needless wheel spinning,
and you could lose control. Do not use cruise
control on slippery roads.
If your vehicle is in cruise control when the traction
control system begins to limit wheel spin, the cruise
control will automatically disengage. See Traction
Control System (TCS) on page 4-9 and Stabilitrak®
System on page 4-10. When road conditions allow you
to safely use it again, you may turn the cruise control
back on.
3-13
Setting Cruise Control
This light on the instrument
panel cluster will come on
while cruise control is on.
{CAUTION:
If you leave your cruise control on when you
are not using cruise, you might hit a button
and go into cruise when you do not want to.
You could be startled and even lose control.
Keep the cruise control switch off until you
want to use cruise control.
1. Move the cruise control switch to on.
2. Get up to the speed you want.
3. Press in the set button at the end of the lever and
release it.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
Resuming a Set Speed
Suppose you set your cruise control at a desired speed
and then you apply the brake. This, of course,
disengages the cruise control. But you don’t need to
reset it.
Once you’re going about 25 mph (40 km/h) or more,
you can move the cruise control switch briefly from on to
resume/accelerate.
You’ll go right back up to your chosen speed and
stay there.
If you hold the switch at resume/accelerate the vehicle
will keep going faster until you release the switch or
apply the brake. So unless you want to go faster, don’t
hold the switch at resume/accelerate.
3-14
Increasing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
Passing Another Vehicle While Using
Cruise Control
There are two ways to go to a higher speed:
Use the accelerator pedal to increase your speed.
When you take your foot off the pedal, your vehicle will
slow down to the cruise control speed you set earlier.
• Use the accelerator pedal to get to the higher
speed. Press the set button at the end of the lever,
then release the button and the accelerator
pedal. You’ll now cruise at the higher speed.
• Move the cruise switch from on to
resume/accelerate. Hold it there until you get up to
the speed you want, and then release the switch.
To increase your speed in very small amounts,
move the switch briefly to resume/accelerate.
Each time you do this, your vehicle will go about
1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster.
Reducing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
There are two ways to reduce your speed while using
cruise control:
• Press in the button at the end of the lever until you
reach the lower speed you want, then release it.
• To slow down in very small amounts, briefly press
the set button. Each time you do this, you’ll go
about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower.
Using Cruise Control on Hills
How well your cruise control will work on hills depends
upon your speed, load and the steepness of the
hills. When going up steep hills, you may have to step
on the accelerator pedal to maintain your speed.
When going downhill, you may have to brake to keep
your speed down. Applying the brake will take you out of
cruise control. If you need to apply the brake due to
the grade of the downhill slope, you may not want
to attempt to use your cruise control feature.
Ending Cruise Control
To end a cruise control session, step lightly on the
brake pedal.
Stepping on the brake pedal will end the current cruise
control session only. Move the cruise control switch
to off to turn off the system completely.
Erasing Speed Memory
When you turn off the cruise control or the ignition,
your cruise control set speed memory is erased.
3-15
Headlamps
Wiper Activated Headlamps
The exterior lamp control is located in the middle of the
turn signal/multifunction lever.
This feature activates the headlamps and parking lamps
after the windshield wipers have been in use for
about six seconds. For this feature to work, the exterior
lamp control must be in AUTO.
O(Exterior Lamp Control):
Turn the control with this
symbol on it to operate the exterior lamps.
The exterior lamp control has four positions:
O (On/Off): Turn the control to this position to turn off
all lamps except the Daytime Running Lamps (DRL).
AUTO (Automatic): Turn the control to this position to
put the headlamps in automatic mode. AUTO mode
will turn the exterior lamps on and off depending upon
how much light is available outside of the vehicle.
; (Parking Lamps): Turn the control to this position
to turn on the parking lamps together with the following:
•
•
•
•
Sidemarker Lamps
Taillamps
License Plate Lamps
Instrument Panel Lights
5 (Headlamps):
Turn the control to this position to
turn on the headlamps, together with the previously
listed lamps and lights.
3-16
When the exterior lamp control is off or in the parking
lamp position and the windshield wiper control is in any
position except off, the Headlamps Suggested message
will appear on the DIC display. See “Headlamps
Suggested Message” under DIC Warnings and
Messages on page 3-57 for more information.
When the ignition is turned to OFF, the wiper-activated
headlamps will immediately turn off. They will also
turn off if the windshield wiper control is turned off.
Headlamps on Reminder
A warning chime will sound if the exterior lamp control
is left on in either the headlamp or parking lamp position
and the driver’s door is opened with the ignition off.
See Lights On Reminder on page 3-46 for additional
information.
Daytime Running Lamps
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier for
others to see the front of your vehicle during the
day. DRL can be helpful in many different driving
conditions, but they can be especially helpful in the short
periods after dawn and before sunset. Fully functional
daytime running lamps are required on all vehicles
first sold in Canada.
The DRL system will make the turn signal lamps come
on when the following conditions are met:
• It is still daylight and the ignition is in ON or START,
• the exterior lamp control is in off or AUTO with the
headlamps off, and
• an automatic transmission is not in PARK (P) or the
parking brake is not set on a manual transmission.
When DRL are on, only your front turn signal lamps will
be on. No other exterior lamps will be on when the
DRL are being used. Your instrument panel won’t be
lit up either.
When the exterior lamp control is in AUTO and it’s dark
enough outside, the DRL will turn off and the low-beam
headlamps will turn on. When it’s bright enough
outside, the low-beam headlamps will go off, and the
DRL will turn back on. If you start your vehicle in a dark
garage, the automatic headlamp system will come on
immediately. Once you leave the garage, it will take
about one minute for the automatic headlamp system to
change to DRL if it is light outside. During that delay,
your instrument panel cluster may not be as bright
as usual. Make sure your instrument panel brightness
lever is in the full bright position. See Instrument
Panel Brightness on page 3-19.
If it’s dark enough outside and the exterior lamp control
is off, a Headlamps Suggested message will appear
on the Driver’s Information Center (DIC) display.
This message informs the driver that turning on the
exterior lamps is recommended even though the DRL
are still illuminated. Turning the exterior lamp control to
AUTO or to the low-beam headlamp position will
turn off the DRL and cancel the Headlamps Suggested
message. If the parking lamps or the fog lamps were
turned on instead, the DRL will still turn off and the
Headlamps Suggested message will be displayed.
You can turn it off by pressing the OK button if you have
the Navigation audio system or the CLR button if you
have the Base audio system.
To operate your vehicle with the DRL off, turn the exterior
lamp control off. Then turn on the fog lamps or parking
lamps, and the DRL will turn off. The Headlamps
Suggested message will appear on the DIC display.
This will work regardless of gear position and whether or
not the parking brake is set.
As with any vehicle, you should turn on the regular
headlamp system when you need it.
3-17
Light Sensor
Fog Lamps
Use the fog lamps for better vision in foggy or
misty conditions.
The fog lamp controls are located on the turn
signal/multifunction lever.
-: The band with this symbol is used to turn the
front fog lamps on and off.
The parking lamps must be on for the fog lamps to work.
To turn the fog lamps on, turn the fog lamp band on the
lever up to the dot and release it. The band will
return to its original position.
The light sensor for the DRL and AUTO headlamp
feature is located on top of the instrument panel. If you
cover the sensor, it will read dark, and the exterior
lamps or the Headlamps Suggested message will
appear on the DIC whenever the ignition is on.
3-18
To turn the fog lamps off, turn the fog lamp band up to
the dot and release it. The band will return to its
original position, and the fog lamps will turn off. If you
turn on the high-beam headlamps, the fog lamps
will also turn off. They’ll turn back on again when you
switch back to low-beam headlamps.
Exterior Lighting Battery Saver
Slide the lever toward the symbol to brighten the lights
or away from it to dim them.
If the parking lamps or headlamps have been left on,
the exterior lamps will turn off about 10 minutes after the
ignition is turned to OFF. This protects against draining
the battery in case you have accidentally left the
headlamps or parking lamps on. The battery saver
does not work if the headlamps are turned on after the
ignition is turned to OFF.
If you slide the lever all the way toward the symbol past
the resistance point, the interior lamps will come on.
To turn them off, slide the lever back toward the
minimum brightness setting.
If you need to leave the lamps on for more than
10 minutes, use the exterior lamp control to turn the
lamps back on.
Instrument Panel Brightness
The lever for this feature
is located on the
overhead console.
Entry Lighting
The entry lighting system turns on the reading and
dome lamps and the backlighting to the exterior lamp
control when a door is opened or if you press the remote
keyless entry transmitter unlock button. If activated by
the transmitter, the lighting will remain active for
about 25 seconds. The entry lighting system uses the
light sensor; it must be dark outside in order for the
lamps to turn on. The lamps turn off about 25 seconds
after the last door is closed. They will dim to off if
the ignition key is placed in ON, or immediately
deactivate if the power locks are activated.
3-19
Parade Dimming
This feature prohibits dimming of the instrument panel
displays and backlighting during daylight hours when
the key is in the ignition and the headlamps are on.
This feature operates with the light sensor and is fully
automatic. When the light sensor reads darkness outside
and the parking lamps are active, the instrument
panel displays can be adjusted by sliding the instrument
panel brightness lever toward the symbol to brighten
or away from the symbol to dim the lighting.
Reading Lamps
The reading lamps are located on the overhead console.
These lamps come on automatically when any door
is opened.
For manual operation, press the button next to each
lamp to turn it on. Press it again to turn the lamp off.
If the reading lamps are left on, they automatically shut
off 10 minutes after the ignition has been turned off.
3-20
Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist
(URPA)
Your vehicle may have the Ultrasonic Rear Parking
Assist (URPA) system. It is designed to help you park
while the vehicle is in REVERSE (R). It operates
only at very low speeds, less than 3 mph (5 km/h).
URPA can help make parking easier and help you
avoid colliding with objects such as parked vehicles.
The URPA system can detect objects up to 5 feet
(1.5 m) behind the vehicle, and tell you how close
these objects are from your rear bumper.
{CAUTION:
Even with the Ultrasonic Rear Park Assist
system, the driver must check carefully before
backing up. The system does not operate above
typical backing speeds of 3 mph (5 km/h) while
parking. And, the system does not detect
objects that are more than 5 feet (1.5 meters)
behind the vehicle.
The URPA display is
located inside the vehicle,
above the liftgate glass.
It has three color-coded
lights that can be seen
through the rearview mirror
or by turning around.
So, unless you check carefully behind you
before and when you back up, you could strike
children, pedestrians, bicyclists or pets behind
you, and they could be injured or killed.
Whether or not you are using rear park assist,
always check carefully behind your vehicle
before you back up and then watch closely as
you do.
3-21
How the System Works
URPA comes on automatically when the shift lever is
moved into REVERSE (R) and the vehicle speed is less
than 3 mph (5 km/h). When the system turns on, the
three lights on the display will illuminate for one
and a half seconds to let you know that the system is
working. If your vehicle is moving in REVERSE (R) at a
speed greater than 3 mph (5 km/h), the red light will
flash to remind you that the system does not work at a
speed greater than 3 mph (5 km/h).
If an object is detected at a REVERSE (R) speed of
less than 3 mph (5 km/h), one of the following will occur:
Description
English
Metric
Amber light
5 ft
1.5 m
Amber/amber lights
40 in
1.0 m
Amber/amber/red lights &
continuous chime
20 in
0.5 m
Amber/amber/red lights
flashing & continuous chime
1 ft
0.3 m
A chime will sound the first time an object is detected
between 20 inches (0.5 m) and 5 feet (1.5 m) away.
URPA cannot detect objects that are above liftgate level.
In order for the rear sensors to recognize an object,
it must be within detection range behind the vehicle.
3-22
When the System Does Not Seem to
Work Properly
The light may flash red when the vehicle is in
REVERSE (R), if the ultrasonic sensors are not kept
clean. So be sure to keep your rear bumper free of mud,
dirt, snow, ice and slush. Other conditions that may
affect system performance include things like the
vibrations from a jackhammer or the compression of
air brakes on a very large truck. If after cleaning the
rear bumper and then driving forward at least
15 mph (25 km/h), the display continues to flash red,
see your dealer.
If a trailer was attached to your vehicle, or a bicycle or
an object was on the back of, or hanging out of your
liftgate during your last drive cycle, the light may
also flash red. The light will continue to flash whenever
in REVERSE (R) until your vehicle is driven forward
at least 15 mph (25 km/h) without any obstructions
behind the vehicle.
For cleaning instructions, see Washing Your Vehicle
on page 5-87.
Accessory Power Outlets
Your vehicle is equipped with accessory power outlets.
The outlets can be used to plug in electrical equipment
such as a cellular telephone, CB radio, etc.
Your vehicle has one outlet in front of the center
console, one in the rear of the center console, one in
the rear compartment, and there may be an additional
outlet in the rear of the center console.
Your vehicle may have a small cap that must be
removed to access the accessory power outlet. If it
does, when not using the outlet be sure to cover it with
the protective cap.
Notice: Leaving electrical equipment on for
extended periods will drain the battery. Always turn
off electrical equipment when not in use and do
not plug in equipment that exceeds the maximum
amperage rating.
Certain accessory power plugs may not be compatible
to the accessory power outlet and could result in
blown vehicle or adapter fuses. If you experience a
problem, see your dealer for additional information on
the accessory power outlets.
Notice: Adding any electrical equipment to your
vehicle may damage it or keep other components
from working as they should. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Check with your
dealer before adding electrical equipment.
Follow the proper installation instructions that are
included with any electrical equipment you install.
Notice: Improper use of the power outlet can cause
damage not covered by your warranty. Do not
hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket
from the plug because the power outlets are
designed for accessory power plugs only.
Power outlets can be set to work all the time or shut off
10 minutes after the vehicle is turned off. To change
your setting, see your dealer for a fuse adjustment.
3-23
Ashtrays and Cigarette Lighter
Cigarette Lighter
Your vehicle may have an ashtray and cigarette lighter.
Notice: Holding a cigarette lighter in while it is
heating will not allow the lighter to back away from
the heating element when it is hot. Damage from
overheating may occur to the lighter or heating
element, or a fuse could be blown. Do not hold a
cigarette lighter in while it is heating. Do not
use anything other than the cigarette lighter in the
heating element.
Notice: If you put papers or other flammable
items in the ashtray, hot cigarettes or other smoking
materials could ignite them and possibly damage
your vehicle. Never put flammable items in the
ashtray.
Ashtray
The ashtray is located under the climate control panel
on the center console. Press on the door to release
the ashtray.
To empty the ashtray, remove it from the center
console by gripping the edges and pulling straight out.
To reinstall, push the tray back into place.
There may also be ashtrays in the rear doors.
3-24
The cigarette lighter is located next to the ashtray.
The vehicle does not have any cigarette lighters for the
rear seat passengers.
Press the lighter all the way in and release it. It will pop
back out by itself once the element has heated for use.
Climate Controls
Dual Climate Control System
With this system you can control the heating, cooling
and ventilation for your vehicle.
Automatic Operation
AUTO (Automatic): When this button is pressed and
the temperature is set, the system will automatically
control the inside temperature, the air delivery mode,
the air conditioning compressor and the fan speed.
AUTO will appear on the display.
2. Adjust the temperature to a comfortable setting
between 70°F (21°C) and 80°F (27°C).
Choosing the coldest or warmest temperature
setting will not cause the system to heat or cool
any faster. If you set the system at the warmest
temperature setting, the system will remain in
manual mode at that temperature and it will not go
into automatic mode.
In cold weather, the system will start at reduced fan
speeds to avoid blowing cold air into your vehicle
until warmer air is available. The system will
start out blowing air at the floor but may change
modes automatically as the vehicle warms up
to maintain the chosen temperature setting. The
length of time needed for warm up will depend on
the outside temperature and the length of time
that has elapsed since your vehicle was last driven.
3. Wait for the system to regulate. This may take from
10 to 30 minutes. Then adjust the temperature,
if necessary.
You can switch from English to metric units through the
Driver Information Center (DIC). If you have the Base
audio system, see DIC Main Menu on page 3-53. If you
have the Navigation system, see “Setup Menu” in the
Navigation System Manual.
1. Press the AUTO button.
3-25
The air-conditioning system removes moisture from the
air, so you may sometimes notice a small amount of
water dripping underneath your vehicle while idling
or after turning off the engine. This is normal.
Do not cover the solar sensor located in the center of
the instrument panel, near the windshield. For more
information on the solar sensor, see “Sensors” later in
this section.
Manual Operation
yN z (Mode): Pressing the mode switch and
changing the mode cancels automatic operation and
places the system in manual mode. Press AUTO
to return to automatic operation.
The outboard air outlets will always receive airflow
regardless of the mode selected. See Outlet
Adjustment on page 3-30 to change this airflow from
the outboard outlets.
3-26
To change the current mode, select one of the following:
Y (Vent):
This mode directs air to the instrument
panel outlets.
\ (Bi-Level):
This mode directs approximately half of
the air to the instrument panel outlets, and then
directs most of the remaining air to the floor outlets.
Some air may be directed toward the windshield.
In automatic operation, cooler air is directed to the upper
outlets and warmer air to the floor outlets.
[ (Floor):
This mode directs most of the air to the
floor outlets with some air directed to the outboard
outlets (for the side windows), and a little air directed to
the windshield.
The mode switch can also be used to select the defog
mode. Information on defogging and defrosting can
be found later in this section.
y9z (Fan):
Press this switch to increase or
decrease the fan speed. Pressing this switch cancels
automatic operation and places the system in manual
mode. Press AUTO to return to automatic operation.
If the airflow seems low when the fan speed is at
the highest setting, the passenger compartment air filter
may need to be replaced. For more information, see
Passenger Compartment Air Filter on page 3-32
and Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4.
h (Recirculation):
This mode keeps outside air from
coming in the vehicle. It can be used to prevent outside
air and odors from entering your vehicle or to help heat or
cool the air inside your vehicle more quickly. Press this
button to turn the recirculation mode on or off.
The air-conditioning compressor also comes on.
Recirculation is not available in the defrost mode and
will automatically turn off after 10 minutes when defog
is selected.
QPWRR (Power/Driver’s Temperature): Press the
PWR button located on the driver’s side of the
climate control panel to turn the entire climate control
system on or off. Press the up or down arrow on
the switch to increase or decrease the temperature
inside your vehicle.
QPWRR (Power/Passenger’s Temperature):
Press the PWR button located on the passenger’s side
of the climate control panel to turn the passenger’s
climate control system on. Press the up or down arrow
on the switch to increase or decrease the temperature
for the front passenger.
A/C OFF (Air Conditioning): Press this button to
manually turn off the air conditioning compressor.
Press AUTO to return to automatic operation or press
the A/C OFF button again.
Using recirculation for long periods of time may cause the
air inside your vehicle to become too dry or stuffy.
To prevent this from happening, after the air in your
vehicle has cooled, turn the recirculation mode off.
3-27
Sensors
There is a solar sensor located on the instrument panel,
near the windshield.
3-28
There is also an interior
temperature sensor
located to the right of the
steering wheel on the
instrument panel.
These sensors monitor the solar radiation and the
air inside your vehicle, then use the information to
maintain the selected temperature by initiating needed
adjustments to the temperature, the fan speed and
the air delivery system. The system may also supply
cooler air to the side of the vehicle facing the sun.
The recirculation mode will also be activated, as
necessary. Do not cover the sensors or the automatic
climate control system will not work properly.
Defogging and Defrosting
Fog on the inside of windows is a result of high humidity
(moisture) condensing on the cool window glass.
This can be minimized if the climate control system is
used properly. There are two modes to clear fog
from your windshield. Use the defog mode to clear the
windows of fog or moisture and warm the passengers.
Use the defrost mode to remove fog or frost from
the windshield more quickly.
yN z (Mode): Press this button until defog appears
on the display.
- (Defog):
This mode directs the air between the
windshield, floor outlets and side windows. When you
select this mode, the system turns off recirculation
and runs the air-conditioning compressor unless
the outside temperature is at or below freezing.
The recirculation mode is cancelled when you enter
defog mode. If you select recirculation while in defog
mode, it will be cancelled after 10 minutes.
If you have fogging on the side windows, turn the
thumbwheel on the outboard outlets to the side window
defog position. See Outlet Adjustment on page 3-30
for more information.
0 (Defrost):
Pressing defrost directs most of the air
to the windshield, with some air directed to the side
windows. In this mode, the system will automatically turn
off recirculation and run the air-conditioning compressor,
unless the outside temperature is at or below freezing.
Recirculation cannot be selected while in the
defrost mode.
This mode may also cause the fan speed and air
temperature to increase.
If you have fogging on the side windows, turn the
thumbwheel on the outboard outlets to the side window
defog position. See Outlet Adjustment on page 3-30
for more information. Do not drive the vehicle until all the
windows are clear.
3-29
Rear Window Defogger
Outlet Adjustment
The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to
remove fog or frost from the rear window.
Use the knobs located in the center of each outlet to
change the direction of the airflow. Use the thumbwheels
to open or close the outlets.
The rear window defogger will only work when the
ignition is in ON.
= (Rear Window Defogger):
Press this button to
turn the rear window defogger on or off. Be sure to clear
as much snow from the rear window as possible.
The rear window defogger will turn off about 10 minutes
after the button is pressed. Or, if the vehicle’s speed
is above 30 mph (48 km/h), the rear defogger will stay
on continuously. If turned on again, the defogger
will only run for about five minutes before turning off.
The defogger can also be turned off by pressing
the button again or by turning off the engine.
The heated outside rearview mirrors will heat to help
clear fog or frost from the surface of the mirror when the
rear window defogger button is on.
Notice: Using a razor blade or sharp object to clear
the inside rear window may damage the rear
window defogger. Repairs would not be covered by
your warranty. Do not clear the inside of the rear
window with sharp objects.
3-30
j (Side Window Defog): Turn the thumbwheel to this
symbol to use the side window defog setting. The air
coming through the outlets will be directed toward
the side windows to clear fog.
k (Open): Turn the thumbwheel to this symbol to
open the outlets completely and allow the maximum
amount of air to enter your vehicle. A small amount of air
will still be directed to the side windows.
l (Closed): Turn the thumbwheel to this symbol to
close the outlets and minimize the amount of air entering
the vehicle.
Operation Tips
• Clear away any ice, snow or leaves from the air
inlets at the base of the windshield that may
block the flow of air into your vehicle.
• Use of non-GM approved hood deflectors may
adversely affect the performance of the system.
• Keep the path under the front seats clear of objects
to help circulate the air inside of your vehicle more
effectively.
Rear Air Conditioning System
If your vehicle has the rear air conditioning system it
has two fan speed selectors. One fan speed selector is
located in the front overhead console and the other
is located in the headliner above the second row seats.
The rear air conditioning system is designed to
provide cooled air only. There is no heating provided
with this system.
• If the airflow seems low when the fan speed is at
the highest setting, the passenger compartment
air filter may need to be replaced. For more
information, see Passenger Compartment Air Filter
on page 3-32.
Front Control
Rear Control
To operate the rear system using the front control,
just turn the knob to the fan position you want.
To use the rear control, first turn the front control to the
AUX position. Then, the rear control can be used to
increase and decrease the airflow.
3-31
Passenger Compartment Air Filter
The passenger compartment air filter traps most of the
pollen from the air entering your vehicle. Like your
vehicle’s engine air cleaner/filter, it needs to be changed
periodically. For how often to change the passenger
compartment air filter, see Scheduled Maintenance on
page 6-4.
The passenger compartment air filter is located
underneath the hood below the windshield wiper arm
on the passenger’s side of the vehicle. See Engine
Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for more
information on location.
Use the procedure listed below to replace the passenger
compartment air filter:
1. Open the hood to access the engine compartment.
See Hood Release on page 5-11 for more
information. Locate the passenger compartment air
filter access panel door.
2. Push the two tabs on the access panel door
towards the windshield.
3. While pressing forward, lift the access panel out of
the clipped position and pull towards the front of the
vehicle. This releases the clips and allows the
panel door to be removed.
4. Remove the old filter and insert a new one. Make
sure the arrow on the filter is pointing toward the
passenger compartment.
See Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts on
page 6-13 for the correct part number for the filter.
5. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 to reinstall the cover.
3-32
Warning Lights, Gages,
and Indicators
This part describes the warning lights and gages that
may be on your vehicle. The pictures will help you
locate them.
Warning lights and gages can signal that something is
wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause
an expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention to
your warning lights and gages could also save you
or others from injury.
Warning lights come on when there may be or is a
problem with one of your vehicle’s functions. As you
will see in the details on the next few pages, some
warning lights come on briefly when you start the engine
just to let you know they’re working. If you are familiar
with this section, you should not be alarmed when
this happens.
Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problem
with one of your vehicle’s functions. Often gages
and warning lights work together to let you know when
there’s a problem with your vehicle.
When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on
when you are driving, or when one of the gages shows
there may be a problem, check the section that tells
you what to do about it. Follow this manual’s advice.
Waiting to do repairs can be costly – and even
dangerous. So please get to know your warning lights
and gages. They’re a big help.
Your vehicle also has a Driver Information Center (DIC)
that works along with the warning lights and gages.
See Driver Information Center (DIC) on page 3-48 for
more information.
3-33
Instrument Panel Cluster
The instrument panel cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how your vehicle is running. You’ll know how
fast you’re going, how much fuel you’re using and many of the other things you’ll need to know to drive safely
and economically.
United States version shown, Canada similar
3-34
Speedometer and Odometer
The speedometer lets you see your speed in either
miles per hour (mph) or kilometers per hour (km/h).
The odometer shows how far your vehicle has been
driven, in either miles (used in the United States)
or kilometers (used in Canada).
If your vehicle has to have a new odometer installed,
the new one may read the correct mileage. This is
because your vehicle’s computer has stored the mileage
in memory.
While the Driver Shift Control (DSC) feature is active,
the odometer will change to show the gear range.
See Automatic Transmission Operation on page 2-25 for
more information.
Trip Odometers
The trip odometer can record the number of miles or
kilometers traveled for up to two trips.
The trip odometer is part of the Driver Information
Center (DIC). To access the trip odometer, use one of
the following procedures:
Using the Base audio system, do the following:
1. Press the INFO (Information) button located to the
right of the screen to access the DIC menu.
2. Scroll through the menu using the up or down
arrows on the INFO button until you reach
Trip Odometer A or Trip Odometer B.
The selected trip odometer (A or B) will be
displayed at the top of the screen with the
accumulated mileage.
3. Repeat the steps to view the other trip odometer.
You can reset the selected trip odometer by pressing
CLR (Clear) button located in the center of the
INFO button to the right of the screen. The mileage
for that trip odometer will return to zero. Each trip
odometer must be reset individually.
Using the Navigation audio system, do the following:
1. Press and hold the vehicle information button in the
upper right corner of the screen for three seconds
to access the Vehicle Information menu.
2. Use the up and down arrows on the screen to bring
TRIP A or TRIP B into view. Then press the button
next to the trip you wish to be viewed.
The selected trip odometer (A or B) will be
displayed at the top of the screen with the
accumulated mileage.
3. Press the RETURN button to return to the
previous page.
4. Repeat the steps to view the other trip odometer.
You can reset the selected trip odometer by pressing
RESET button on the Vehicle Information menu.
The mileage for the selected trip odometer will return to
zero. Each trip odometer must be reset individually.
3-35
Tachometer
Safety Belt Reminder Light
This gage indicates the
engine speed in
revolutions per
minute (rpm).
When the key is turned to ON or START, a chime will
be provided for several seconds to remind people
to buckle their safety belts. The driver safety belt light
will also be provided and stay on for several seconds,
then it will flash for several more. You should buckle
your seat belt.
This chime and light will be
repeated if the driver
remains unbuckled and the
vehicle is in motion.
Notice: If you operate the engine with the
tachometer in the shaded warning area, your vehicle
could be damaged, and the damages would not be
covered by your warranty. Do not operate the engine
with the tachometer in the shaded warning area.
Engine Speed Limiter
This feature prevents the engine from operating at too
many revolutions per minute (rpm). When the engine’s
rpms are too high, the throttle is closed to reduce
speed. If this is not sufficient, then the fuel supply to the
engine will be limited. When the rpms return to normal,
the fuel supply will return to normal. This helps
prevent damage to the engine.
3-36
If the driver’s belt is buckled, neither the chime nor the
light will be provided.
Airbag Readiness Light
There is an airbag readiness light on the instrument
panel, which shows the airbag symbol. The system
checks the airbag’s electrical system for malfunctions.
The light tells you if there is an electrical problem.
The system check includes the airbag sensors, the
airbag modules, the wiring and the diagnostic module.
For more information on the airbag system, see
Airbag System on page 1-47.
This light will come on
when you start your
vehicle, and it will flash
for a few seconds.
Then the light should go
out. This means the
system is ready.
If the airbag readiness light stays on after you start the
vehicle or comes on when you are driving, your airbag
system may not work properly. Have your vehicle
serviced right away.
{CAUTION:
If the airbag readiness light stays on after you
start your vehicle, it means the airbag system
may not be working properly. The airbags in
your vehicle may not inflate in a crash, or they
could even inflate without a crash. To help
avoid injury to yourself or others, have your
vehicle serviced right away if the airbag
readiness light stays on after you start
your vehicle.
The airbag readiness light should flash for a few
seconds when you turn the ignition key to ON. If the
light doesn’t come on then, have it fixed so it will
be ready to warn you if there is a problem.
If there is a problem with the airbag system in your
vehicle, the Service airbag message will appear on the
DIC display. See DIC Warnings and Messages on
page 3-57 for more information.
3-37
Charging System Light
When you turn the key to
ON or START, this light
will come on briefly
to show that the generator
and battery charging
systems are working
properly.
Brake System Warning Light
Your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided into two
parts. If one part isn’t working, the other part can still
work and stop you. For good braking, though, you need
both parts working well.
If the warning light comes on, there is a brake problem.
Have your brake system inspected right away.
If this light stays on, your vehicle needs service.
You should take your vehicle to the dealer at once.
To save your battery until you get there, turn off
all accessories.
United States
Canada
This light should come on briefly when you turn the
ignition key to ON. If it doesn’t come on then, have it
fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there’s a problem.
3-38
When the ignition is on, the brake system warning light
will also come on when you set your parking brake.
The light will stay on if your parking brake doesn’t
release fully. If it stays on after your parking brake is
fully released, it means you have a brake problem.
If the light comes on while you are driving, pull off the
road and stop carefully. You may notice that the pedal is
harder to push, or the pedal may go closer to the
floor. It may take longer to stop. If the light is still on,
have the vehicle towed for service. See Towing
Your Vehicle on page 4-50.
{CAUTION:
Your brake system may not be working
properly if the brake system warning light is
on. Driving with the brake system warning light
on can lead to an accident. If the light is still
on after you have pulled off the road and
stopped carefully, have the vehicle towed
for service.
Anti-Lock Brake System
Warning Light
With the anti-lock brake
system, the light will come
on when your engine is
started and may stay on
for several seconds.
That’s normal.
If the ABS warning light comes on and stays on, there
may be a problem with the anti-lock portion of the brake
system. If the red BRAKE light is not on, you still
have brakes, but you don’t have anti-lock brakes. See
Brake System Warning Light on page 3-38.
If the light stays on, turn the ignition to OFF. If the light
comes on when you’re driving, stop as soon as
possible and turn the ignition off. Then start the engine
again to reset the system. If the light still stays on,
or comes on again while you’re driving, your vehicle
needs service. If the regular brake system warning light
isn’t on, you still have brakes, but you don’t have
anti-lock brakes. If the regular brake system warning
light is also on, you don’t have anti-lock brakes
and there’s a problem with your regular brakes.
See Brake System Warning Light on page 3-38.
3-39
Traction Control System (TCS)
Warning Light
If the TC (traction control)
warning light comes on
and stays on, there may be
a problem with the
traction control system.
The TC (traction control) warning light will come on
briefly when you turn the ignition to ON. If it doesn’t
come on then, have it fixed so it will be ready to warn
you if there is a problem.
The light will also come on if you turn the traction
control system off using the TC (traction control) on/off
button located near the shift lever.
If the TC (traction control) warning light stays on or
comes on while you are driving, pull off the road as soon
as possible and stop carefully. Try resetting the system
by turning the ignition off then back on. If the light
still stays on or comes back on again while you are
driving, your vehicle needs service. Have the traction
control system inspected as soon as possible.
See Traction Control System (TCS) on page 4-9 for
more information.
3-40
Engine Coolant Temperature
Warning Light (CTS)
This light tells you that
your engine is very hot.
This light will come on when you first start the vehicle
as a check to let you know that the light is working. It will
go out after a few seconds. If the light does not come
on, the bulb may be burned out. See your dealer
for assistance in changing the bulb.
If the light does not go out or if the light comes on and
stays on while you are driving, your vehicle may
have a problem with the cooling system. You should
stop the vehicle and turn off the engine as soon
as possible to avoid damage to the engine. A warning
chime will sound when this light is on, also.
See Engine Overheating on page 5-27.
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage
This gage shows the
engine coolant
temperature. If the gage
pointer moves into
the shaded area, the
engine is too hot.
Tire Pressure Light
If your vehicle has the Tire
Pressure Monitor (TPM)
System, this light will come
on if the system detects
low tire pressure.
This light will also come on for a bulb check when the
vehicle is started.
That reading means the same thing as the warning
light – the engine coolant is very hot. See Engine
Overheating on page 5-27.
See Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 5-61 for
more information.
For more information on the proper tire pressure,
see Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-45. For more
information on your tires, see Tires on page 5-52.
3-41
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Check Engine Light
Your vehicle is equipped
with a computer which
monitors operation of the
fuel, ignition, and emission
control systems.
This system is called OBD II (On-Board DiagnosticsSecond Generation) and is intended to assure that
emissions are at acceptable levels for the life of
the vehicle, helping to produce a cleaner environment.
The check engine light comes on to indicate that
there is a problem and service is required. Malfunctions
often will be indicated by the system before any
problem is apparent. This may prevent more serious
damage to your vehicle. This system is also designed to
assist your service technician in correctly diagnosing
any malfunction.
3-42
Notice: If you keep driving your vehicle with this
light on, after awhile, your emission controls
may not work as well, your fuel economy may not
be as good, and your engine may not run as
smoothly. This could lead to costly repairs that
may not be covered by your warranty.
Notice: Modifications made to the engine,
transmission, exhaust, intake, or fuel system of
your vehicle or the replacement of the original tires
with other than those of the same Tire Performance
Criteria (TPC) can affect your vehicle’s emission
controls and may cause this light to come on.
Modifications to these systems could lead to costly
repairs not covered by your warranty. This may
also result in a failure to pass a required Emission
Inspection/Maintenance test.
This light should come on, as a check to show you it is
working, when the ignition is on and the engine is
not running. If the light does not come on, have it
repaired. This light will also come on during a
malfunction in one of two ways:
• Light Flashing — A misfire condition has been
detected. A misfire increases vehicle emissions
and may damage the emission control system on
your vehicle. Diagnosis and service may be
required.
• Light On Steady — An emission control system
malfunction has been detected on your vehicle.
Diagnosis and service may be required.
If the Light is Flashing
The following may prevent more serious damage to
your vehicle:
•
•
•
•
Reducing vehicle speed
Avoiding hard accelerations
Avoiding steep uphill grades
If the light stops flashing and remains on steady,
see “If the Light Is On Steady” following.
If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do so,
stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park your vehicle.
Turn the key off, wait at least 10 seconds and restart
the engine. If the light remains on steady, see “If the
Light Is On Steady” following. If the light is still flashing,
follow the previous steps, and see your dealer for
service as soon as possible.
If the Light Is On Steady
You may be able to correct the emission system
malfunction by considering the following:
Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle?
If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fully
install the cap. See Filling Your Tank on page 5-8.
The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has
been left off or improperly installed. A loose or missing
fuel cap will allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere.
A few driving trips with the cap properly installed
should turn the light off.
If you are towing a trailer, reduce the amount of
cargo being hauled as soon as it is possible
3-43
Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water?
If so, your electrical system may be wet. The condition
will usually be corrected when the electrical system
dries out. A few driving trips should turn the light off.
Have you recently changed brands of fuel?
If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel.
See Gasoline Octane on page 5-5. Poor fuel quality will
cause your engine not to run as efficiently as designed.
You may notice this as stalling after start-up, stalling
when you put the vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation
on acceleration, or stumbling on acceleration. (These
conditions may go away once the engine is warmed up.)
This will be detected by the system and cause the
light to turn on.
If you experience one or more of these conditions,
change the fuel brand you use. It will require at least
one full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off.
If none of the above steps have made the light turn off,
your dealer can check the vehicle. Your dealer has
the proper test equipment and diagnostic tools to fix
any mechanical or electrical problems that may
have developed.
3-44
Emissions Inspection and
Maintenance Programs
Some state/provincial and local governments have or
may begin programs to inspect the emission control
equipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass this
inspection could prevent you from getting a vehicle
registration.
Here are some things you need to know to help your
vehicle pass an inspection:
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the check
engine light is on or not working properly.
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the OBD
(on-board diagnostic) system determines that critical
emission control systems have not been completely
diagnosed by the system. The vehicle would be
considered not ready for inspection. This can happen
if you have recently replaced your battery or if your
battery has run down. The diagnostic system is
designed to evaluate critical emission control systems
during normal driving. This may take several days
of routine driving. If you have done this and your vehicle
still does not pass the inspection for lack of OBD
system readiness, your GM dealer can prepare the
vehicle for inspection.
Oil Pressure Light
The light goes on when you turn your key to ON or
START. It goes off once you start your engine. That’s a
check to be sure the light works. If it doesn’t come
on, be sure to have it fixed so it will be there to warn
you if something goes wrong.
{CAUTION:
Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is low.
If you do, your engine can become so hot that
it catches fire. You or others could be burned.
Check your oil as soon as possible and have
your vehicle serviced.
Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenance may
damage the engine. The repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. Always follow the
maintenance schedule in this manual for changing
engine oil.
This light tells you if there
could be a problem with
your engine oil pressure.
When the light comes on and stays on, it means that oil
isn’t flowing through your engine properly. You could
be low on oil and you might have some other system
problem.
Sport Mode Light
This light will come on
while the Driver Shift
Control (DSC) feature
is in use.
When you stop using the DSC feature, the light will go
out. If it stays on, your vehicle may need service.
See your dealer. See “Driver Shift Control (DSC)” under
Automatic Transmission Operation on page 2-25 for
more information.
3-45
Security Light
Lights On Reminder
For information
regarding this light,
see Theft-Deterrent
System on page 2-17.
This light comes on
whenever the parking
lamps are on.
See Headlamps on Reminder on page 3-16 for more
information.
Fog Lamp Light
The fog lamps light will
come on when the fog
lamps are in use.
Cruise Control Light
This light comes on
whenever you set your
cruise control.
The light will go out when the fog lamps are turned off.
See Fog Lamps on page 3-18 for more information.
The light will go out when the cruise control is turned
off. See Cruise Control on page 3-12 for more
information.
3-46
Highbeam On Light
This light comes on
whenever the high-beam
headlamps are on.
If the fuel supply gets low, the Fuel Level Low message
will appear on the DIC and a single chime will sound.
See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-57
for more information.
Here are a few concerns some owners have had about
the fuel gage. All of these situations are normal and
do not indicate that anything is wrong with the fuel gage:
• At the gas station the gas pump shuts off before
the gage reads full.
See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer on page 3-9
for more information.
Fuel Gage
The fuel gage shows
approximately how much
fuel is in the tank. It
works only when the
ignition is in ON.
• The gage may change when you turn, stop quickly
or accelerate quickly.
• It takes a little more or less fuel to fill the tank than
the gage indicated. For example, the gage may
have indicated that the tank was half full, but
it actually took a little more or less than half the
tank’s capacity to fill the tank.
3-47
Driver Information Center (DIC)
System Controls
The DIC gives you the status of many of your vehicle’s
systems. It is also used to display driver personalization
features and warning/status messages.
If your vehicle has the base audio system, use the
information contained in this manual for instructions on
operating the DIC for your vehicle.
If your vehicle has the Navigation system, see the SRX
Navigation System manual for instructions on operating
the DIC for your vehicle.
Use the following controls located on the audio system
to operate the DIC:
INFO (Information): Use the up or down arrows on this
switch to scroll through the system status information.
CLR (Clear): Press this button to clear DIC messages
and to reset some DIC displays to zero. This button
is also used to exit out of a menu. See DIC Warnings
and Messages on page 3-57 and Status of Vehicle
Systems on page 3-49 for more information.
TUNE/SEL (Select) Knob: To scroll through the menu
items displayed, turn the knob, located in the lower
right corner. Press the knob to select the menu item.
3-48
Status of Vehicle Systems
You can view the status of several vehicle systems
using the DIC.
Vehicle Information Menu
To access this menu, press the up or down arrow on
the INFO switch located to the right of the display.
The following items are available when the ignition is in
RUN. These items will not be available when the
ignition is in accessory. The tire pressure menu items
are only available if your vehicle has the Tire Pressure
Monitor (TPM) System:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
OUTSIDE TEMP
MI TRIP A*
MI TRIP B*
MILES RANGE
MPG AVG*
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
AVG MPH*
TIMER*
BATTERY VOLTS
ENGINE OIL LIFE*
TRANS FLUID LIFE*
PSI LF TIRE
PSI RF TIRE
PSI RR TIRE
PSI LR TIRE
BLANK LINE
*These items can be reset. Each one must be reset
individually. For a detailed description of the menu items
and how to reset them, see “Vehicle Information
Menu Item Descriptions” later in this section.
You can view any of these items at any time, but only
one item can be displayed at a time.
MPG INST
GAL FUEL USED*
3-49
Vehicle Information Menu Item
Descriptions
The following paragraphs contain a more detailed
description of each menu item:
OUTSIDE TEMP: If you select this item, the current
outside temperature is displayed at the top of the
screen. It will be in either degrees Fahrenheit or degrees
Celsius depending upon whether the system is set for
English or metric units. If you wish to change the
units, see DIC Main Menu on page 3-53.
MI TRIP A and B: For information on the trip
odometers, see Trip Odometers on page 3-35.
MILES RANGE: If you select this item, the approximate
number of remaining miles or kilometers you can
drive without refueling is displayed. This estimate is
based on the current driving conditions and will change
if the driving conditions change. For example, if you
are driving in traffic making frequent stops, the display
may read one number, but if you enter the freeway,
the number may change even though you still have the
same amount of gas in the gas tank. This is because
different driving conditions produce different fuel
economies. Generally, freeway driving produces better
fuel economy than city driving.
3-50
If your vehicle is low on fuel, the Fuel Level Low
message will be displayed. See “Fuel Level Low” under
DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-57 for more
information.
MPG AVG: If you select this item, the approximate
average miles per gallon (mpg) or Liters per
100 kilometers (L/100km) is displayed. This number is
calculated based on the number of mpg (L/100km)
recorded since the last time this menu item was reset.
To reset the MPG AVG, press the CLR button located to
the right of the screen. The display will return to zero.
MPG INST: If you select this item, the current fuel
economy is displayed. This number reflects only the fuel
economy that the vehicle has right now and will change
frequently as driving conditions change. Unlike average
fuel economy, this menu item cannot be reset.
GAL FUEL USED: If you select this item, the number
of gallons or liters of fuel used since the last reset of this
menu item is displayed.
To reset GAL FUEL USED, press the CLR button
located to the right of the screen. The display will
return to zero.
AVG MPH: If you select this item, the average speed of
the vehicle is displayed in miles per hour (mph) or
kilometers per hour (km/h). This average is calculated
based on the various vehicle speeds recorded since the
last reset of this menu item.
To reset AVG MPH, press the CLR button located to
the right of the screen. The display will return to zero.
TIMER: If you select this item, a timing feature is
displayed. The timer functions like a stopwatch in that
you can record the time it takes to travel from one point
to another.
To turn on the timer, press the CLR button located to
the right of the screen once. To turn off the timer, press
the CLR button again.
When the timer is off, the display will show the timer
value and TIMER OFF. The timing feature will stop.
To reset the timer, turn off the timer and then press and
hold the CLR button. The display will return to zero.
BATTERY VOLTS: If you select this item, the current
battery voltage is displayed. If the voltage is in the normal
range, the display will have OK after it. For example,
the display may read 13.2 Battery Volts OK.
If there is a problem with the battery charging system,
there are four possible DIC messages that may be
displayed. See DIC Warnings and Messages on
page 3-57 for more information.
ENGINE OIL LIFE: If you select this item, the
percentage of remaining oil life is displayed. If you see
99% Oil Life on the display, that means that 99% of
the current oil life remains.
When the oil life is depleted, the Change Engine Oil
message will appear on the display. See your GM dealer
for service. In addition to the engine oil life system
monitoring the oil life, additional maintenance is
recommended in the Maintenance Schedule in this
manual. See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4 and
Engine Oil on page 5-16 for more information.
When you reset the Change Engine Oil message by
clearing it from the display, you still must reset the
engine oil life system separately. For more information
on resetting the engine oil life system, see “How to
Reset the Engine Oil Life System and the Oil Life
Indicator” under Engine Oil Life System on page 5-20.
3-51
TRANS FLUID LIFE: If you select this item, the
percentage of remaining transmission fluid life is
displayed. If you see 99% Trans Fluid Life on the
display, that means that 99% of the current transmission
fluid life remains.
RF TIRE: If you select this item, the passenger’s side
front tire pressure will be displayed. If the tire pressure is
low, LOW will be displayed with this item. The pressure
can be displayed in PSI or KPA. To change the
units, see DIC Main Menu on page 3-53.
When the transmission fluid life is depleted, the Change
Transmission Fluid message will appear on the
display. You should change the transmission fluid as
soon as possible within 200 miles (320 km). Be sure to
keep a written record of the mileage and date of the
fluid change so you will have it for future reference.
RR TIRE: If you select this item, the passenger’s side
rear tire pressure will be displayed. If the tire pressure
is low, LOW will be displayed with this item. The
pressure can be displayed in PSI or KPA. To change
the units, see DIC Main Menu on page 3-53.
When you reset the Change Transmission Fluid
message by clearing it from the display, you still must
reset the transmission fluid life monitor separately.
For more information on resetting the transmission fluid
life monitor, see Automatic Transmission Fluid on
page 5-23.
LF TIRE: If you select this item, the driver’s side front
tire pressure will be displayed. If the tire pressure is low,
LOW will be displayed with this item. The pressure
can be displayed in PSI or KPA. To change the units,
see DIC Main Menu on page 3-53.
3-52
LR TIRE: If you select this item, the driver’s side rear
tire pressure will be displayed. If the tire pressure is low,
LOW will be displayed with this item. The pressure
can be displayed in PSI or KPA. To change the units,
see DIC Main Menu on page 3-53.
DIC Main Menu
Accessing the DIC Main Menu
To access the main menu of the DIC, do the following:
1. Press the TUNE/SEL knob once.
2. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob clockwise or
counterclockwise to scroll through the menu items.
The DIC main menu consists of the following
menu items:
•
•
•
•
•
•
e BASS - MID - TREBLE
e EQ
DSP
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
AUTO STORE
CAT
TA
RDS MSG
AF
SEEK LOCAL/DISTANT
9 (English/Metric Units)
TCS
8 (Clock)
8/ 4 (Clock/Information Display)
SETUP
DVD
AVC
H/A
3-53
DIC Main Menu Item Descriptions
e BASS - MID (Midrange) - TREBLE:
This menu
item allows you to adjust the levels for the bass,
midrange, treble, balance, and fade features of the
audio system. For more information, see “Setting the
Tone (Bass/Treble)” and “Adjusting the Speakers
(Balance/Fade)” under Radio with CD on page 3-81.
e EQ (Equalizer):
This menu item allows you
to choose among five preset equalizations for the audio
system. See “Audio Equalizer” under Radio with CD
on page 3-81 for more information.
DSP (Digital Signal Processing): This menu item
allows you to select the DSP type that you want on
the audio system. You may choose Normal, Talk,
Spacious, Rear Seat or Driver Seat. Press the
TUNE/SEL knob to scroll through these choices.
Once the desired choice is displayed, turn the knob to
set your DSP choice and continue scrolling through
the main menu.
See “Using DSP” under Radio with CD on page 3-81
for more information.
3-54
DVD (Digital Versatile Disc): This menu item allows
you to turn the DVD on and off. Press the TUNE/SEL
knob once to turn DVD on and off. When DVD is on,
an X will be in the box next to DVD on the menu.
The X disappears when DVD is off.
See Rear Seat Entertainment System on page 3-98 for
more information.
AVC (Automatic Volume Compensation): This menu
item allows you to turn the AVC feature on and off.
Press the TUNE/SEL knob once to turn AVC on and off.
When AVC is on, an X will be in the box next to AVC
on the menu. The X disappears when AVC is off.
See “AVC (Automatic Volume Compensation)” under
Radio with CD on page 3-81 for more information.
H/A (Home/Away Preset Stations): This menu item
allows you to switch back and forth between your home
and away preset radio stations. Press the TUNE/SEL
knob to switch between home and away.
See “Setting Preset Stations” under Radio with CD on
page 3-81 for more information.
AUTOSTORE: This menu item allows you to
automatically store radio stations with the strongest
signals as presets. See “Setting Preset Stations” Radio
with CD on page 3-81 for more information.
CAT (Category): This menu item allows you to select
radio stations based on preset categories. To turn
the CAT feature on, press the TUNE/SEL knob once.
When CAT is on, an X will be in the box next to CAT on
the menu. The X disappears when CAT is off.
See Radio with CD on page 3-81 for more information.
TA (Traffic Announcement): This menu item allows
you to turn the TA feature on and off. To turn the
TA feature on, press the TUNE/SEL knob once. When
TA is on, an X will be in the box next to TA on the
menu. The X disappears when TA is off.
See “RDS Messages” under Radio with CD on
page 3-81 for more information.
RDS (Radio Data System) MSG (Message): This
menu item allows you to view an RDS radio station
message broadcast by a radio station. To view
the message, press the TUNE/SEL knob once.
The message will appear on the screen.
AF (Alternate Frequency): This menu item allows
you to turn the AF feature on and off. To turn on AF,
press the TUNE/SEL knob once. When AF is on,
an X will be in the box next to AF on the menu.
The X disappears when AF is off.
See “Radio Data System (RDS)” under Radio with CD
on page 3-81 for more information.
SEEK LOCAL/DISTANT: This feature instructs the
audio system to seek only local radio stations with the
strongest signal or to seek all radio stations with a strong
signal in a large area. Use LOCAL when you are in
urban areas where there are several strong radio station
signals and you want to limit the number of stations to
those with the strongest signals only. Use DISTANT
when you are in rural areas where there are fewer radio
station signals available.
To switch between LOCAL and DISTANT, press the
TUNE/SEL knob. Your choice will be set when you press
BACK and return to the main menu.
See “RDS Messages” under Radio with CD on
page 3-81 for more information.
3-55
9 (English/Metric Units):
Use this menu item to
adjust the measurement units.
8 (Clock): Use this menu item to set the time on the
vehicle’s clock.
You can choose between ENGLISH UNITS and
METRIC UNITS. To switch between the two, press the
TUNE/SEL knob. Once your choice is displayed,
turn the knob to set your choice and continue scrolling
through the main menu.
See Setting the Time on page 3-80 for more information.
The measurement units that you choose will be reflected
on all the vehicle system displays, not just the DIC
information. For example, the climate control panel will
display degrees Celsius if you choose METRIC UNITS.
See Radio with CD on page 3-81 for more information.
TCS (Traction Control System): You can enable or
disable the traction control system using this menu item.
Press the TUNE/SEL knob to switch between on and off.
You can also turn the traction control system off using the
traction control button located near the shift lever.
When you disable the traction control system, the
Traction Suspended message will appear on the DIC and
the traction control system warning light on the instrument
panel cluster will come on. See DIC Warnings and
Messages on page 3-57 and Traction Control System
(TCS) Warning Light on page 3-40 for more information.
3-56
8/ 4 (Clock/Information Display):
Use this menu
item to toggle between the clock display and the XM™
Information (Song, Artist, Title), if available.
SETUP: When you select this menu item, the
following submenu is available:
• Personalization
• Language
• Configure Display Keys
To change the language displayed on the radio, select
LANGUAGE by pressing the TUNE/SEL knob. Turn the
TUNE/SEL knob to scroll through the available languages
and press the knob to make your selection. If you
accidentally select a language that you did not want,
ENGLISH is always at the top of the language list.
For more information on the other items in the SETUP
menu, see DIC Vehicle Personalization on page 3-66.
DIC Warnings and Messages
Turn off all unnecessary accessories to allow the battery
to recharge.
These messages will appear if there is a problem
sensed in one of your vehicle’s systems.
The normal battery voltage range is 11.5 to 15.5 volts.
You can monitor battery voltage on the DIC by pressing
the INFO button until you find BATTERY VOLTS.
You must acknowledge a message to clear it from the
screen for further use. To clear a message, press
the CLR button.
Battery Voltage High
Be sure to take any message that appears on the
screen seriously and remember that clearing the
message will only make the message disappear,
not the problem.
This message indicates that the electrical charging
system is overcharging the battery. When the system
detects that the battery voltage is above approximately
16 volts, this message will be displayed.
Battery Saver Active
To reduce the charging overload, use the vehicle’s
accessories. Turn on the exterior lamps and radio, set
the climate control on AUTO and the fan speed
on the highest setting, and turn the rear window
defogger on.
This message appears when the system detects that
the battery voltage is dropping beyond a reasonable
level. The battery saver system will start reducing certain
features of the vehicle that you may not be able to
notice. At the point that the features are disabled, this
message is displayed. It means that the vehicle is trying
to save the charge in the battery.
The normal battery voltage range is 11.5 to 15.5 volts
when the engine is running. You can monitor battery
voltage on the DIC by pressing the INFO button until you
find BATTERY VOLTS.
3-57
Battery Voltage Low
Change Engine Oil
This message will appear when the electrical system is
charging less than 10 volts or if the battery has been
drained.
When this message comes on, it means that service is
required for your vehicle. See your GM dealer. See
Engine Oil on page 5-16 and Scheduled Maintenance
on page 6-4 for more information.
If this message appears immediately after starting the
engine, it is possible that the generator can still recharge
the battery. The battery should recharge while driving but
may take a few hours to do so. Consider using an
auxiliary charger (be sure to follow the manufacturer’s
instructions) to boost the battery after returning home or
to a final destination.
If this message appears while driving or after starting
your vehicle and stays on, have it checked by your
GM dealer immediately to determine the cause of
this problem.
To help the generator recharge the battery quickly,
you can reduce the load on the electrical system
by turning off the accessories.
The normal battery voltage range is 11.5 to 15.5 volts.
You can monitor battery voltage on the DIC by pressing
the INFO button until you find BATTERY VOLTS.
3-58
When you reset the Change Engine Oil message by
clearing it from the display, you still must reset the
engine oil life system separately. For more information
on resetting the engine oil life system, see Engine
Oil Life System on page 5-20.
Change Trans (Transmission) Fluid
This message indicates that the life of the transmission
fluid has expired and it should be changed within
200 miles (320 km). See Scheduled Maintenance on
page 6-4 and Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on
page 6-11 for the proper fluid and change intervals.
When you reset the Change Trans Fluid message by
clearing it from the display, you still must reset the
transmission fluid life monitor separately. For more
information on resetting the transmission fluid life
monitor, see Automatic Transmission Fluid on
page 5-23.
Check Brake Fluid
Check Oil Level
This message will display if the ignition is in ON to inform
the driver that the brake fluid level is low. Have the brake
system serviced by your GM dealer as soon as possible.
See Brake System Warning Light on page 3-38 and
Brakes on page 5-37 for more information.
This message indicates that the oil level is low.
See Engine Oil on page 5-16 for more information on
checking you engine oil.
Check Coolant Level
This message indicates that one or more of the vehicle’s
tires are low. See Status of Vehicle Systems on
page 3-49 for information on checking your vehicle’s tire
pressures. Also, see Tire Pressure Monitor System
on page 5-61 and Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-58
for more information.
This message will appear when there is a low level of
engine coolant. Have the cooling system serviced
by your GM dealer as soon as possible. See Engine
Coolant on page 5-24 for more information.
Notice: If your engine catches fire because you keep
driving with no coolant, your vehicle can be badly
damaged. The costly repairs would not be covered by
your warranty. See Overheated Engine Protection
Operating Mode on page 5-29 for information on
driving to a safe place in an emergency.
Check Gas Cap
When this message appears on the display, the gas cap
has not been fully tightened. You should recheck the
gas cap to ensure that it is on and tightened properly.
See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 3-42 for
more information.
Check Tire Pressure
Check Washer Fluid
When this message appears on the display, it means
that your vehicle is low on windshield washer fluid.
You should refill the tank as soon as possible.
See Windshield Washer Fluid on page 5-36 for
more information.
Driver Door Ajar
When this message appears on the display, it means
that the driver’s door was not closed completely.
You should make sure that the driver’s door is
closed completely.
3-59
Engine Coolant Hot – AC
(Air Conditioning) Off
This message displays when the engine coolant
becomes hotter than the normal operating temperature.
To avoid added strain on a hot engine, the air
conditioning compressor is automatically turned off.
When the coolant temperature returns to normal, the air
conditioning compressor will turn back on. You can
continue to drive your vehicle.
Engine Overheated – Stop Engine
This message will appear when the engine has
overheated. Stop the vehicle and turn the engine off
immediately to avoid severe engine damage. See
Engine Overheating on page 5-27. A chime will also
sound when this message is displayed.
If this message continues to appear, have the system
repaired by your GM dealer as soon as possible to avoid
compressor damage.
Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the engine is
overheating, severe engine damage may occur.
If an overheat warning appears on the instrument
panel cluster and/or DIC, stop the vehicle as soon as
possible. Do not increase the engine speed above
normal idling speed. See Engine Overheating
on page 5-27 for more information.
Engine Coolant Hot – Idle Engine
Engine Power Reduced
This message will appear when the engine coolant
temperature is too hot. Stop and allow the vehicle to idle
until it cools down.
This message informs you that the vehicle is reducing
engine power because the transmission is being
placed in gear under conditions that may cause damage
to the vehicle’s engine or transmission. This also can
affect the vehicle’s ability to accelerate.
Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the engine is
overheating, severe engine damage may occur.
If an overheat warning appears on the instrument
panel cluster and/or DIC, stop the vehicle as soon as
possible. Do not increase the engine speed above
normal idling speed. See Engine Overheating
on page 5-27 for more information.
3-60
Fuel Level Low
When this message appears on the display, it means
that your vehicle is low on fuel. You should refill the tank
as soon as possible. A single chime will sound when
this message is displayed.
Headlamps Suggested
Oil Pressure Low – Stop Engine
This message will appear when the amount of available
light outside the vehicle is low and the exterior lamp
control is off. This message informs the driver that
turning on the exterior lamps is recommended even
though the daytime running lamps (DRL) are still
illuminated and it has become dark enough outside to
require the headlamps and/or other exterior lamps.
A multiple chime will sound when this message is
displayed.
This message will also appear when the windshield
wipers have been on for more than six seconds and the
exterior lamp control is off or in the parking lamp position.
Ice Possible
This message appears when the outside temperature is
cold enough to create icy road conditions.
Left Rear Door Ajar
When this message appears on the display, it means
that the driver’s side rear door was not closed
completely. You should make sure that the door is
closed completely.
Lift Gate Ajar
Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the engine
oil pressure is low, severe engine damage may
occur. If a low oil pressure warning appears on
the instrument panel cluster and/or DIC, stop the
vehicle as soon as possible. Do not drive the vehicle
until the cause of the low oil pressure is corrected.
See Engine Oil on page 5-16 for more information.
Passenger Door Ajar
When this message appears on the display, it means
that the passenger’s side front door was not closed
completely. You should make sure that the door
is closed completely.
Right Rear Door Ajar
When this message appears on the display, it means
that the passenger’s side rear door was not closed
completely. You should check to make sure that
the door is closed completely.
When this message appears on the display, it means
that the liftgate was not closed completely. You should
make sure that the liftgate is closed completely.
3-61
Service AC (Air Conditioning) System
Service Fuel System
This message appears when the electronic sensors that
control the air conditioning and heating systems are
no longer working. Have the climate control system
serviced by your GM dealer if you notice a drop
in heating and air conditioning efficiency.
The Powertrain Control Module (PCM) has detected a
problem within the fuel system when this message
appears. Have your vehicle serviced at your GM dealer.
Service Air Bag
A problem with the idle control has occurred when this
message displays. Have your vehicle serviced at
your GM dealer.
There is a problem with the air bag system when this
message appears. Have your vehicle serviced at
your GM dealer immediately. See Airbag Readiness
Light on page 3-37 for more information.
Service Charging System
This message will display when a problem with the
charging system has been detected. Have your vehicle
serviced at your GM dealer.
Service Electrical System
This message will display if an electrical problem has
occurred within the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) or
the ignition switch. Have your vehicle serviced at your
GM dealer.
3-62
Service Idle Control
Service Stability System Message
Your vehicle is equipped with a vehicle stability
enhancement system called Stabilitrak®.
See Stabilitrak® System on page 4-10. The Service
Stability System message will be displayed if there has
been a problem detected with Stabilitrak®.
If the Service Stability System message comes on while
you are driving, pull off the road as soon as possible
and stop carefully. Try resetting the system by turning
the ignition off then back on. If the Service Stability
System message still stays on or comes back on again
while you are driving, your vehicle needs service.
Have the Stabilitrak® System inspected at your
GM dealer as soon as possible.
Service Steering System
Service Tire Monitor System
Your vehicle may be equipped with a speed variable
assist steering system. See Steering on page 4-12.
This message will appear if the Tire Pressure Monitor
(TPM) system is not working properly. Have your
vehicle serviced at your GM dealer as soon as possible.
See Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 5-61 for
more information.
The Service Steering System message will be displayed
if a problem is detected with the speed variable assist
steering system. When this message is displayed,
you may notice that the effort required to steer
the vehicle increases or feels “heavier,” but you
will still be able to steer the vehicle.
Service Suspension System
This message is displayed to indicate that the
suspension system is not operating properly.
Have your vehicle serviced at your GM dealer.
Service Theft System
This message means there is a problem with the
immobilizer. See Immobilizer on page 2-18 for more
information. A fault has been detected in the system
which means that the system is disabled and is
not protecting the vehicle. The vehicle usually restarts,
however, you may want to take your vehicle to your
GM dealer before turning off the engine.
Service Transmission
There is a problem with the transmission of your
vehicle. Have your vehicle serviced at your GM dealer.
Service Vehicle Soon
This message is displayed when a non-emissions
related powertrain malfunction occurs. Have your vehicle
serviced at your GM dealer as soon as possible.
Speed Limited to XXX
This message indicates that your vehicle speed is
limited to XXX (mph in English mode and km/h in
Metric mode) because the vehicle detects a problem in
the suspension system. Have your vehicle serviced
at your GM dealer.
3-63
Stability System Engaged Message
Stability System Ready Message
The Stability System Engaged message will be
displayed any time Stabilitrak® is actively assisting you
with directional control of the vehicle. Slippery road
conditions may exist when this message is displayed,
so adjust your driving accordingly. This message
may stay on for a few seconds after Stabilitrak® stops
assisting you with directional control of the vehicle.
See Stabilitrak® System on page 4-10 for more
information.
The Stability System Ready message will be displayed
any time you turn Stabilitrak® on again using the
TC (traction control) on/off button. See Traction Control
System (TCS) on page 4-9 for more information.
When this message has been displayed, Stabilitrak® is
ready to assist you with directional control of the
vehicle if needed.
Stability System Off Message
This message will appear when the vehicle
theft-deterrent system detects that an improper ignition
key is being used to try to start the vehicle. Check
the ignition key for damage. If it is damaged, it may need
to be replaced. If it is not damaged, remove the key
and try to start the vehicle again. If it still does not start,
try another ignition key or have your vehicle serviced
at your GM dealer.
The Stability System Off message will be displayed any
time you turn off Stabilitrak® using the TC (traction
control) on/off button. See Traction Control System
(TCS) on page 4-9 for more information. When this
message has been displayed, Stabilitrak® is no longer
available to assist you with directional control of the
vehicle. Adjust your driving accordingly.
Starting Disabled – Remove Key
Starting Disabled – Throttle Problem
This message appears when your vehicle’s throttle
system is not functioning properly. Have your vehicle
serviced at your GM dealer.
3-64
Theft Attempted
Traction Suspended
This message is displayed if the content theft-deterrent
system has detected a break-in attempt while you
were away from your vehicle.
This message will appear when the traction control
system has been temporarily shut off because your
vehicle’s brakes have overheated. This message does
not indicate a problem with your vehicle’s traction
control system. See Traction Control System (TCS) on
page 4-9 for more information.
Top Speed – Fuel Cut Off
This message will appear when the Engine Control
Module (ECM) detects that the maximum speed for your
vehicle has been reached. Your vehicle’s top speed is
based on the top speed rating of the tires. This ensures
that your vehicle stays in a safe operating range for
the tires.
Traction Engaged
This message will appear when the traction control
system is actively limiting wheel spin. Slippery road
conditions may exist if this message is displayed,
so adjust your driving accordingly. The message will
stay on for a few seconds after the traction control
system stops limiting wheel spin. See Traction Control
System (TCS) on page 4-9 for more information.
Trans (Transmission) Hot – Idle Engine
This message indicates that the transmission fluid in
your vehicle is too hot. Stop the vehicle and allow it to
idle until the transmission cools down or until this
message is removed.
Turn Signal On
If you drive your vehicle for more than about 1 mile
(1.6 km) with a turn signal on, this message will appear
as a reminder to turn off the turn signal. A multiple
chime will sound when this message is displayed.
3-65
DIC Vehicle Personalization
Entering the Personalization Menu
Your vehicle is equipped with personalization that allows
you to program certain features to a preferred setting
for up to two people. The number of programmable
features varies depending upon which model of
the vehicle is purchased.
To enter the feature programming mode, use the
following procedure:
On all vehicles, features such as climate control
settings, radio preset settings, exterior lighting at unlock,
remote lock and unlock confirmation, and automatic
door locks have already been programmed for
your convenience.
Some vehicles are equipped with additional features
that can be programmed including the seat and outside
rearview mirror position.
If your vehicle is equipped with the ability to program
additional personalization features, the driver’s
preferences are recalled by pressing the unlock button
on the remote keyless entry transmitter, 1 or 2, or
by pressing the appropriate memory button, 1 or 2,
located on the driver’s door. Certain features can
be programmed not to recall until the key is placed in
the ignition. To change feature preferences, see
“Entering the Personalization Menu” following.
3-66
1. Turn the ignition to ON, but do not start the engine.
Make sure the vehicle is in PARK (P).
2. If your vehicle has memory settings, press the
appropriate memory button, 1 or 2, located on
the driver’s door armrest. The DIC display will show
either Driver 1 or 2 depending on which button
was selected.
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob once to access the main
menu of the DIC.
4. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until SETUP is highlighted.
5. Press the TUNE/SEL knob once to access the
SETUP menu.
6. Scroll to the feature you want to change, and press
the TUNE/SEL knob to turn the feature on or off.
If the feature is turned on, a check mark will appear
next to the feature name.
If none of the personalization items are turned on,
turn on the personalization menu by pressing the
TUNE/SEL knob. The list of features will then appear,
and you can repeat Step 6.
Personalization Features
The following choices are available for programming:
Personalization Name
This feature allows you to type in a name that will
appear on the DIC display whenever the corresponding
remote keyless entry transmitter is used or one of
the buttons on the driver’s door armrest (1 or 2)
is pressed.
If a customized name is not programmed, the system
will show Driver 1 or Driver 2 to correspond with
the numbers on the back of the remote keyless entry
transmitters.
To program a name, use the following procedure:
1. Enter the Personalization menu by following the
instructions listed previously.
2. Select the PERSONALIZATION NAME menu item
by pressing the TUNE/SEL knob once.
You will see a cursor on the screen.
3. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until you reach the first
letter you want; the letter will be highlighted.
There is a complete alphabet with both upper and
lower case letters and the numbers zero through
nine. Also included are spaces and other non-letter
characters such as the ampersand (&).
4. Press the TUNE/SEL knob once to select the letter.
The letter will then appear on the display.
If you make a mistake, press the TUNE/SEL knob
repeatedly to cycle through all the characters
until you reach the character you wish to change.
5. Repeat Steps 3 and 4 until the name you want is
complete. You can program up to 16 characters.
The name you selected is now set. You can either exit
the programming mode by following the instructions
later in this section or program the next feature available
on your vehicle.
Configure Display Keys
This feature allows you to customize the functions of the
four soft keys located to the left and right of the audio
display. See “Configurable Radio Display Keys”
under Radio with CD on page 3-81 for programming
information.
3-67
Remote Recall Memory
If your vehicle has the optional memory package, you
will have this feature. When this feature is turned on, you
can recall any previously programmed seat, adjustable
pedals and mirror controls when the unlock button
on the remote keyless entry transmitter is pressed.
Programmable Modes
Mode 1: ON
Mode 2: OFF
The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit
the programming mode by following the instructions
later in this section or program the next feature available
on your vehicle.
Remote Exit Recall
If your vehicle has the optional memory package, you
will have this feature. When this feature is turned on, you
can recall any previously programmed exit position for
the driver’s seat when the unlock button on the
remote keyless entry transmitter is pressed.
Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory, it was
programmed to Mode 2. The mode to which the
vehicle was programmed may have been changed since
it left the factory.
Programmable Modes
To program the vehicle to a different mode, the following
procedure:
Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory, it was
programmed to Mode 2. The mode to which the
vehicle was programmed may have been changed since
it left the factory.
1. Enter the personalization portion of the SETUP
menu following the instructions listed previously.
2. Scroll to REMOTE RECALL MEMORY to highlight it.
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to switch back and forth
between on and off.
When the mode is turned on, a check mark will
appear next to the feature name.
3-68
Mode 1: ON
Mode 2: OFF
To program the vehicle to a different mode, use the
following procedure:
1. Enter the personalization portion of the SETUP
menu following the instructions listed previously.
2. Scroll to REMOTE EXIT RECALL to highlight it.
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to switch back and forth
between on and off.
When the mode is turned on, a check mark will
appear next to the feature name.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit
the programming mode by following the instructions
later in this section or program the next feature available
on your vehicle.
Key in Recall Memory
If your vehicle has the optional memory package, you
will have this feature. When this feature is turned on, you
can recall any previously programmed seat and mirror
positions when the key is inserted into the ignition.
Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory, it was
programmed to Mode 2. The mode to which the
vehicle was programmed may have been changed since
it left the factory.
To program the vehicle to a different mode, use the
following procedure:
1. Enter the personalization portion of the SETUP
menu following the instructions listed previously.
2. Scroll to KEY IN RECALL MEMORY to highlight it.
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to switch back and
forth between on and off.
When the mode is turned on, a check mark will
appear next to the feature name.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit
the programming mode by following the instructions
later in this section or program the next feature available
on your vehicle.
Programmable Modes
Mode 1: ON
Mode 2: OFF
3-69
Auto Exit Seat
If your vehicle has the optional memory package, you
will have this feature. When this feature is turned on, you
can recall any previously programmed exit position for
the driver’s seat when the key is removed from the
ignition and the driver’s door is opened.
Programmable Modes
Mode 1: ON
Mode 2: OFF
Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory, it was
programmed to Mode 2. The mode to which the
vehicle was programmed may have been changed since
it left the factory.
To program the vehicle to a different mode, use the
following procedure:
1. Enter the personalization portion of the SETUP
menu following the instructions listed previously.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit
the programming mode by following the instructions
later in this section or program the next feature available
on your vehicle.
Twilight Delay
This feature allows you to set the amount of time you
want the exterior lamps to remain on after you exit
the vehicle.
Programmable Modes
Mode 1: 0:00 seconds
Mode 2: 0:15 seconds
Mode 3: 0:30 seconds
Mode 4: 1:00 minute
Mode 5: 1:30 minutes
Mode 6: 2:00 minutes
2. Scroll to AUTO EXIT SEAT using the TUNE/SEL
knob to highlight it.
Mode 7: 2:30 minutes
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to switch back and forth
between on and off.
When the mode is turned on, a check mark will
appear in the box next to the feature name.
Mode 8: 3:00 minutes
3-70
Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory, it was
programmed to Mode 1. The mode to which the
vehicle was programmed may have been changed since
the vehicle left the factory.
To determine the mode to which the vehicle is
programmed or to program the vehicle to a different
mode, use the following procedure:
1. Enter the personalization portion of the SETUP
menu following the instructions listed previously.
2. Scroll to TWILIGHT DELAY using the TUNE/SEL
knob to highlight it.
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to scroll through the
available delay settings. When the delay time
you want is highlighted, press the TUNE/SEL knob
once to select it.
When the mode is turned on, an X will appear in
the box to the left.
If you choose Mode 1, the exterior lamps will not
illuminate when you exit the vehicle. Only one mode
can be selected at a time.
Lights Flash at Unlock
This feature flashes the exterior lamps when the remote
keyless entry transmitter is used to unlock the vehicle.
The lamps will flash for approximately 20 seconds
unless a door is opened, the ignition is turned to
ACCESSORY, ON or START or the remote keyless
entry transmitter is used to lock the vehicle.
Programmable Modes
Mode 1: ON
Mode 2: OFF
Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory, it was
programmed to Mode 1. The mode to which the
vehicle was programmed may have been changed since
it left the factory.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit
the programming mode by following the instructions
later in this section or program the next feature available
on your vehicle.
3-71
To program the vehicle to a different mode, use the
following procedure:
1. Enter the personalization portion of the SETUP
menu following the instructions listed previously.
2. Scroll to LIGHTS FLASH AT UNLOCK to highlight it.
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to switch back and forth
between on and off.
When the mode is turned on, a check mark will
appear next to the feature name.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit
the programming mode by following the instructions
later in this section or program the next feature available
on your vehicle.
Lights Flash at Lock
This feature allows the exterior lamps to flash once
when the remote keyless entry transmitter is used to
lock the vehicle. All doors must be closed for this feature
to work, and the lamps will not flash if the parking
lamps or headlamps are on.
Programmable Modes
Mode 1: ON
Mode 2: OFF
3-72
Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory, it was
programmed to Mode 1. The mode to which the
vehicle was programmed may have been changed since
it left the factory.
To program the vehicle to a different mode, use the
following procedure:
1. Enter the personalization portion of the SETUP
menu following the instructions listed previously.
2. Scroll to LIGHTS FLASH AT LOCK to highlight it.
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to switch back and forth
between on and off.
When the mode is turned on, a check mark will
appear next to the feature name.
You can select this feature by itself, or you can combine
it with Horn Sounds At Lock so that both the lights
flash and the horn chirps when you lock your vehicle.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either
exit the programming mode by following the instructions
later in this section or program the next feature
available on your vehicle.
Horn Sounds at Lock
This feature sounds the horn once when the remote
keyless entry transmitter is used to lock the vehicle.
All doors must be closed for this feature to work.
Programmable Modes
Mode 1: ON
Mode 2: OFF
Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory, it was
programmed to Mode 2. The mode to which the
vehicle was programmed may have been changed since
it left the factory.
To program the vehicle to a different mode, use the
following procedure:
If you select this feature to be on, Lights Flash At Lock
will also be on. You can choose Lights Flash At Lock
by itself, but Horn Sounds At Lock will always have
Lights Flash At Lock enabled when it is selected.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit
the programming mode by following the instructions
later in this section or program the next feature available
on your vehicle.
Exterior Lights at Unlock
This feature turns on the exterior lamps when the
remote keyless entry transmitter is used to unlock the
vehicle. The lamps will remain on for about 20 seconds
unless a door is opened, the ignition is turned to
ACCESSORY, ON or START or the remote keyless
entry transmitter is used to lock the vehicle.
1. Enter the personalization portion of the SETUP
menu following the instructions listed previously.
Programmable Modes
2. Scroll to HORN SOUNDS AT LOCK to highlight it.
Mode 1: ON
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to switch back and
forth between on and off.
When the mode is turned on, a check mark will
appear next to the feature name.
Mode 2: OFF
3-73
Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory, it was
programmed to Mode 1. The mode to which the
vehicle was programmed may have been changed since
it left the factory.
Driver Unlock in Park
To program the vehicle to a different mode, use the
following procedure:
Programmable Modes
1. Enter the personalization portion of the SETUP
menu following the instructions listed previously.
2. Scroll to EXT. LIGHT AT UNLOCK to highlight it.
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to switch back and forth
between on and off.
When the mode is turned on, a check mark will
appear next to the feature name.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit
the programming mode by following the instructions
later in this section or program the next feature available
on your vehicle.
The feature allows the driver’s door to automatically
unlock when the transmission is shifted into PARK (P).
Mode 1: ON
Mode 2: OFF
Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory, it was
programmed to Mode 2. The mode to which the
vehicle was programmed may have been changed since
it left the factory.
To program the vehicle to a different mode, use the
following procedure:
1. Enter the personalization portion of the SETUP
menu following the instructions listed previously.
2. Scroll to DRIVER UNLOCK IN PARK to highlight it.
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to switch back and
forth between on and off.
When the mode is turned on, a check mark will
appear next to the feature name.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit
the programming mode by following the instructions
later in this section or program the next feature available
on your vehicle.
3-74
Driver Unlock Key Out
Doors Unlock in Park
This feature allows the driver’s door to automatically
unlock when the key is removed from the ignition.
The feature allows the doors to automatically unlock
when the transmission is shifted into PARK (P).
Programmable Modes
Programmable Modes
Mode 1: ON
Mode 1: ON
Mode 2: OFF
Mode 2: OFF
Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory, it was
programmed to Mode 2. The mode to which the
vehicle was programmed may have been changed since
it left the factory.
Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory, it was
programmed to Mode 2. The mode to which the
vehicle was programmed may have been changed since
it left the factory.
To program the vehicle to a different mode, use the
following procedure:
To program the vehicle to a different mode, use the
following procedure:
1. Enter the personalization portion of the SETUP
menu following the instructions listed previously.
1. Enter the personalization portion of the SETUP
menu following the instructions listed previously.
2. Scroll to DRIVER UNLOCK KEY OUT.
2. Scroll to DOORS UNLOCK IN PARK to highlight it.
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to switch between on
and off.
When the mode is turned on, a check mark will
appear next to the feature name.
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to switch back and
forth between on and off.
When the mode is turned on, a check mark will
appear next to the feature name.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit
the programming mode by following the instructions
later in this section or program the next feature available
on your vehicle.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit
the programming mode by following the instructions
later in this section or program the next feature available
on your vehicle.
3-75
Doors Unlock Key Out
Delayed Locking
This feature allows the doors to automatically unlock
when the key is removed from the ignition.
Mode 1: ON
This feature delays the locking of the vehicle’s doors for
up to five seconds after a power door lock switch or
the lock button on the remote keyless entry transmitter
is pressed. The five second delay occurs after the
last door is closed.
Mode 2: OFF
Programmable Modes
Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory, it was
programmed to Mode 2. The mode to which the
vehicle was programmed may have been changed since
it left the factory.
Mode 1: ON
Programmable Modes
To program the vehicle to a different mode, use the
following procedure:
1. Enter the personalization portion of the SETUP
menu following the instructions listed previously.
2. Scroll to DOORS UNLOCK KEY OUT.
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to switch between on
and off.
When the mode is turned on, a check mark will
appear next to the feature name.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit
the programming mode by following the instructions
later in this section or program the next feature available
on your vehicle.
3-76
Mode 2: OFF
Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory, it was
programmed to Mode 1. The mode to which the
vehicle was programmed may have been changed since
it left the factory.
To program the vehicle to a different mode, use the
following procedure:
1. Enter the personalization portion of the SETUP
menu following the instructions listed previously.
2. Scroll to DELAYED LOCKING using the TUNE/SEL
knob to highlight it.
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to switch back and forth
between on and off.
When the mode is turned on, a check mark will
appear next to the feature name.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit
the programming mode by following the instructions
later in this section or program the next feature available
on your vehicle.
Lock Passenger Window
This feature allows you to disable either all the passenger
window switches or the rear passenger window switches
only. If this feature is turned on, all passenger window
switches will be disabled when the window lockout button
is pressed. If the feature is off, only the rear passenger
window switches will be disabled. See Power Windows
on page 2-14 for more information.
Programmable Modes
To program the vehicle to a different mode, use the
following procedure:
1. Enter the personalization portion of the SETUP
menu following the instructions listed previously.
2. Scroll to LOCK PASS WINDOW using the
TUNE/SEL knob to highlight it.
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to switch back and forth
between on and off.
When the mode is turned on, a check mark will
appear next to the feature name.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit
the programming mode by following the instructions
later in this section or program the next feature available
on your vehicle.
Mode 1: ON
Mode 2: OFF
Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory, it was
programmed to Mode 2. The mode to which the
vehicle was programmed may have been changed since
it left the factory.
3-77
Mirror to Curb in Reverse
If your vehicle has the optional memory package, you
will have this feature. When this feature is turned on,
the passenger’s outside rearview mirror will move
downward so you can view the curb when the shift lever
is shifted into REVERSE (R). The mirror will return to
the last known driving position when the shift lever
is moved out of REVERSE (R). See Outside Curb View
Assist Mirror on page 2-39 for more information.
Programmable Modes
Mode 1: ON
Mode 2: OFF
Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory, it was
programmed to Mode 2. The mode to which the
vehicle was programmed may have been changed since
it left the factory.
3-78
To program the vehicle to a different mode, use the
following procedure:
1. Enter the personalization portion of the SETUP
menu following the instructions listed previously.
2. Scroll to MIRROR TO CURB IN REV using the
TUNE/SEL knob to highlight it.
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to switch back and forth
between on and off.
When the mode is turned on, a check mark will
appear next to the feature name.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit
the programming mode by following the instructions
later in this section or program the next feature available
on your vehicle.
Enhanced Chime Volume
This feature allows you to adjust the volume level of the
vehicle’s warning chimes. The chime volume cannot
be turned off, only adjusted.
To program the vehicle to a different mode, use the
following procedure:
1. Enter the personalization portion of the SETUP
menu following the instructions listed previously.
Programmable Modes
2. Scroll to ENHANCED CHIME VOLUME using the
TUNE/SEL knob to highlight it.
Mode 1: NORMAL
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to switch back and forth
between the normal and loud settings.
Mode 2: LOUD
Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory, it was
programmed to Mode 1. The mode to which the
vehicle was programmed may have been changed since
it left the factory.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit
the programming mode by following the instructions
later in this section or program the next feature available
on your vehicle.
Exiting the Personalization Menu
Once you have finished making your selections, you will
return to the main audio screen.
3-79
Audio System(s)
Notice: Before adding any sound equipment to
your vehicle, like a tape player, CB radio, mobile
telephone, or two-way radio, make sure that it can
be added by checking with your dealer. Also,
check federal rules covering mobile radio and
telephone units. If sound equipment can be added,
it is very important to do it properly. Added
sound equipment may interfere with the operation
of your vehicle’s engine, radio, or other systems,
and even damage them. Your vehicle’s systems may
interfere with the operation of sound equipment
that has been added improperly.
Figure out which audio system is in your vehicle, find
out what your audio system can do, and how to operate
all of its controls.
Your vehicle has a feature called Retained Accessory
Power (RAP). With RAP, the audio system can be
played even after the ignition is turned off. See Retained
Accessory Power (RAP) on page 2-22 for more
information.
3-80
Setting the Time
1. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to enter the main menu.
2. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until SET CLOCK
appears on the display.
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to select SET CLOCK.
4. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob to adjust the time.
5. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to update the time.
VEHICLE TIME UPDATED will appear on the
display.
If the CLOCK/RADIO DISP is configured into one of the
configurable keys, pressing the key will switch the
display between the radio station frequency and the
time. See “Configurable Radio Display Keys” under
Radio with CD on page 3-81 for more information on
configuring the keys.
Radio with CD
Radio Data System (RDS)
The audio system has a Radio Data System (RDS).
RDS features are available for use only on FM stations
that broadcast RDS information.
With RDS, the radio can do the following:
• Seek to stations broadcasting the selected type
of programming
• Receive announcements concerning local and
national emergencies
• Display messages from radio stations
• Seek to stations with traffic announcements
Radio with CD shown,
Radio with Six-Disc CD similar
This system relies upon receiving specific information
from these stations and will only work when the
information is available. In rare cases, a radio station
may broadcast incorrect information that will cause
the radio features to work improperly. If this happens,
contact the radio station.
While the radio is tuned to an RDS station, the station
name or call letters will appear on the display instead of
the frequency. RDS stations may also provide the time of
day, a program type (PTY) for current programming, and
the name of the program being broadcast.
3-81
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
XM™ is a satellite radio service that is based in the
48 contiguous United States. XM™ offers 100 coast to
coast channels including music, news, sports, talk,
and children’s programming. XM™ provides digital
quality audio and text information, including song title
and artist name. A service fee is required in order
to receive the XM™ service. For more information,
contact XM™ at www.xmradio.com or call
1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
CLOCK/INFO DISP (Clock/Information Display):
Press the CLOCK/INFO DISP button to switch between
the clock display, the XM screen, and the XM
information display.
Press this button while in XM mode to retrieve three
different categories of information related to the current
song or channel: Artist, Song Title, and Category.
3-82
To view this information, perform the following:
1. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to enter the main menu.
2. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until CLOCK/INFO
DISP appears on the display.
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to select CLOCK/INFO
DISP. The display will change to show the additional
XM information.
4. To return to the original display, press the CLR
button or wait for the display to time out.
If the CLOCK/INFO DISP is configured into one of the
configurable keys, pressing the key will switch the
display between the radio station frequency and the
time. See “Configurable Radio Display Keys” later in this
section for more information.
Playing the Radio
Finding a Station
PWR (Power): Press this knob to turn the system on
and off.
BAND: Press this button to select FM1, FM2, AM, or
XM1 or XM2 (if equipped).
VOL (Volume): Turn this knob to increase or to
decrease the volume.
Q SEEK R: Press the up or the down arrow to go to
the next or to the previous station and stay there.
SEEK will appear on the display. The sound will mute
while seeking.
AVC (Automatic Volume Compensation): Available
only with the premium Bose® audio system, AVC
monitors the noise in the vehicle and will adjust the
volume level so that it always sounds the same to you.
AVC works best when listening at low volume levels.
At loud listening levels there will be little or no effect.
To turn AVC on and off, perform the following steps:
1. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to enter the main menu.
2. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until AUTO VOLUME
COMP. appears on the display.
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to turn AVC on or off.
An X will appear in the box when AVC is selected on.
4. Press the CLR button to exit the display. To return
to the original display, repeatedly press the CLR
button or wait for the display to time out.
SOURCE: Press this button to select a source, either
radio or CD. The CD must be loaded to select the
source and to play. CD will appear on the display if a
CD is loaded. If a CD is not loaded the display will
not change from the radio source.
The radio will only seek stations with a strong signal
that are in the selected band.
Q SCAN R: Press the SCAN button to enter scan
mode. SCAN will appear on the display. Press the
up arrow to scan to the next station. The radio will go to
a station, play for 5 seconds, then go on to the next
station. Press this button again to stop scanning.
To scan preset stations, press and hold SCAN for more
than two seconds until you hear a beep and PSCAN
appears on the display. The radio will go to the
first preset station stored on your pushbuttons, play for
5 seconds, then go on to the next preset station.
Press SCAN again to stop scanning presets.
The radio will only scan stations with a strong signal
that are in the selected band.
3-83
LOCAL/DISTANT Selection: With this feature you can
set the radio to search for local stations or stations
that are further away for a larger selection. To set
this feature to LOCAL or DISTANT, perform the
following steps:
1. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to enter the main menu.
2. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until SEEK LOCAL or
SEEK DISTANT appears on the display.
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to select either LOCAL
or DISTANT.
4. Press the CLR button to exit the display. To return
to the original display, repeatedly press the CLR
button or wait for the display to time out.
To search for stations, press the SEEK up or down
arrows. If the system is set to LOCAL, SEEK will appear
in the display and seek to stations with strong signals
only. If the system is set to DISTANT, D-SEEK will
appear in the display and seek to stations with weak and
strong signals.
3-84
Setting Preset Stations
Up to 30 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM,
six XM1 and six XM2 (if equipped)), can be programmed
on the six numbered pushbuttons, by performing the
following steps:
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, or AM, or
XM1 or XM2.
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered pushbuttons
for two seconds until you hear a beep. The set preset
station number will appear on the display above the
pushbutton that it is set to. Whenever that numbered
pushbutton is pressed for less than two seconds,
the station that was set will return.
5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
To set the preset stations with an equalization
setting, DSP setting, or a PTY setting, see each of
these features later in this section. When a preset
station is selected, once one of these additional
settings is selected, the preset station will remember
each setting and it will remain active, until the
setting is selected off for that preset station.
AUTOSTORE PRESETS: To set the preset stations
automatically, perform the following steps:
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, or AM.
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to enter the main menu.
4. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until AUTOSTORE
PRESETS appears on the display.
5. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to select. AUTOSTORE
will appear on the display. The radio will
automatically search the band and select and store
the six radio stations with the strongest signal.
The stations will be stored by signal strength, not
sequential order. The set preset station number will
appear on the display above the pushbutton that
it is set to. Whenever that numbered pushbutton is
pressed for less than two seconds, the station
that was set will return.
PRESETS HOME/AWAY: This feature gives you the
ability to store two different kinds of station presets.
HOME can be used for stations available where you live
and AWAY can be for stations available outside of
your local broadcasting area. To set preset stations for
home and away perform the following steps:
1. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to enter the main menu.
2. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until PRESETS
HOME/AWAY appears on the display.
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to select. HOME or
AWAY will appear on the display.
4. Press the CLR button to exit the display. To return
to the original display, repeatedly press the CLR
button or wait for the display to time out.
Follow the manual or automatic steps previously listed
for setting the preset pushbuttons for both home
and away.
6. Press the CLR button to exit the display. To return
to the original display, repeatedly press the CLR
button or wait for the display to time out.
When battery power is removed and later applied,
you will not have to reset your radio presets.
3-85
Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)
To adjust the bass, midrange, and treble, perform the
following steps:
AUDIO EQUALIZER: This feature allows you to select
customized equalization settings. To choose an
equalization setting (EQ0 through EQ5), perform the
following steps:
1. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to enter the main menu.
1. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to enter the main menu.
2. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until BASS-MID-TREBLE
appears on the display.
2. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until EQUALIZER
appears on the display.
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to enter the tone settings.
4. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to scroll through
the settings.
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to set the equalization
setting. The equalization setting will appear on the
display.
5. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob to increase or to decrease
the bass, midrange, or treble. If a station is weak or
noisy, decrease the treble.
4. Press the CLR button to exit the display. To return
to the original display, repeatedly press the CLR
button or wait for the display to time out.
6. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to set the adjustment.
7. Press the CLR button to exit the display.
To return to the original display repeatedly
press the CLR button or wait for the display to
time out.
3-86
The equalization settings are preset to EQ0 (Normal),
EQ1 (Pop), EQ2 (Rock), EQ3 (Jazz), EQ4 (Talk),
and EQ5 (Country).
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
Using DSP
To adjust the balance or fade, perform the following steps:
Available only with the premium Bose® audio system,
this feature is used to provide a choice of five different
listening experiences: DSP normal, talk, spacious,
rear seat, and driver seat. DSP can be used while
listening to the radio or the CD player. The radio keeps
separate DSP settings for each band, preset, and
source. To select a DSP choice, perform the
following steps:
1. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to enter the main menu.
2. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until BASS-MID-TREBLE
appears on the display.
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to enter the tone
settings.
4. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to scroll to BALANCE
or FADER.
1. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to enter the main menu.
5. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob to adjust the BALANCE
to the right or the left speakers and the FADER to
the front or the rear speakers.
2. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until one of the five
settings appears on the display.
6. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to set the adjustment.
4. Press the CLR button to exit the display. To
return to the original display, repeatedly press
the CLR button or wait for the display to time out.
7. Press the CLR button to exit the display.
To return to the original display, repeatedly
press the CLR button or wait for the display to
time out.
EQ0 will not appear on the display when in this mode.
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to select a DSP setting.
DSP NORMAL: This setting provides the best overall
audio performance for all passengers. DSP NORMAL
will not appear on the display when in this mode.
3-87
TALK: This setting should be used when listening to
non-musical material such as news, talk shows,
sports broadcasts, and books on tape. Talk makes
spoken words sound very clear.
SPACIOUS: This setting is used to make the listening
space seem larger.
REAR SEAT: This setting adjusts the audio to give the
rear seat passenger(s) the best possible sound
quality. Sound quality for the front seat passengers may
be different when this setting is used.
DRIVER SEAT: This setting adjusts the audio to give
the driver the best possible sound quality. Sound quality
for the front and rear seat passenger(s) may be
different when this setting is used.
3-88
RDS Messages
ALERT: Alert warns of local and national emergencies.
When, an alert announcement comes on the current
radio station or a related network station, ALERT
will appear on the display. You will hear the
announcement, even if the volume is low or a CD is
playing. If a CD is playing, play will stop during
the announcement. Alert announcements cannot be
turned off. If the radio tunes to a related network station
for the announcement, it will return to the original
station when the announcement is finished.
ALERT will not be affected by tests of the emergency
broadcast system. This feature is not supported by
all RDS stations.
MSG (Message): If the current RDS station has a
message, MSG will appear on the display. The message
may display the artist, song title, call in phone numbers,
etc. If the entire message does not appear on the
display, parts of the message will appear every three
seconds until the message is completed. Once the
completed message has been displayed, MSG
will disappear from the display until another new
message is received.
To display the last message, perform the following steps:
1. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to enter the main menu.
2. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until RECALL RDS
MESSAGE appears on the display.
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob. The message will
appear on the display.
TA (Traffic Announcement): If TA appears on the
display, the tuned radio station broadcasts traffic
announcements and when a traffic announcement
comes on the tuned station you will hear it.
If the station does not broadcast traffic announcements,
when TA is turned on it will seek to a station that
does. When a station that broadcasts traffic
announcements is found, the radio will stop seeking and
TA will appear on the display. If no station is found
that broadcasts traffic announcements, No Traffic will
appear on the display.
The radio will play traffic announcements if the volume
is low. The radio will interrupt the play of a CD if the
last tuned station broadcasts traffic announcements.
To turn TA on or off, perform the following steps:
Once the message has been displayed, MSG will
disappear from the display until another new message
is received.
1. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to enter the main menu.
TP (Traffic Program): TP will appear on the display
when the radio detects a signal from an RDS station that
has traffic announcement broadcast capability.
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to select ON or OFF.
An X will appear in the box when TA is selected on.
2. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until TRAFFIC
ANNOUNCE appears on the display.
4. Press the CLR button to exit the display. To return
to the original display, repeatedly press the CLR
button or wait for the display to time out.
3-89
Activating Program Type (PTY)
Stations (RDS and XM™)
AF (Alternate Frequency): Alternate frequency allows
the radio to switch to a stronger station with the
same program type.
PTY allows you to search for stations with specific types
of music. The selectable PTYs are POP, EASY, TALK,
CNTRY (Country), CLASS (Classical), and JAZZ.
To turn AF on or off, perform the following steps:
To activate program types, perform the following steps:
1. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to enter the main menu.
2. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until PROGRAM TYPE
MODE appears on the display.
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to select ON or OFF.
An X will appear in the box when PTY is selected on.
4. Press the CLR button to exit the display. To return
to the original display, repeatedly press the CLR
button or wait for the display to time out.
Once program type is activated the PTYs will appear on
the display above the pushbuttons, in place of the
preset stations (if programmed). Press the pushbutton
for the PTY that you would like to listen to. Not all
stations support PTYs. The radio may not go to all
of the stations with that music type when pressing
the pushbutton.
3-90
1. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to enter the main menu.
2. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until ALTERNATE
FREQ. appears on the display.
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to select AF OFF,
AF ON, or AF REG. An X will appear in the box
when AF is selected on.
4. Press the CLR button to exit the display. To return
to the original display, repeatedly press the CLR
button or wait for the display to time out.
Radio Message
THEFTLOCK: This message is displayed when
the THEFTLOCK® system has been activated.
Take the vehicle to the dealer for service.
XM™ Radio Messages
Radio Display
Message
Condition
Action Required
XL (Explicit Language
Channels)
XL on the radio display,
after the channel name,
indicates content with
explicit language.
These channels, or any others, can be blocked at a
customer’s request, by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
XM Updating
Updating encryption code
The encryption code in the receiver is being updated, and no
action is required. This process should take no longer than
30 seconds.
No XM Signal
Loss of signal
The system is functioning correctly, but the vehicle is in a
location that is blocking the XM signal. When the vehicle is
moved into an open area, the signal should return.
Loading XM
Acquiring channel audio
(after 4 second delay)
The audio system is acquiring and processing audio and text
data. No action is needed. This message should disappear
shortly.
Channel Off Air
Channel not in service
This channel is not currently in service. Tune in to another
channel.
Channel Unavail
Channel no longer
available
This previously assigned channel is no longer assigned. Tune
to another station. If this station was one of the presets,
choose another station for that preset button.
No Artist Info
Artist Name/Feature
not available
No artist information is available at this time on this channel.
The system is working properly.
No Title Info
Song/Program Title
not available
No song title information is available at this time on this
channel. The system is working properly.
3-91
XM™ Radio Messages (cont’d)
Radio Display
Message
Condition
Action Required
No CAT Info
Category Name not
available
No category information is available at this time on this
channel. The system is working properly.
Not Found
No channel available for
the chosen category
There are no channels available for the selected category.
The system is working properly.
No Information
No Text/Informational
message available
No text or informational messages are available at this time
on this channel. The system is working properly.
XM Lock
Theft lock active
The XM receiver in your vehicle may have previously been
in another vehicle. For security purposes, XM receivers
cannot be swapped between vehicles. If this message is
received after having your vehicle serviced, check with your
GM dealer.
XM Radio ID
Radio ID label
(channel 0)
If tuned to channel 0, this message will alternate with the
XM Radio 8 digit radio ID label. This label is needed to
activate the service.
Unknown
Radio ID not known
(should only be if
hardware failure)
If this message is received when tuned to channel 0,
there may be a receiver fault. Consult with your GM dealer.
Check XM Receiver
Hardware failure
If this message does not clear within a short period of time,
the receiver may have a fault. Consult with your GM dealer.
3-92
Using the Single CD Player
Do not add paper labels to CDs, they could get caught
in the CD player.
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up. The
player will pull it in. If the ignition and the radio are on the
CD will begin playing. A CD may be loaded with the radio
off but it will not start playing until the radio is on.
If an error appears on the display, see “CD Messages”
later in this section.
If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD in the
player, it will stay in the player. When the ignition
or radio is turned on, the CD will start to play where it
stopped, if it was the last selected audio source.
When the CD is inserted, CD will appear on the display.
As each new track starts to play, the track number
will appear on the display.
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm) single
CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the
smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner.
If playing a CD-R the sound quality may be reduced
due to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the quality
of the music that has been recorded, and the way the
CD-R has been handled. There may be an increase
in skipping, difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in
loading and ejecting. If these problems occur try a
known good CD.
When a CD is inserted the CD functions will appear on
the display above the pushbuttons, in place of the
preset stations (if programmed).
F1 PREV (Previous): Press this pushbutton to go to
the previous track. Press and hold this pushbutton
to reverse quickly within a track. Release the pushbutton
to play the passage. The elapsed time of the track will
appear on the display.
F2 NEXT: Press this pushbutton to go to the next track.
Press and hold this pushbutton to advance quickly within
a track. Release the pushbutton to play the passage.
The elapsed time of the track will appear on the display.
F3 RDM (Random): Press this pushbutton to listen to
the tracks in random, rather than sequential, order.
RANDOM will appear on the display. Press RDM again
to turn off random play. RANDOM will disappear
from the display.
3-93
F4 RPT (Repeat): Press this pushbutton to hear a track
over again. REPEAT will appear on the display. Press
RPT again to turn off repeat play. REPEAT will
disappear from the display.
F6 DISP (Display): Press this pushbutton to display the
time of the track. Press this pushbutton again to
remove the time of the track from the display.
Q SEEK R: Press the up or the down arrow to go to
the next or to the previous track on the CD.
Q SCAN R: Press this button to listen to each track
for 10 seconds. The CD will go to a track, play for
10 seconds, then go on to the next track. Press this
button again to stop scanning.
X (Eject):
Press this button to stop a CD when it is
playing or to eject a CD when it is not playing. Eject may
be activated with the ignition and the radio off.
3-94
Using the Six-Disc CD Changer
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm) single
CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the
smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner.
If playing a CD-R the sound quality may be reduced
due to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the quality
of the music that has been recorded, and the way the
CD-R has been handled. There may be an increase
in skipping, difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in
loading and ejecting. If these problems occur try a
known good CD.
Do not add paper labels to CDs, they could get caught
in the CD player.
If an error appears on the display, see “CD Messages”
later in this section.
When a CD is inserted the CD functions will appear on
the display above the pushbuttons, in place of the
preset stations (if programmed).
LOAD: Press the LOAD button to load CDs into the
CD player. This CD player will hold up to six CDs.
To insert one CD, do the following:
1. The ignition and the radio can be on or off.
2. Press and release the LOAD button. Please Wait
will appear on the display.
3. Load the CD, when INSERT appears on the
display, insert a CD partway into the slot,
label side up. The player will pull the CD in.
When a CD is inserted, CD will appear on the display,
the number of the CD and the track number will
appear on the display if the radio is on.
If the radio is on, the CD will begin to play automatically.
To insert multiple CDs, do the following:
1. The ignition and the radio can be on or off.
2. Press and hold the LOAD button for two seconds.
Please Wait will appear on the display and you will
hear a beep.
3. Load the CD, when INSERT appears on the
display, insert a CD partway into the slot,
label side up. The player will pull the CD in.
Do not load a CD until INSERT appears on the
display. The CD player will take up to six CDs.
Do not try to load more than six. If you want to
load less than six CDs, load the desired amount.
The CD player will time out when it does not receive
any more CDs and the last CD loaded will begin
to play.
If the radio is on, the last CD loaded will begin to play
automatically.
F1 CDn(Down): Press this pushbutton to go to
the previous CD.
F2 CDm(Up): Press this pushbutton to go to the
next CD.
CD REV { (Reverse): Press this pushbutton to go to
the previous track. Press and hold this pushbutton to
reverse quickly within the track. Release the pushbutton
to play the passage. The elapsed time of the track
will appear on the display.
3-95
CD FWD | (Forward): Press this pushbutton to go
to the next track. Press and hold this pushbutton to
advance quickly within the track. Release the pushbutton
to play the passage. The elapsed time of the track will
appear on the display.
F5 MODE: Press this pushbutton to select from
NORMAL, RPT TRCK (Repeat Track), RPT CD
(Repeat CD), RDM TRK (Random Track), and RDM
ALL (Random All CDs).
• NORMAL: Sets the system for normal play of the
CD(s). NORMAL will not appear on the display
when in this mode.
• RPT TRCK (Repeat Track): Repeats the track over
again. RPT TRCK will appear on the display. Press
the MODE pushbutton again to turn off repeat
play. RPT TRCK will disappear from the display.
• RPT CD (Repeat CD): Repeats the CD over again.
RPT DISC will appear on the display. Press the
MODE pushbutton again to turn off repeat play.
RPT DISC will disappear from the display.
• RDM TRK (Random Track): Plays the tracks on the
current CD in random, rather than sequential, order.
RDM TRK will appear on the display. Press the
MODE pushbutton again to turn off random play.
RDM TRK will disappear from the display.
• RDM ALL (Random All CDs): Plays all of the CDs
loaded in random, rather than sequential, order.
RDM ALL will appear on the display. Press the
MODE pushbutton again to turn off random play.
RDM ALL will disappear from the display.
F6 DISP (Display): Press this pushbutton to display the
time of the track. Press this pushbutton again to
display CD PLAY and press this pushbutton once more
to clear the display.
Q SEEK R: Press the up or the down arrow to go to
the next or to the previous track on the CD.
Q SCAN: Press this button to listen to each track for
10 seconds. The CD will go to a track, play for
10 seconds, then go on to the next track. Press this
button again to stop scanning.
X (Eject):
Press this button to eject the CD that is
currently playing, or press and hold this button to eject
all of the CDs loaded. You will hear a beep. Eject
may be activated with the ignition or radio off.
3-96
CD Messages
Configurable Radio Display Keys
If the CD comes out, it could be for one of the
following reasons:
This feature allows you to customize the four keys that
are located on each side of the radio display to
make it easier to adjust the radio features and other
non-radio related features are also available for
customization.
• If it is very hot. When the temperature returns to
normal, the CD should play.
• If you are driving on a very rough road. When the
road becomes smoother, the CD should play.
• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.
• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and
try again.
• There may have been a problem while burning
the CD.
• The label may be caught in the CD player.
To program the configurable radio display keys, perform
the following steps:
1. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to enter the main menu.
2. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until SETUP appears
on the display.
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to enter into SETUP.
4. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until CONFIGURE
DISPLAY KEYS appears on the display.
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,
try a known good CD.
5. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to enter into
CONFIGURE DISPLAY KEYS.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your GM dealer. If the radio displays
an error message, write it down and provide it to
your GM dealer when reporting the problem.
6. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob to select which of the
four configurable keys you would like to change.
The currently assigned feature will be shown.
3-97
7. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to select the configurable
key to change.
Rear Seat Entertainment System
8. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob to find the feature that
you would like to store to the key.
Your vehicle may have the DVD Rear Seat
Entertainment (RSE) system. The RSE system includes
a DVD player, a video display screen, two sets of
wireless headphones, and a remote control.
9. Press the TUNE/SEL knob when you have found
the feature to be stored. The display will update,
by showing the symbol of the feature that you
selected next to the configurable key.
10. Repeat the previous steps for each configurable key.
Once a feature is programmed to a key, the feature will
not appear on the display when programming the
remaining configurable keys. The configurable keys can
be changed at any time.
RSE is available in a base and an uplevel version.
The uplevel version is provided with the navigation radio
(if equipped). The uplevel RSE system offers the rear
seat passengers to have shared control of FM1,
FM2, AM, weather, CDC, and XM™ Satellite Radio
Service (if equipped).
Before You Drive
The RSE system is for rear seat passengers only.
The driver cannot safely view the video screen while
driving and should not try to do so.
3-98
Headphones
Battery Replacement
The RSE system includes two sets of wireless
headphones.
To change the batteries, do the following:
Each set of headphones has an ON/OFF control.
An indicator light will illuminate on the headphones when
they are on. If the light does not illuminate, the batteries
may need to be replaced. See “Battery Replacement”
later in this section for more information. To turn
the headphones OFF activate the ON/OFF control.
Each set of headphones has a volume knob. To adjust
the volume, adjust this knob.
The transmitters are located below the video display
screen. The headphones will shut off to save battery
power if they lose the signal from the system after about
four minutes. The signal may be lost if the system is
turned off or if the headphones are out of range of the
signal transmitters.
1. Loosen the screw on the battery compartment door
located on the left side of the headphone earpiece.
2. Replace the two AAA batteries in the compartment.
Make sure that they are installed correctly, using
the diagram on the inside of the battery
compartment.
3. Tighten the screws to close the compartment door.
If the headphones are to be stored for a long period
of time, remove the batteries and keep them in a cool,
dry place.
Notice: Do not store the headphones in heat or
direct sunlight. This could damage the headphones
and repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
Keep the headphones stored in a cool, dry place.
3-99
Stereo RCA Jacks
The RCA jacks are located on the front of the DVD
player faceplate. These jacks allow audio and video
signals to be connected from an auxiliary device such as
a camcorder or a video game unit to the RSE system.
The L jack is for left audio input, the R jack is for
right audio input, and the V jack is used for video input.
The system requires standard RCA cables, not
included, to connect the auxiliary device to the RCA
jacks. Refer to the manufacturer’s instructions for
proper usage.
To use the auxiliary audio and video inputs, connect an
external auxiliary device such as a camcorder to the
RCA jacks and turn on both the auxiliary device power
and the power on the front of the RSE player.
To have use of these jacks, select AUX using the
MODE button on the DVD player faceplate or the
remote control.
3-100
How to Change the Video Format when in
the Auxiliary Mode
The auxiliary input video format is preset to NTSC. In
some countries, the video format may be in PAL system.
To change the video format, perform the following:
1. Press the display menu button.
2. Press the down arrow button to highlight the Video
Format option.
3. Press the enter button to select Video Format.
4. Press the right or left arrow button to select
the video format.
5. Press the enter button to accept the change.
Audio Output
Video Screen
Audio from the DVD player or auxiliary inputs may be
heard through the following possible sources:
The video screen is located in the floor console.
Lift up the screen by the top or the sides into the full
open position. Adjust the screen’s position as desired.
When the video screen is not in use, close the screen.
• Wireless Headphones
• Vehicle Speakers
• Wired Headphones (not included)
The RSE system will always transmit the audio signal
by infrared to the wireless headphones, if there is
audio available. See “Headphones” previously for
more information.
The RSE system is capable of outputting audio to the
vehicle speakers by using the radio. The RSE system
may be selected as an audio source on the radio if
the RSE system power is on. Once the RSE system is
selected as an audio source on the radio, adjust the
speaker volume on the radio, if necessary. If the RSE
system power is not on, the RSE system will not be
an available source on the radio. Refer to the radio
information for the radio that your vehicle has for
more information.
The DVD player and display will continue to operate
when the screen is in the up or the down position.
The video screen contains the transmitters for the
wireless headphones and the remote control. If the
screen is in the closed position, the signals will not be
available for the operation of the headphones and
the remote control.
Notice: Directly touching the video screen may
damage it. Do not touch the screen. See “Cleaning
the Video Screen” later in this section for more
information.
3-101
DVD Player
The DVD player is located in the floor console under the
display. Flip up the display to access the DVD player.
The DVD player can be controlled by the buttons on the
DVD player and by the buttons on the remote control.
See “Remote Control” later in this section for more
information.
The DVD player power may be turned on when the
ignition is in ON, ACCESSORY, or when Retained
Accessory Power (RAP) is active.
The RSE system DVD player is only compatible with
DVDs of the appropriate region code for the country that
the vehicle was sold in. The DVD region code is
printed on the jacket of most DVDs.
The DVD player will also play audio CDs. Not all home
recorded CDs, CD-R or CD-RW formats, will play in
this DVD player.
If an error message appears on the video screen,
see “DVD Messages” later in this section.
DVD Player Buttons
O(Power): Press this button to turn the RSE system
on and off.
X (Eject):
Press this button to eject a DVD or CD.
SRCE (Source): Press this button to cycle through the
available video modes. Auxiliary is available when
an auxiliary device is plugged into the auxiliary jacks on
the DVD faceplate.
3-102
If your vehicle is equipped with the navigation system,
each press of the SRCE button will cycle the rear video
between DVD, AUX, TV, and front DVD.
z (Display Menu):
Pressing the enter button when this menu appears on the
display will switch the RSE setting between all speaker
and rear video. All speaker will not be available if the front
passenger has turned on the parental control.
n, q, p, o (Menu Navigation): Use the arrow
keys to navigate through a menu.
• All Speaker: The radio and the RSE unit will share
control of what is heard through the vehicle
speakers. All audio and video sources are available
for selection with the SRCE button when in all
speaker.
• Rear Video: The RSE unit will only control what is
seen on the rear display and what is heard through
the headphones.
o (Stop):
Press this button to stop playing a DVD.
Press this button twice to return to the beginning of
the DVD.
s (Play/Pause):
Press this button to turn the DVD
player on, to start play of a DVD or CD, and to
switch between play and pause of a DVD or CD.
y (Menu):
Press this button to access the DVD menu.
This button only operates with a DVD.
Press this button to modify the
video screen display characteristics.
r (Enter): Press this button to select items
within a menu.
If your vehicle is equipped with the navigation system,
after pressing the SRCE button, the enter button
can select all speaker or rear video. See the SRCE
button previously for more information.
Audio/Video Jack: See “Stereo RCA Jacks” earlier in
this section for more information.
X (Headphone Jack):
These jacks allow you to listen
to the RSE through wired headphones (not included).
9 (Headphone Volume):
Turn the left knob to
increase the volume of the headphone connected to the
left headphone jack. Turn the right knob to increase
the volume of the headphone connected to the
right headphone jack.
If your vehicle is equipped with the TV option, the menu
button will display a TV specific menu.
3-103
Playing a Disc
Ejecting a Disc
To play a disc, gently insert the disc with the label side
up into the loading slot. The DVD player will continue
loading the disc and the player will automatically start if
the vehicle is in ON, ACCESSORY, or when RAP
is active.
Press the eject button on the DVD player faceplate to
eject the disc. There is not an eject button on the
remote control.
If a disc is already in the player, press the play/pause
button on the DVD player faceplate or on the
remote control.
Some DVDs will not allow fast forwarding or skipping of
the copyright information or the previews. Some DVDs
will begin playing after the previews have finished. If the
DVD does not begin to play the main title, refer to the
on-screen instructions.
Stopping and Resume Playback
To stop playing a disc, press and release the stop button
on the DVD player faceplate or the remote control.
To resume playback, press the play/pause button on
the DVD player faceplate or the remote control.
The movie should resume play from where it was last
stopped if the disc has not been ejected and the
stop button has not been pressed twice. If the disc has
been ejected or if the stop button has been pressed
twice, the disc will resume play at the beginning.
3-104
If a disc is ejected from the player, but is not removed,
the DVD player will reload the disc within 25 to
30 seconds. The disc will be stored in the DVD player.
The DVD player will not resume play of the disc
automatically.
DVD Messages
The following errors may be displayed on the
video screen:
• Disc Format Error: This message will be displayed
if a disc is inserted upside down, if the disc is not
readable, or if the disc format is not compatible.
The disc will be automatically ejected from the
DVD player.
• Load/Eject Error: This message will be displayed if
the disc is not properly loaded or ejected.
• Disc Play Error: This message will be displayed if
the DVD player cannot play the disc. Severely
scratched or damaged discs will cause this error.
The disc will be automatically ejected from the
DVD player.
• Region Code Error: This message will be
displayed if the region code of the DVD is not
compatible with the DVD player. The disc will be
automatically ejected from the DVD player.
• No Disc: This message will be displayed if the
PLAY button is pressed and no disc is in the player.
Parental Control Button: This button is located on the
navigation system screen. Press this button while a
DVD or CD is playing to freeze the video and mute the
audio. The video screen will display Parental Control
ON and the power indicator light on the DVD player will
flash. It will also disable all other button operations
from the remote control and the DVD player, with the
exception of the eject button. The driver will then be able
to gain the attention of the rear seat passengers.
Press this button again to restore normal operation of
the DVD player.
Remote Control
To use the remote control, aim it at the transmitter
window above the video screen and press the desired
button. Direct sunlight or very bright light may affect
the ability of the RSE system to receive signals from the
remote control. If the remote control does not seem to
be working, the batteries may need to be replaced.
See “Battery Replacement” later in this section.
Objects blocking the line of sight may also affect the
function of the remote control.
Notice: Storing the remote control in a hot area or
in direct sunlight may damage it, and the repairs
would not be covered by your warranty. Keep
the remote control stored in a cool, dry place.
This button may also be used to turn the DVD player
power on and automatically resume play if the vehicle is
in an enabled power mode.
3-105
Remote Control Buttons
z (Display):
Press this button to switch the video
screen display features: color, contrast, brightness,
tint, and display mode (normal, full, and zoom).
Normal means the horizontal image is not stretched
and the borders at the left and right of the picture are
blank. Full means the horizontal image is stretched
across the display and all of the vertical lines are
displayed. No borders are present. Wide means the
horizontal image is stretched up and down the display
and the image tends to be stretched at the borders
instead of at the middle. Borders are not displayed.
Press the left or right navigation keys to select the
display mode.
q (Return):
O (Power): Press this button to turn the DVD player
on and off.
P (Illumination): Press this button to turn the remote
control backlight on for 8 seconds.
v (Title):
Press this button to exit the current
active menu and return to the previous menu.
This button will operate only when a DVD is playing and
a menu is active.
n (Up): Press this button to move up the menu list
of a DVD.
q (Down): Press this button to move down the menu
list of a DVD.
Press this button to access the multiple
titles (if available) of a DVD.
p (Left): Press this button to move to the left of the
menu list of a DVD.
y (Menu):
o (Right): Press this button to move to the right of the
menu list of a DVD.
main menu.
3-106
Press this button to access the DVD
r (Enter): Press this button to select items within
a menu.
e (Audio):
Press this button to open a menu that will
operate only when a DVD is playing. The format and
content of this function will vary for each disc.
{ (Subtitle):
Press this button to open a menu that
will operate only when a DVD is playing. The format and
content of this function will vary for each disc.
r (Rewind): Press this button to rewind through the
chapter or track of a DVD or CD. This button may
not work when the DVD is playing the copyright
information or the previews.
c (Stop):
Press this button to stop the play of a DVD
or CD. Press this button twice to return to the beginning
of the DVD.
s (Play/Pause):
| (Angle):
Press this button to turn the DVD
player on, to start play of a DVD or CD, and to
switch between play and pause of a DVD or CD.
u (Next):
1 through 0 (Numeric Keypad): The numeric keypad
provides the capability of direct chapter, title, and
track number selection.
Press this button to open a menu that will
operate only when a DVD is playing. The format and
content of this function will vary for each disc.
Press this button to go to the next chapter
or track of a DVD or CD.
t (Previous):
Press this button to go to the previous
chapter or track of a DVD or CD.
[ (Fast Forward):
Press this button to fast forward
through the chapter or track of a DVD or CD. This button
may not work when the DVD is playing the copyright
information or the previews.
}10 (Double Digit Entries):
Press this button to
select chapter, title, and track numbers greater than 9.
Press this button before inputting the number.
\ (Clear):
Press this button within three seconds after
inputting a numeric selection, to clear all numeric inputs.
3-107
Battery Replacement
To change the batteries, do the following:
Problem
No power.
The ignition might not be
in on or accessory.
The parental control
button might have been
turned on. The power
indicator light will flash.
Disc will not play.
The system might be off.
The parental control
button might have been
turned on. The power
indicator light will flash.
The system might be in
auxiliary source mode.
Press the MODE button
to switch between the
DVD player and the
auxiliary source.
The disc is upside down
or is not compatible.
The picture does not fill
the screen. There are
black borders on the
top and bottom or on
both sides or it looks
stretched out.
Press the DISP button on
the DVD player or on the
remote control. Change
the display mode.
1. Remove the battery compartment door located on
the bottom of the remote control.
2. Replace the two AA batteries in the compartment.
Make sure that they are installed correctly, using
the diagram on the inside of the battery
compartment.
3. Close the battery door securely.
If the remote control is to be stored for a long period of
time, remove the batteries and keep them in a cool,
dry place.
3-108
Recommended Action
Problem
Recommended Action
The disc was ejected, but The disc is being stored in
it was pulled back into the the DVD player. Press the
DVD player.
eject button again to eject
the disc.
In auxiliary mode, the
picture moves or scrolls.
Check the signal coming
from the auxiliary device
and make sure that the
connection and the signal
is good.
Change the Video Format
to PAL or NTSC. See
“Stereo RCA Jacks”
previously for how to
change the video format.
The language in the audio Press the MENU button
or on the screen is wrong. on the DVD player or on
the remote control and
change the audio or
language selection on
the DVD menu.
Problem
Recommended Action
The remote control
does not work.
Point the remote control
directly at the infrared
window below the video
screen while using.
Check that the batteries
are not dead or
put in wrong.
The parental control
button might have been
turned on. The power
indicator light will flash.
After stopping the
player, I push Play but
sometimes the DVD
starts where I left off
and sometimes at
the beginning.
If the stop button was
pressed one time, the
DVD player will resume
playing where the DVD
was stopped. If the stop
button was pressed two
times the DVD player will
begin to play from the
beginning of the DVD.
3-109
Problem
The auxiliary source is
running but there is no
picture or sound.
My disc is stuck in the
player. The Load/Eject
button does not work.
Recommended Action
Press the MODE button
to change from the DVD
player mode to the
auxiliary source mode.
Check to make sure that
the auxiliary source is
connected to the inputs
properly.
There may be an experience with audio distortion in the
wireless headphones when operating cellular phones,
scanners, CB radios, Global Positioning Systems
(GPS)*, two-way radios, mobile fax, or walkie talkies.
Press the eject/load
button on the DVD player.
Turn the power off, then
on again, then press the
eject/load button on the
DVD player.
Do not attempt to forcibly
remove the disc from the
DVD player. This could
permanently damage the
disc and the DVD player.
* Excludes the OnStar® System.
Sometimes the wireless
This could be caused by
headphone audio cuts out interference from cellular
or buzzes.
telephone towers or by
using your cellular
telephone in the vehicle.
I lost the remote and/or
the headphones.
3-110
DVD Distortion
See your dealer for
assistance.
It may be necessary to turn off the DVD player
when operating one of these devices in or near
the vehicle.
Cleaning the DVD Player
When cleaning the outside DVD faceplate and buttons,
use only a clean cloth dampened with clean water.
Cleaning the Video Screen
Pour some isopropyl or rubbing alcohol on a clean cloth
and gently wipe the video screen. Do not spray
directly onto the screen and do not press too hard or
too long on the video screen.
Navigation/Radio System
Audio Steering Wheel Controls
Your vehicle may have a navigation radio system that
includes Radio Data System (RDS) with Program
Type (PTY) selections that will seek out the kind of
music you want to listen to and XM™ Satellite Radio
Service capabilities (if equipped). The radio can
also communicate with the navigation system to
broadcast announcements on traffic, weather, and
emergency alert communications. For information on
how to use this system, see the “Navigation System”
manual.
Theft-Deterrent Feature
THEFTLOCK® is designed to discourage theft of your
vehicle’s radio. The feature works automatically by
learning a portion of the Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN). If the radio is moved to a different vehicle,
it will not operate. If the radio is removed from your
vehicle, the original VIN in the radio can be used to trace
the radio back to your vehicle.
With THEFTLOCK® activated, the radio will not operate
if stolen.
Some audio controls can be adjusted at the steering
wheel. They include the following:
> (Mute): Press this button to silence the system.
Press this button again, or any other radio button, to turn
the sound on.
SRCE (Source): Press this button to switch between
FM1, FM2, AM, or XM1 or XM2 (if equipped), radio,
or CD.
3-111
g (OnStar/Voice Recognition): If your vehicle has
the Radio with CD or Radio with Six-Disc CD audio
system, press this button to interact with the OnStar®
system. See the OnStar® manual provided with
your vehicle for more information.
If your vehicle has the navigation system, press this
button to initiate voice recognition. See “Voice
Recognition” in the Navigation System manual for more
information. You may be able to interact with the
OnStar® system using this button. See the OnStar®
manual provided with your vehicle for more information.
1–6 (Preset Stations): Press this button to play
stations that are programmed on the radio preset
pushbuttons. The radio will only seek preset stations
with a strong signal that are in the selected band.
When a CD is playing, press this button to go to the
next track.
When a CD is playing in the six-disc CD changer, press
this button to go to the next available CD, if multiple
CDs are loaded.
3-112
+ u — (Volume): Press this button to increase or to
decrease the volume.
+ t u — (Seek): Press either arrow to go to the
next or the previous radio station and stay there.
The radio will only seek stations with a strong signal
that are in the selected band.
When a CD is playing, press the minus sign to go to the
start of the current track, if more than 10 seconds
have played. Press the plus sign to go to the next track.
If either the minus or the plus button are pressed
more than once, the player will continue moving
backward or forward through the CD.
Press and hold the SEEK plus or minus button, until
you hear a beep. The CD will fast forward or fast reverse
through the CD. Press either button again to play the
passage.
If you have the navigation system, some of the audio
steering wheel controls work when a DVD is playing in
the navigation radio. See the Navigation System
manual for more information.
Radio Reception
Cellular Phone Usage
AM
Cellular phone usage may cause interference with your
vehicle’s radio. This interference may occur when
making or receiving phone calls, charging the phone’s
battery, or simply having the phone on. This interference
is an increased level of static while listening to the
radio. If static is received while listening to the radio,
unplug the cellular phone and turn it off.
The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM,
especially at night. The longer range can cause
station frequencies to interfere with each other.
Static can occur on AM stations caused by things like
storms and power lines. Try reducing the treble to
reduce this noise.
FM Stereo
FM stereo will give the best sound, but FM signals
will reach only about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km).
Tall buildings or hills can interfere with FM signals,
causing the sound to fade in and out.
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
XM™ Satellite Radio Service gives digital radio
reception from coast to coast. Just as with FM, tall
buildings or hills can interfere with satellite radio signals,
causing the sound to fade in and out. The radio may
display NO XM SIGNAL to indicate interference.
Care of Your CDs and DVDs
Handle discs carefully. Store them in their original cases
or other protective cases and away from direct sunlight
and dust. If the surface of a disc is soiled, dampen
a clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral detergent solution
and clean it, wiping from the center to the edge.
Be sure never to touch the side without writing when
handling discs. Pick up discs by grasping the outer
edges or the edge of the hole and the outer edge.
Care of Your CD and DVD Player
The use of CD lens cleaners for CDs is not advised, due
to the risk of contaminating the lens of the CD optics
with lubricants internal to the CD mechanism.
3-113
Diversity Antenna System
The AM-FM antenna is integrated with the rear quarter
glass windows, located in the rear of the vehicle on
the driver and passenger sides. Make sure that
the inside surface of the rear windows are not scratched
and that the grid lines on the glass are not damaged.
If the inside surface is damaged, it could interfere
with radio reception.
Notice: Do not apply aftermarket glass tinting with
metallic film. The metallic film in some tinting
materials will interfere with or distort the incoming
radio reception. Any damage caused to your
backglass antenna due to metallic tinting materials
will not be covered by your warranty.
Notice: Do not try to clear frost or other material
from the inside of the rear quarter window with
a razor blade or anything else that is sharp. This
may affect your radio’s ability to pick up stations
clearly. The repairs wouldn’t be covered by
your warranty.
3-114
If static is heard on the radio, when the rear window
defogger is turned on, it could mean that a defogger grid
line has been damaged. If this is true, the grid line
must be repaired.
If adding an aftermarket cellular telephone to your
vehicle, and the antenna needs to be attached to the
glass, make sure that the grid lines for the AM-FM
antennas are not damaged. Make sure the cellular
telephone antenna does not touch a grid line.
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna
System
The XM™ Satellite Radio antenna is located on the roof
of your vehicle. Keep this antenna clear of snow and
ice build up for clear radio reception.
The performance of the XM™ system may be affected if
the sunroof is open.
Loading items onto the roof of your vehicle can interfere
with the performance of the XM™ system. Make sure
that the XM™ satellite antenna is not obstructed.
Section 4
Driving Your Vehicle
Your Driving, the Road, and Your Vehicle ..........4-2
Defensive Driving ...........................................4-2
Drunken Driving .............................................4-3
Control of a Vehicle ........................................4-6
Braking .........................................................4-6
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .........................4-7
Braking in Emergencies ...................................4-8
Traction Control System (TCS) .........................4-9
Magnetic Ride Control ...................................4-10
Stabilitrak® System .......................................4-10
Panic Brake Assist ........................................4-11
Steering ......................................................4-12
Off-Road Recovery .......................................4-14
Passing .......................................................4-14
Loss of Control .............................................4-16
Operating Your All-Wheel-Drive Vehicle
Off Paved Roads .......................................4-17
Driving at Night ............................................4-30
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads ..................4-32
City Driving ..................................................4-35
Freeway Driving ...........................................4-36
Before Leaving on a Long Trip .......................4-37
Highway Hypnosis ........................................4-38
Hill and Mountain Roads ................................4-38
Winter Driving ..............................................4-40
If You Are Stuck: In Sand, Mud,
Ice or Snow ..............................................4-44
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out .................4-44
Recovery Hook .............................................4-45
Loading Your Vehicle ....................................4-45
Towing ..........................................................4-50
Towing Your Vehicle .....................................4-50
Recreational Vehicle Towing ...........................4-50
Level Control ...............................................4-52
Towing a Trailer ...........................................4-52
4-1
Your Driving, the Road, and
Your Vehicle
Defensive Driving
The best advice anyone can give about driving is:
Drive defensively.
Please start with a very important safety device in your
vehicle: Buckle up. See Safety Belts: They Are for
Everyone on page 1-10.
Defensive driving really means “be ready for anything.”
On city streets, rural roads, or freeways, it means
“always expect the unexpected.”
Assume that pedestrians or other drivers are going to
be careless and make mistakes. Anticipate what
they might do. Be ready for their mistakes.
4-2
Rear-end collisions are about the most preventable of
accidents. Yet they are common. Allow enough following
distance. It is the best defensive driving maneuver,
in both city and rural driving. You never know when
the vehicle in front of you is going to brake or turn
suddenly.
Defensive driving requires that a driver concentrate on
the driving task. Anything that distracts from the
driving task — such as concentrating on a cellular
telephone call, reading, or reaching for something on
the floor — makes proper defensive driving more difficult
and can even cause a collision, with resulting injury.
Ask a passenger to help do things like this, or pull off the
road in a safe place to do them yourself. These simple
defensive driving techniques could save your life.
Drunken Driving
Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is
a national tragedy. It is the number one contributor
to the highway death toll, claiming thousands of victims
every year.
Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive
a vehicle:
•
•
•
•
Judgment
Muscular Coordination
Vision
Attentiveness
Police records show that almost half of all motor
vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases,
these deaths are the result of someone who was
drinking and driving. In recent years, more than
16,000 annual motor vehicle-related deaths have been
associated with the use of alcohol, with more than
300,000 people injured.
Many adults — by some estimates, nearly half the adult
population — choose never to drink alcohol, so they
never drive after drinking. For persons under 21,
it is against the law in every U.S. state to drink alcohol.
There are good medical, psychological and
developmental reasons for these laws.
The obvious way to eliminate the leading highway
safety problem is for people never to drink alcohol and
then drive. But what if people do? How much is
“too much” if someone plans to drive? It is a lot less
than many might think. Although it depends on
each person and situation, here is some general
information on the problem.
The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) of someone
who is drinking depends upon four things:
• The amount of alcohol consumed
• The drinker’s body weight
• The amount of food that is consumed before and
during drinking
• The length of time it has taken the drinker to
consume the alcohol
4-3
According to the American Medical Association, a 180 lb
(82 kg) person who drinks three 12 ounce (355 ml)
bottles of beer in an hour will end up with a BAC
of about 0.06 percent. The person would reach the
same BAC by drinking three 4 ounce (120 ml) glasses
of wine or three mixed drinks if each had 1-1/2 ounces
(45 ml) of liquors like whiskey, gin, or vodka.
It is the amount of alcohol that counts. For example,
if the same person drank three double martinis
(3 ounces or 90 ml of liquor each) within an hour,
the person’s BAC would be close to 0.12 percent.
A person who consumes food just before or
during drinking will have a somewhat lower BAC level.
There is a gender difference, too. Women generally
have a lower relative percentage of body water
than men. Since alcohol is carried in body water,
this means that a woman generally will reach a higher
BAC level than a man of her same body weight will
when each has the same number of drinks.
The law in most U.S. states, and throughout Canada,
sets the legal limit at 0.08 percent. In some other
countries, the limit is even lower. For example, it is
0.05 percent in both France and Germany. The BAC
limit for all commercial drivers in the United States
is 0.04 percent.
The BAC will be over 0.10 percent after three to
six drinks (in one hour). Of course, as we have seen,
it depends on how much alcohol is in the drinks,
and how quickly the person drinks them.
4-4
But the ability to drive is affected well below a BAC of
0.10 percent. Research shows that the driving skills
of many people are impaired at a BAC approaching
0.05 percent, and that the effects are worse at night.
All drivers are impaired at BAC levels above
0.05 percent. Statistics show that the chance of being
in a collision increases sharply for drivers who have
a BAC of 0.05 percent or above. A driver with a BAC
level of 0.06 percent has doubled his or her chance
of having a collision. At a BAC level of 0.10 percent,
the chance of this driver having a collision is 12 times
greater; at a level of 0.15 percent, the chance is
25 times greater!
The body takes about an hour to rid itself of the alcohol
in one drink. No amount of coffee or number of cold
showers will speed that up. “I will be careful” is not
the right answer. What if there is an emergency,
a need to take sudden action, as when a child darts
into the street? A person with even a moderate
BAC might not be able to react quickly enough to
avoid the collision.
There is something else about drinking and driving that
many people do not know. Medical research shows
that alcohol in a person’s system can make crash
injuries worse, especially injuries to the brain, spinal
cord, or heart. This means that when anyone who has
been drinking — driver or passenger — is in a crash,
that person’s chance of being killed or permanently
disabled is higher than if the person had not been
drinking.
{CAUTION:
Drinking and then driving is very dangerous.
Your reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness, and
judgment can be affected by even a small
amount of alcohol. You can have a serious — or
even fatal — collision if you drive after drinking.
Please do not drink and drive or ride with a
driver who has been drinking. Ride home in a
cab; or if you are with a group, designate a
driver who will not drink.
4-5
Control of a Vehicle
You have three systems that make your vehicle go where
you want it to go. They are the brakes, the steering, and
the accelerator. All three systems have to do their work at
the places where the tires meet the road.
Sometimes, as when you are driving on snow or ice, it is
easy to ask more of those control systems than the tires
and road can provide. That means you can lose control of
your vehicle. See Stabilitrak® System on page 4-10.
Braking
Braking action involves perception time and
reaction time.
First, you have to decide to push on the brake pedal.
That is perception time. Then you have to bring up your
foot and do it. That is reaction time.
Average reaction time is about three-fourths of a
second. But that is only an average. It might be less
with one driver and as long as two or three seconds or
more with another. Age, physical condition, alertness,
coordination and eyesight all play a part. So do alcohol,
drugs and frustration. But even in three-fourths of a
4-6
second, a vehicle moving at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels
66 feet (20 m). That could be a lot of distance in an
emergency, so keeping enough space between
your vehicle and others is important.
And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatly
with the surface of the road (whether it is pavement
or gravel); the condition of the road (wet, dry, icy); tire
tread; the condition of your brakes; the weight of
the vehicle and the amount of brake force applied.
Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive
in spurts — heavy acceleration followed by heavy
braking — rather than keeping pace with traffic. This is
a mistake. Your brakes may not have time to cool
between hard stops. Your brakes will wear out much
faster if you do a lot of heavy braking. If you keep pace
with the traffic and allow realistic following distances,
you will eliminate a lot of unnecessary braking.
That means better braking and longer brake life.
If your engine ever stops while you are driving, brake
normally but do not pump your brakes. If you do,
the pedal may get harder to push down. If your engine
stops, you will still have some power brake assist.
But you will use it when you brake. Once the power
assist is used up, it may take longer to stop and
the brake pedal will be harder to push.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
Your vehicle has anti-lock brakes. ABS is an advanced
electronic braking system that will help prevent a
braking skid.
When you start your engine and begin to drive away,
your anti-lock brake system will check itself. You may
hear a momentary motor or clicking noise while this test
is going on. This is normal.
If there is a problem with
the anti-lock brake system,
this warning light will
stay on. See Anti-Lock
Brake System Warning
Light on page 3-39.
Along with ABS, your vehicle has a Dynamic Rear
Proportioning (DRP) system. If there is a DRP problem,
both the brake and ABS warning lights will come on
accompanied by a 10-second chime. The lights and
chime will come on each time the ignition is turned on
until the problem is repaired. See your dealer for service.
Let us say the road is wet and you are driving safely.
Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front of you. You slam
on the brakes and continue braking. Here is what
happens with ABS:
A computer senses that wheels are slowing down.
If one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the computer
will separately work the brakes at each front wheel
and at both rear wheels.
4-7
The anti-lock system can change the brake pressure
faster than any driver could. The computer is
programmed to make the most of available tire and road
conditions. This can help you steer around the obstacle
while braking hard.
Remember: Anti-lock does not change the time you
need to get your foot up to the brake pedal or always
decrease stopping distance. If you get too close to
the vehicle in front of you, you will not have time to apply
your brakes if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops.
Always leave enough room up ahead to stop, even
though you have anti-lock brakes.
Using Anti-Lock
Do not pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal
down firmly and let anti-lock work for you. You may feel
the brakes vibrate, or you may notice some noise,
but this is normal.
Braking in Emergencies
With anti-lock, you can steer and brake at the same
time. In many emergencies, steering can help you more
than even the very best braking.
As you brake, your computer keeps receiving updates
on wheel speed and controls braking pressure
accordingly.
4-8
Traction Control System (TCS)
Your vehicle has a traction control system that limits
wheel spin. This is especially useful in slippery
road conditions. On a rear-wheel-drive vehicle, the
system operates if it senses that one or both of the
rear wheels are spinning or beginning to lose traction.
On an All-Wheel-Drive (AWD) vehicle the system
will operate if it senses that any of the wheels are
spinning or beginning to lose traction. When this
happens, the system brakes the spinning wheel(s)
and/or reduces engine power to limit wheel spin.
You may feel or hear the system working, but this
is normal.
This warning light will
come on to let you know
if there’s a problem
with your traction
control system.
See Traction Control System (TCS) Warning Light on
page 3-40. When this warning light is on, the system will
not limit wheel spin. Adjust your driving accordingly.
The traction control system automatically comes on
whenever you start your vehicle. To limit wheel
spin, especially in slippery road conditions, you should
always leave the system on. But you can turn the
traction control system off if you ever need to.
Notice: Do not repeatedly brake or accelerate
heavily when the TCS is off. You could damage
your vehicle’s driveline.
When the TCS is switched off on AWD vehicles, you
may still feel the system working. This is normal
and necessary with the AWD hardware on your vehicle.
You should turn the system off if your vehicle ever
gets stuck in sand, mud or snow and rocking the vehicle
is required. See Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out
on page 4-44 and If You Are Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice
or Snow on page 4-44 for more information. See Winter
Driving on page 4-40 for information on using TCS
when driving in snowy or icy conditions.
To turn the system off,
press the TC (traction
control) button located
near the shift lever.
4-9
If you press the TC button once, the traction control
system will turn off and the traction control system
warning light will come on. Press the TC button again to
turn the system back on. If you press and hold the
TC button for five seconds, the Stabilitrak® system and
the traction control system will turn off. Press the
TC button again to turn Stabilitrak® back on. For more
information, see Stabilitrak® System on page 4-10.
Magnetic Ride Control
Your vehicle may have Magnetic Ride Control that
automatically adjusts the ride of your vehicle.
Automatic ride control is achieved through a computer
used to control and monitor the suspension system.
The controller receives input from various sensors
to determine the proper system response. If the
controller detects a problem within the system, the DIC
will display a Service Suspension System message.
See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-57
for more information. See your dealer for service.
4-10
Stabilitrak® System
Your vehicle is equipped with a vehicle stability
enhancement system called Stabilitrak®. It is an
advanced computer controlled system that assists you
with directional control of the vehicle in difficult
driving conditions.
Stabilitrak® activates when the computer senses a
discrepancy between your intended path and the
direction the vehicle is actually traveling. Stabilitrak®
selectively applies braking pressure at any one of
the vehicle’s brakes to help steer the vehicle in the
direction which you are steering.
When the system activates, a Stability System Engaged
message will be displayed on the Driver Information
Center. See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-57.
You may also hear a noise or feel vibration in the
brake pedal. This is normal. Continue to steer the
vehicle in the direction you want it to go.
If there is a problem detected with Stabilitrak®, a
Service Stability System message will be displayed on
the Driver Information Center. See DIC Warnings
and Messages on page 3-57. When this message is
displayed, the system is not operational. Driving should
be adjusted accordingly.
Stabilitrak® comes on automatically whenever you start
your vehicle. To help assist you with directional
control of the vehicle, you should always leave the
system on. You can turn Stabilitrak® off if you ever need
to through the TC (traction control) on/off button.
See Traction Control System (TCS) on page 4-9.
If your vehicle is in cruise control when the Stabilitrak®
activates, the cruise control will automatically
disengage. When road conditions allow you to safely
use it again, you may reengage the cruise control.
See “Cruise Control on page 3-12 for more information.
Panic Brake Assist
Your vehicle has a panic brake assist system that
monitors the intention of the driver while braking. If the
system senses that the driver has applied hard/fast
pressure to the brake pedal, the system will generate
additional pressure, making it easier for the driver
to maintain brake application. When this happens the
brake pedal will feel easier to push. Just hold the brake
pedal down firmly and let the system work for you.
You may feel the brakes vibrate, or you may notice
some noise but this is normal. The brakes will return
to normal operation after the brake pedal has
been released.
4-11
Steering
Power Steering
If you lose power steering assist because the engine
stops or the system is not functioning, you can steer but
it will take much more effort.
Steering Tips
Driving on Curves
It is important to take curves at a reasonable speed.
A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents mentioned on
the news happen on curves. Here is why:
Suppose you are steering through a sharp curve.
Then you suddenly accelerate. Both control
systems — steering and acceleration — have to do
their work where the tires meet the road. Adding the
sudden acceleration can demand too much of those
places. You can lose control. See Stabilitrak® System
on page 4-10.
What should you do if this ever happens? Ease up on
the accelerator pedal, steer the vehicle the way you
want it to go, and slow down.
If you have Stabilitrak®, you may see the STABILITY
SYSTEM ACTIVE message on the message center.
See “Stability System Active Message” under DIC
Warnings and Messages on page 3-57.
Experienced driver or beginner, each of us is subject
to the same laws of physics when driving on curves.
The traction of the tires against the road surface makes
it possible for the vehicle to change its path when
you turn the front wheels. If there is no traction, inertia
will keep the vehicle going in the same direction.
If you have ever tried to steer a vehicle on wet ice,
you will understand this.
Speed limit signs near curves warn that you should
adjust your speed. Of course, the posted speeds
are based on good weather and road conditions. Under
less favorable conditions you will want to go slower.
The traction you can get in a curve depends on the
condition of your tires and the road surface, the angle at
which the curve is banked, and your speed. While
you are in a curve, speed is the one factor you
can control.
Try to adjust your speed so you can “drive” through the
curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Wait to
accelerate until you are out of the curve, and then
accelerate gently into the straightaway.
4-12
If you need to reduce your speed as you approach
a curve, do it before you enter the curve, while your front
wheels are straight ahead.
Steering in Emergencies
There are times when steering can be more effective
than braking. For example, you come over a hill and find
a truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pulls
out from nowhere, or a child darts out from between
parked cars and stops right in front of you. You can
avoid these problems by braking — if you can stop in
time. But sometimes you cannot; there is not room.
That is the time for evasive action — steering around
the problem.
Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like
these. First apply your brakes.
See Braking on page 4-6. It is better to remove as much
speed as you can from a possible collision. Then steer
around the problem, to the left or right depending on the
space available.
An emergency like this requires close attention and a
quick decision. If you are holding the steering wheel at
the recommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions, you
can turn it a full 180 degrees very quickly without
removing either hand. But you have to act fast, steer
quickly, and just as quickly straighten the wheel
once you have avoided the object.
The fact that such emergency situations are always
possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving
at all times and wear safety belts properly.
4-13
Off-Road Recovery
Passing
You may find that your right wheels have dropped off
the edge of a road onto the shoulder while you are
driving.
The driver of a vehicle about to pass another on a
two-lane highway waits for just the right moment,
accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead, then
goes back into the right lane again. A simple maneuver?
Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on a two-lane
highway is a potentially dangerous move, since the
passing vehicle occupies the same lane as oncoming
traffic for several seconds. A miscalculation, an error in
judgment, or a brief surrender to frustration or anger
can suddenly put the passing driver face to face with the
worst of all traffic accidents — the head-on collision.
So here are some tips for passing:
• Drive ahead. Look down the road, to the sides
and to crossroads for situations that might affect
your passing patterns. If you have any doubt
whatsoever about making a successful pass,
wait for a better time.
If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the
pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off the
accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way,
steer so that your vehicle straddles the edge of
the pavement. You can turn the steering wheel up to
one-quarter turn until the right front tire contacts
the pavement edge. Then turn your steering wheel
to go straight down the roadway.
4-14
• Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings and
lines. If you can see a sign up ahead that might
indicate a turn or an intersection, delay your pass.
A broken center line usually indicates it is all
right to pass, providing the road ahead is clear.
Never cross a solid line on your side of the lane or
a double solid line, even if the road seems empty
of approaching traffic.
• Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to
pass while you are awaiting an opportunity. For one
thing, following too closely reduces your area of
vision, especially if you are following a larger
vehicle. Also, you will not have adequate space if
the vehicle ahead suddenly slows or stops.
Keep back a reasonable distance.
• When it looks like a chance to pass is coming up,
start to accelerate but stay in the right lane and
do not get too close. Time your move so you will be
increasing speed as the time comes to move into
the other lane. If the way is clear to pass, you
will have a running start that more than makes up
for the distance you would lose by dropping
back. And if something happens to cause you to
cancel your pass, you need only slow down
and drop back again and wait for another
opportunity.
• If other vehicles are lined up to pass a slow vehicle,
• Check your mirrors, glance over your shoulder and
start your left lane change signal before moving out
of the right lane to pass. When you are far
enough ahead of the passed vehicle to see its front
in your inside mirror, activate your right lane
change signal and move back into the right lane.
Remember that if your right outside mirror is convex,
the vehicle you just passed may seem to be
farther away from you than it really is.
• Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a time on
two-lane roads. Reconsider before passing the
next vehicle.
• Do not overtake a slowly moving vehicle too rapidly.
Even though the brake lamps are not flashing, it
may be slowing down or starting to turn.
• If you are being passed, make it easy for the
following driver to get ahead of you. Perhaps
you can ease a little to the right.
wait your turn. But take care that someone is not
trying to pass you as you pull out to pass the slow
vehicle. Remember to glance over your shoulder
and check the blind spot.
4-15
Loss of Control
Let us review what driving experts say about what
happens when the three control systems — brakes,
steering, and acceleration — do not have enough friction
where the tires meet the road to do what the driver
has asked.
In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying to
steer and constantly seek an escape route or area of
less danger.
Skidding
In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.
Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable
care suited to existing conditions, and by not overdriving
those conditions. But skids are always possible.
The three types of skids correspond to your vehicle’s
three control systems. In the braking skid, your wheels
are not rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too much
speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip and lose
cornering force. And in the acceleration skid, too much
throttle causes the driving wheels to spin.
A cornering skid is best handled by easing your foot off
the accelerator pedal.
Remember: Any traction control system helps avoid only
the acceleration skid. If your traction control system is
off, then an acceleration skid is also best handled
by easing your foot off the accelerator pedal.
If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off the
accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want
the vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough,
your vehicle may straighten out. Always be ready
for a second skid if it occurs.
Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice,
gravel, or other material is on the road. For safety,
you will want to slow down and adjust your driving to
these conditions. It is important to slow down on slippery
surfaces because stopping distance will be longer and
vehicle control more limited.
While driving on a surface with reduced traction, try
your best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration,
or braking, including engine braking by shifting to a
lower gear. Any sudden changes could cause the tires
to slide. You may not realize the surface is slippery
until your vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognize warning
clues — such as enough water, ice, or packed snow
on the road to make a mirrored surface — and
slow down when you have any doubt.
Remember: Any anti-lock brake system (ABS) helps
avoid only the braking skid.
4-16
Operating Your All-Wheel-Drive
Vehicle Off Paved Roads
This off-road guide is for vehicles that have all-wheel
drive. If your vehicle does not have all-wheel drive, you
should not drive off-road unless you are on a level,
solid surface.
Many of the same design features that help make
your vehicle responsive on paved roads during
poor weather conditions — features like all-wheel
drive — help make it much better suited for off-road
use. Its higher ground clearance also helps your vehicle
step over some off-road obstacles. But your vehicle
does not have features like special underbody shielding
and a transfer case low gear range, things that are
usually thought necessary for extended or severe
off-road service.
Also, see Braking on page 4-6.
Off-road driving can be great fun. But it does have
some definite hazards. The greatest of these is
the terrain itself.
“Off-roading” means you have left the North American
road system behind. Traffic lanes are not marked.
Curves are not banked. There are no road signs.
Surfaces can be slippery, rough, uphill or downhill.
In short, you have gone right back to nature.
Off-road driving involves some new skills. And that is
why it is very important that you read this guide.
You will find many driving tips and suggestions.
These will help make your off-road driving safer and
more enjoyable.
Before You Go Off-Roading
There are some things to do before you go out.
For example, be sure to have all necessary maintenance
and service work done. Check to make sure all
underbody shields (if so equipped) are properly
attached. Is there enough fuel? Is the spare tire fully
inflated? Are the fluid levels up where they should be?
What are the local laws that apply to off-roading
where you will be driving? If you do not know, you
should check with law enforcement people in the area.
Will you be on someone’s private land? If so, be sure
to get the necessary permission.
4-17
Loading Your Vehicle for Off-Road
Driving
There are some important things to remember about
how to load your vehicle.
{CAUTION:
• Cargo on the load floor piled higher than
• The heaviest things should be on the load floor and
forward of your rear axle. Put heavier items as far
forward as you can.
• Be sure the load is secured properly, so driving on
the off-road terrain does not toss things around.
•
•
the seatbacks can be thrown forward
during a sudden stop. You or your
passengers could be injured. Keep cargo
below the top of the seatbacks.
Unsecured cargo on the load floor can be
tossed about when driving over rough
terrain. You or your passengers can be
struck by flying objects. Secure the cargo
properly.
Heavy loads on the roof raise the vehicle’s
center of gravity, making it more likely to
roll over. You can be seriously or fatally
injured if the vehicle rolls over. Put heavy
loads inside the cargo area, not on the
roof. Keep cargo in the cargo area as far
forward and low as possible.
You will find other important information in this manual.
See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-45, Luggage
Carrier on page 2-48 and Tires on page 5-52.
4-18
Environmental Concerns
Traveling to Remote Areas
Off-road driving can provide wholesome and satisfying
recreation. However, it also raises environmental
concerns. We recognize these concerns and urge every
off-roader to follow these basic rules for protecting
the environment:
It makes sense to plan your trip, especially when going
to a remote area. Know the terrain and plan your
route. You are much less likely to get bad surprises.
Get accurate maps of trails and terrain. Try to learn of
any blocked or closed roads.
• Always use established trails, roads and areas that
It is also a good idea to travel with at least one other
vehicle. If something happens to one of them, the other
can help quickly.
have been specially set aside for public off-road
recreational driving; obey all posted regulations.
• Avoid any driving practice that could damage
the environment — shrubs, flowers, trees,
grasses — or disturb wildlife (this includes
wheel-spinning, breaking down trees or
unnecessary driving through streams or over
soft ground).
• Always carry a litter bag — make sure all refuse
is removed from any campsite before leaving.
• Take extreme care with open fires (where permitted),
camp stoves and lanterns.
• Never park your vehicle over dry grass or other
Getting Familiar with Off-Road Driving
It is a good idea to practice in an area that is safe
and close to home before you go into the wilderness.
Off-road driving does require some new and different
driving skills. Here is what we mean.
Tune your senses to different kinds of signals.
Your eyes, for example, need to constantly sweep the
terrain for unexpected obstacles. Your ears need to
listen for unusual tire or engine sounds. With your arms,
hands, feet and body, you will need to respond to
vibrations and vehicle bounce.
combustible materials that could catch fire from the
heat of the vehicle’s exhaust system.
4-19
Controlling your vehicle is the key to successful off-road
driving. One of the best ways to control your vehicle
is to control your speed. Here are some things to keep
in mind. At higher speeds:
• you approach things faster and you have less time
to scan the terrain for obstacles.
• you have less time to react.
• you have more vehicle bounce when you drive over
obstacles.
• you will need more distance for braking, especially
since you are on an unpaved surface.
{CAUTION:
When you are driving off-road, bouncing and
quick changes in direction can easily throw
you out of position. This could cause you to
lose control and crash. So, whether you’re
driving on or off the road, you and your
passengers should wear safety belts.
Scanning the Terrain
Off-road driving can take you over many different kinds
of terrain. You need to be familiar with the terrain
and its many different features. Here are some things
to consider.
Surface Conditions: Off-roading can take you over
hard-packed dirt, gravel, rocks, grass, sand, mud, snow
or ice. Each of these surfaces affects the steering,
acceleration and braking of your vehicle in different
ways. Depending upon the kind of surface you are on,
you may experience slipping, sliding, wheel spinning,
delayed acceleration, poor traction and longer braking
distances.
Surface Obstacles: Unseen or hidden obstacles can
be hazardous. A rock, log, hole, rut or bump can startle
you if you are not prepared for them. Often these
obstacles are hidden by grass, bushes, snow or even
the rise and fall of the terrain itself. Here are some
things to consider:
• Is the path ahead clear?
• Will the surface texture change abruptly up ahead?
• Does the travel take you uphill or downhill?
(There is more discussion of these subjects later.)
• Will you have to stop suddenly or change
direction quickly?
4-20
When you drive over obstacles or rough terrain, keep a
firm grip on the steering wheel. Ruts, troughs or
other surface features can jerk the wheel out of your
hands if you are not prepared.
When you drive over bumps, rocks, or other obstacles,
your wheels can leave the ground. If this happens,
even with one or two wheels, you cannot control the
vehicle as well or at all.
Because you will be on an unpaved surface, it is
especially important to avoid sudden acceleration,
sudden turns or sudden braking.
In a way, off-road driving requires a different kind of
alertness from driving on paved roads and highways.
There are no road signs, posted speed limits or
signal lights. You have to use your own good judgment
about what is safe and what is not.
Drinking and driving can be very dangerous on any
road. And this is certainly true for off-road driving.
At the very time you need special alertness and driving
skills, your reflexes, perceptions and judgment can
be affected by even a small amount of alcohol.
You could have a serious — or even fatal — accident if
you drink and drive or ride with a driver who has
been drinking. See Drunken Driving on page 4-3.
Driving on Off-Road Hills
Off-road driving often takes you up, down or across a
hill. Driving safely on hills requires good judgment
and understanding of what your vehicle can and cannot
do. There are some hills that simply cannot be driven,
no matter how well built the vehicle.
{CAUTION:
Many hills are simply too steep for any vehicle.
If you drive up them, you will stall. If you drive
down them, you cannot control your speed.
If you drive across them, you will roll over.
You could be seriously injured or killed. If you
have any doubt about the steepness, do not
drive the hill.
4-21
Approaching a Hill
Driving Uphill
When you approach a hill, you need to decide if it is
one of those hills that is just too steep to climb, descend
or cross. Steepness can be hard to judge. On a very
small hill, for example, there may be a smooth, constant
incline with only a small change in elevation where
you can easily see all the way to the top. On a large hill,
the incline may get steeper as you near the top, but
you may not see this because the crest of the hill
is hidden by bushes, grass or shrubs.
Here are some other things to consider as you
approach a hill.
• Is there a constant incline, or does the hill get
sharply steeper in places?
• Is there good traction on the hillside, or will the
surface cause tire slipping?
• Is there a straight path up or down the hill so you
will not have to make turning maneuvers?
• Are there obstructions on the hill that can block
your path (boulders, trees, logs or ruts)?
• What is beyond the hill? Is there a cliff, an
embankment, a drop-off, a fence? Get out and walk
the hill if you do not know. It is the smart way to
find out.
• Is the hill simply too rough? Steep hills often have
ruts, gullies, troughs and exposed rocks because
they are more susceptible to the effects of erosion.
Once you decide you can safely drive up the hill,
you need to take some special steps.
• Use a low gear and get a firm grip on the
steering wheel.
• Get a smooth start up the hill and try to maintain
your speed. Do not use more power than you
need, because you do not want your wheels to start
spinning or sliding.
• Try to drive straight up the hill if at all possible.
If the path twists and turns, you might want to
find another route.
4-22
{CAUTION:
Turning or driving across steep hills can be
dangerous. You could lose traction, slide
sideways, and possibly roll over. You could be
seriously injured or killed. When driving up
hills, always try to go straight up.
• Ease up on your speed as you approach the top of
the hill.
• Attach a flag to the vehicle to make you more
visible to approaching traffic on trails or hills.
Q: What should I do if my vehicle stalls, or is about
to stall, and I cannot make it up the hill?
A: If this happens, there are some things you should
• Sound the horn as you approach the top of the hill
to let opposing traffic know you are there.
• Use your headlamps even during the day. They
make you more visible to oncoming traffic.
•
do, and there are some things you must not do?
First, here is what you should do:
Push the brake pedal to stop the vehicle and
keep it from rolling backwards. Also, apply the
parking brake.
• If your engine is still running, shift the transmission
{CAUTION:
to REVERSE (R), release the parking brake, and
slowly back down the hill in REVERSE (R).
• If your engine has stopped running, you will need to
Driving to the top (crest) of a hill at full speed
can cause an accident. There could be a
drop-off, embankment, cliff, or even another
vehicle. You could be seriously injured or
killed. As you near the top of a hill, slow down
and stay alert.
restart it. With the brake pedal pressed and the
parking brake still applied, shift the transmission to
PARK (P) and restart the engine. Then shift to
REVERSE (R), release the parking brake,
and slowly back down the hill as straight as possible
in REVERSE (R).
• As you are backing down the hill, put your left hand
on the steering wheel at the 12 o’clock position.
This way you will be able to tell if your wheels are
straight and maneuver as you back down. It is
best that you back down the hill with your wheels
straight rather than in the left or right direction.
Turning the wheel too far to the left or right
will increase the possibility of a rollover.
4-23
Here are some things you must not do if you stall, or
are about to stall, when going up a hill.
• Never attempt to prevent a stall by shifting into
NEUTRAL (N) to rev-up the engine and regain
forward momentum. This will not work. Your vehicle
will roll backwards very quickly and you could go
out of control.
Instead, apply the regular brake to stop the vehicle.
Then apply the parking brake. Shift to
REVERSE (R), release the parking brake, and
slowly back straight down.
• Never attempt to turn around if you are about to
stall when going up a hill. If the hill is steep
enough to stall your vehicle, it is steep enough to
cause you to roll over if you turn around. If you
cannot make it up the hill you must back straight
down the hill.
Q: Suppose, after stalling, I try to back down
the hill and decide I just cannot do it.
What should I do?
A: Set the parking brake, put your transmission in
PARK (P) and turn off the engine. Leave the
vehicle and go get some help. Exit on the uphill
side and stay clear of the path the vehicle would
take if it rolled downhill.
Driving Downhill
When off-roading takes you downhill, you will want to
consider a number of things:
• How steep is the downhill? Will I be able to maintain
vehicle control?
• What’s the surface like? Smooth? Rough? Slippery?
Hard-packed dirt? Gravel?
• Are there hidden surface obstacles? Ruts? Logs?
Boulders?
• What is at the bottom of the hill? Is there a hidden
creek bank or even a river bottom with large rocks?
4-24
If you decide you can go down a hill safely, then try to
keep your vehicle headed straight down, and use a
low gear. This way, engine drag can help your brakes
and they will not have to do all the work. Descend
slowly, keeping your vehicle under control at all times.
Q: Are there some things I should not do when
driving down a hill?
A: Yes! These are important because if you ignore
•
{CAUTION:
Heavy braking when going down a hill can
cause your brakes to overheat and fade.
This could cause loss of control and a serious
accident. Apply the brakes lightly when
descending a hill and use a low gear to keep
vehicle speed under control.
•
them you could lose control and have a serious
accident.
When driving downhill, avoid turns that take you
across the incline of the hill. A hill that is not too
steep to drive down may be too steep to drive
across. You could roll over if you do not drive
straight down.
Never go downhill with the transmission in
NEUTRAL (N). This is called “free wheeling.”
Your brakes will have to do all the work and
could overheat and fade.
Q: Am I likely to stall when going downhill?
A: It is much more likely to happen going uphill.
But if it happens going downhill, here is what to do.
1. Stop your vehicle by applying the regular brakes.
Apply the parking brake.
2. Shift to PARK (P) and, while still braking,
restart the engine.
3. Shift back to a low gear, release the parking brake,
and drive straight down.
4. If the engine will not start, get out and get help.
4-25
Driving Across an Incline
Sooner or later, an off-road trail will probably go across
the incline of a hill. If this happens, you have to
decide whether to try to drive across the incline.
Here are some things to consider:
• A hill that can be driven straight up or down may be
too steep to drive across. When you go straight up
or down a hill, the length of the wheel base
(the distance from the front wheels to the rear
wheels) reduces the likelihood the vehicle
will tumble end over end. But when you drive
across an incline, the much more narrow track width
(the distance between the left and right wheels)
may not prevent the vehicle from tilting and rolling
over. Also, driving across an incline puts more
weight on the downhill wheels. This could cause a
downhill slide or a rollover.
• Surface conditions can be a problem when you drive
across a hill. Loose gravel, muddy spots, or even wet
grass can cause your tires to slip sideways, downhill.
If the vehicle slips sideways, it can hit something that
will trip it (a rock, a rut, etc.) and roll over.
• Hidden obstacles can make the steepness of the
incline even worse. If you drive across a rock with the
uphill wheels, or if the downhill wheels drop into a rut
or depression, your vehicle can tilt even more.
4-26
For reasons like these, you need to decide carefully
whether to try to drive across an incline. Just because the
trail goes across the incline does not mean you have to
drive it. The last vehicle to try it might have rolled over.
{CAUTION:
Driving across an incline that is too steep will
make your vehicle roll over. You could be
seriously injured or killed. If you have any
doubt about the steepness of the incline, do
not drive across it. Find another route instead.
Q: What if I am driving across an incline that is not
too steep, but I hit some loose gravel and start
to slide downhill. What should I do?
A: If you feel your vehicle starting to slide sideways,
turn downhill. This should help straighten out the
vehicle and prevent the side slipping. However,
a much better way to prevent this is to get out and
“walk the course” so you know what the surface
is like before you drive it.
Stalling on an Incline
If your vehicle stalls when you are crossing an incline,
be sure you (and your passengers) get out on the uphill
side, even if the door there is harder to open. If you
get out on the downhill side and the vehicle starts to roll
over, you will be right in its path.
If you have to walk down the slope, stay out of the path
the vehicle will take if it does roll over.
{CAUTION:
Getting out on the downhill (low) side of
a vehicle stopped across an incline is
dangerous. If the vehicle rolls over, you could
be crushed or killed. Always get out on the
uphill (high) side of the vehicle and stay well
clear of the rollover path.
4-27
Driving in Mud, Sand, Snow or Ice
When you drive in mud, snow or sand, your wheels will
not get good traction. You cannot accelerate as
quickly, turning is more difficult, and you will need longer
braking distances.
Hard packed snow and ice offer the worst tire traction.
On these surfaces, it is very easy to lose control.
On wet ice, for example, the traction is so poor that you
will have difficulty accelerating. And, if you do get
moving, poor steering and difficult braking can cause
you to slide out of control.
It is best to use a low gear when you are in mud — the
deeper the mud, the lower the gear. In really deep
mud, the idea is to keep your vehicle moving so you do
not get stuck.
{CAUTION:
When you drive on sand, you will sense a change in
wheel traction. But it will depend upon how loosely
packed the sand is. On loosely packed sand (as on
beaches or sand dunes) your tires will tend to sink into
the sand. This has an effect on steering, accelerating
and braking. Drive at a reduced speed and avoid sharp
turns or abrupt maneuvers.
Driving on frozen lakes, ponds or rivers can be
dangerous. Underwater springs, currents
under the ice, or sudden thaws can weaken
the ice. Your vehicle could fall through the ice
and you and your passengers could drown.
Drive your vehicle on safe surfaces only.
4-28
Driving in Water
Heavy rain can mean flash flooding, and flood waters
demand extreme caution.
{CAUTION:
Find out how deep the water is before you drive through
it. If it is deep enough to cover your wheel hubs,
axles or exhaust pipe, do not try it — you probably will
not get through. Also, water that deep can damage
your axle and other vehicle parts.
Driving through rushing water can be
dangerous. Deep water can sweep your
vehicle downstream and you and your
passengers could drown. If it is only shallow
water, it can still wash away the ground from
under your tires, and you could lose traction
and roll the vehicle over. Do not drive through
rushing water.
If the water is not too deep, drive slowly through it.
At faster speeds, water splashes on your ignition system
and your vehicle can stall. Stalling can also occur if
you get your tailpipe under water. And, as long as your
tailpipe is under water, you will never be able to
start your engine. When you go through water,
remember that when your brakes get wet, it may take
you longer to stop.
See Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads on page 4-32
for more information on driving through water.
4-29
After Off-Road Driving
Driving at Night
Remove any brush or debris that has collected on
the underbody, chassis or under the hood.
These accumulations can be a fire hazard.
After operation in mud or sand, have the brake linings
cleaned and checked. These substances can cause
glazing and uneven braking. Check the body structure,
steering, suspension, wheels, tires and exhaust
system for damage. Also, check the fuel lines and
cooling system for any leakage.
Your vehicle will require more frequent service due to
off-road use. Refer to the Maintenance Schedule
for additional information.
Night driving is more dangerous than day driving.
One reason is that some drivers are likely to be
impaired — by alcohol or drugs, with night vision
problems, or by fatigue.
4-30
Here are some tips on night driving.
• Drive defensively.
• Do not drink and drive.
• Since you cannot see as well, you may need to
slow down and keep more space between you
and other vehicles.
• Slow down, especially on higher speed roads. Your
headlamps can light up only so much road ahead.
• In remote areas, watch for animals.
• If you are tired, pull off the road in a safe place
and rest.
No one can see as well at night as in the daytime.
But as we get older these differences increase.
A 50-year-old driver may require at least twice as much
light to see the same thing at night as a 20-year-old.
What you do in the daytime can also affect your
night vision. For example, if you spend the day in bright
sunshine you are wise to wear sunglasses. Your eyes
will have less trouble adjusting to night. But if you
are driving, do not wear sunglasses at night. They may
cut down on glare from headlamps, but they also
make a lot of things invisible.
You can be temporarily blinded by approaching
headlamps. It can take a second or two, or even
several seconds, for your eyes to re-adjust to the dark.
When you are faced with severe glare, as from a
driver who does not lower the high beams, or a
vehicle with misaimed headlamps, slow down a little.
Avoid staring directly into the approaching headlamps.
Keep your windshield and all the glass on your
vehicle clean — inside and out. Glare at night is made
much worse by dirt on the glass. Even the inside of
the glass can build up a film caused by dust. Dirty glass
makes lights dazzle and flash more than clean glass
would, making the pupils of your eyes contract
repeatedly.
Remember that your headlamps light up far less of a
roadway when you are in a turn or curve. Keep your
eyes moving; that way, it is easier to pick out dimly
lighted objects. Just as your headlamps should
be checked regularly for proper aim, so should your
eyes be examined regularly. Some drivers suffer from
night blindness — the inability to see in dim light — and
are not even aware of it.
4-31
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads
you will get even less traction. It is always wise to go
slower and be cautious if rain starts to fall while you are
driving. The surface may get wet suddenly when your
reflexes are tuned for driving on dry pavement.
The heavier the rain, the harder it is to see. Even if your
windshield wiper blades are in good shape, a heavy
rain can make it harder to see road signs and
traffic signals, pavement markings, the edge of the road,
and even people walking.
It is wise to keep your wiping equipment in good shape
and keep your windshield washer tank filled with
washer fluid. Replace your windshield wiper inserts
when they show signs of streaking or missing areas
on the windshield, or when strips of rubber start to
separate from the inserts.
Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble. On a wet
road, you cannot stop, accelerate, or turn as well
because your tire-to-road traction is not as good as on
dry roads. And, if your tires do not have much tread left,
4-32
{CAUTION:
Wet brakes can cause accidents. They will not
work as well in a quick stop and may cause
pulling to one side. You could lose control of
the vehicle.
After driving through a large puddle of water
or a car wash, apply your brake pedal lightly
until your brakes work normally.
Driving too fast through large water puddles or even
going through some car washes can cause problems,
too. The water may affect your brakes. Try to avoid
puddles. But if you cannot, try to slow down before you
hit them.
4-33
Hydroplaning
Driving Through Flowing Water
Hydroplaning is dangerous. So much water can build up
under your tires that they can actually ride on the
water. This can happen if the road is wet enough and
you are going fast enough. When your vehicle is
hydroplaning, it has little or no contact with the road.
{CAUTION:
Flowing or rushing water creates strong forces.
If you try to drive through flowing water, as you
might at a low water crossing, your vehicle
can be carried away. As little as six inches of
flowing water can carry away a smaller vehicle.
If this happens, you and other vehicle
occupants could drown. Do not ignore police
warning signs, and otherwise be very cautious
about trying to drive through flowing water.
Hydroplaning does not happen often. But it can if your
tires do not have much tread or if the pressure in
one or more is low. It can happen if a lot of water is
standing on the road. If you can see reflections
from trees, telephone poles, or other vehicles, and
raindrops dimple the water’s surface, there could be
hydroplaning.
Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds.
There just is not a hard and fast rule about hydroplaning.
The best advice is to slow down when it is raining.
Driving Through Deep Standing Water
Notice: If you drive too quickly through deep
puddles or standing water, water can come in
through your engine’s air intake and badly damage
your engine. Never drive through water that is
slightly lower than the underbody of your vehicle.
If you cannot avoid deep puddles or standing water,
drive through them very slowly.
4-34
Some Other Rainy Weather Tips
• Turn on your low-beam headlamps — not just your
•
•
parking lamps — to help make you more visible
to others.
Besides slowing down, allow some extra following
distance. And be especially careful when you
pass another vehicle. Allow yourself more clear
room ahead, and be prepared to have your
view restricted by road spray.
Have good tires with proper tread depth. See Tires
on page 5-52.
City Driving
Here are ways to increase your safety in city driving:
• Know the best way to get to where you are
going. Get a city map and plan your trip into
an unknown part of the city just as you would for a
cross-country trip.
• Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscross
most large cities. You will save time and energy.
See Freeway Driving on page 4-36.
• Treat a green light as a warning signal. A traffic
light is there because the corner is busy enough
to need it. When a light turns green, and just before
you start to move, check both ways for vehicles
that have not cleared the intersection or may
be running the red light.
One of the biggest problems with city streets is the
amount of traffic on them. You will want to watch out for
what the other drivers are doing and pay attention to
traffic signals.
4-35
Freeway Driving
The most important advice on freeway driving is:
Keep up with traffic and keep to the right. Drive at the
same speed most of the other drivers are driving.
Too-fast or too-slow driving breaks a smooth traffic flow.
Treat the left lane on a freeway as a passing lane.
At the entrance, there is usually a ramp that leads to
the freeway. If you have a clear view of the freeway as
you drive along the entrance ramp, you should begin
to check traffic. Try to determine where you expect
to blend with the flow. Try to merge into the gap at close
to the prevailing speed. Switch on your turn signal,
check your mirrors, and glance over your shoulder as
often as necessary. Try to blend smoothly with the
traffic flow.
Once you are on the freeway, adjust your speed to the
posted limit or to the prevailing rate if it is slower.
Stay in the right lane unless you want to pass.
Before changing lanes, check your mirrors. Then use
your turn signal.
Mile for mile, freeways — also called thruways, parkways,
expressways, turnpikes, or superhighways — are the
safest of all roads. But they have their own special rules.
Just before you leave the lane, glance quickly over your
shoulder to make sure there is not another vehicle in
your blind spot.
Once you are moving on the freeway, make certain you
allow a reasonable following distance. Expect to
move slightly slower at night.
4-36
When you want to leave the freeway, move to the
proper lane well in advance. If you miss your exit,
do not, under any circumstances, stop and back
up. Drive on to the next exit.
The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes quite sharply.
The exit speed is usually posted.
Reduce your speed according to your speedometer, not
to your sense of motion. After driving for any distance
at higher speeds, you may tend to think you are
going slower than you actually are.
Before Leaving on a Long Trip
Make sure you are ready. Try to be well rested. If you
must start when you are not fresh — such as after
a day’s work — do not plan to make too many miles that
first part of the journey. Wear comfortable clothing
and shoes you can easily drive in.
Here are some things you can check before a trip:
• Windshield Washer Fluid: Is the reservoir full?
Are all windows clean inside and outside?
• Wiper Blades: Are they in good shape?
• Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have you checked
all levels?
• Lamps: Are they all working? Are the lenses clean?
• Tires: They are vitally important to a safe,
trouble-free trip. Is the tread good enough for
long-distance driving? Are the tires all inflated to the
recommended pressure?
• Weather Forecasts: What is the weather outlook
along your route? Should you delay your trip a
short time to avoid a major storm system?
• Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps?
Is your vehicle ready for a long trip? If you keep it
serviced and maintained, it is ready to go. If it needs
service, have it done before starting out. Of course, you
will find experienced and able service experts in GM
dealerships all across North America. They will be ready
and willing to help if you need it.
4-37
Highway Hypnosis
Hill and Mountain Roads
Is there actually such a condition as highway hypnosis?
Or is it just plain falling asleep at the wheel? Call it
highway hypnosis, lack of awareness, or whatever.
There is something about an easy stretch of road with
the same scenery, along with the hum of the tires on the
road, the drone of the engine, and the rush of the
wind against the vehicle that can make you sleepy.
Do not let it happen to you! If it does, your vehicle can
leave the road in less than a second, and you could
crash and be injured.
What can you do about highway hypnosis?
First, be aware that it can happen.
Then here are some tips:
• Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated,
with a comfortably cool interior.
• Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road ahead
and to the sides. Check your mirrors and your
instruments frequently.
• If you get sleepy, pull off the road into a rest,
service, or parking area and take a nap, get some
exercise, or both. For safety, treat drowsiness
on the highway as an emergency.
4-38
Driving on steep hills or mountains is different from
driving in flat or rolling terrain.
If you drive regularly in steep country, or if you are
planning to visit there, here are some tips that can make
your trips safer and more enjoyable. See Operating
Your All-Wheel-Drive Vehicle Off Paved Roads on
page 4-17 for information about driving off-road.
{CAUTION:
Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or with the
ignition off is dangerous. Your brakes will have
to do all the work of slowing down. They could
get so hot that they would not work well.
You would then have poor braking or even
none going down a hill. You could crash.
Always have your engine running and your
vehicle in gear when you go downhill.
• Keep your vehicle in good shape. Check all fluid
•
levels and also the brakes, tires, cooling system,
and transmission. These parts can work hard
on mountain roads.
Know how to go down hills. The most important
thing to know is this: let your engine do some of
the slowing down. Shift to a lower gear when you go
down a steep or long hill.
• Know how to go uphill. You may want to shift down to
{CAUTION:
•
If you do not shift down, your brakes could
get so hot that they would not work well.
You would then have poor braking or even
none going down a hill. You could crash.
Shift down to let your engine assist your
brakes on a steep downhill slope.
•
•
a lower gear. The lower gears help cool your engine
and transmission, and you can climb the hill better.
Stay in your own lane when driving on two-lane
roads in hills or mountains. Do not swing wide or cut
across the center of the road. Drive at speeds that let
you stay in your own lane.
As you go over the top of a hill, be alert. There could
be something in your lane, like a stalled car or an
accident.
You may see highway signs on mountains that warn
of special problems. Examples are long grades,
passing or no-passing zones, a falling rocks area,
or winding roads. Be alert to these and take
appropriate action.
4-39
Winter Driving
Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom, a
supply of windshield washer fluid, a rag, some winter
outer clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight, a red
cloth, and a couple of reflective warning triangles.
And, if you will be driving under severe conditions,
include a small bag of sand, a piece of old carpet,
or a couple of burlap bags to help provide traction.
Be sure you properly secure these items in your vehicle.
Driving on Snow or Ice
Most of the time, those places where your tires meet
the road probably have good traction.
However, if there is snow or ice between your tires
and the road, you can have a very slippery situation.
You will have a lot less traction, or grip, and will need
to be very careful.
Here are some tips for winter driving:
• Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.
• You may want to put winter emergency supplies in
your vehicle.
Also see Tires on page 5-52.
4-40
Accelerate gently. Try not to break the fragile traction.
If you accelerate too fast, the drive wheels will spin
and polish the surface under the tires even more.
See Stabilitrak® System on page 4-10 and Rocking
Your Vehicle to Get It Out on page 4-44. Also see
“Winter Tires” under Tires on page 5-52.
Your anti-lock brakes improve your vehicle’s stability
when you make a hard stop on a slippery road.
Even though you have an anti-lock braking system,
you will want to begin stopping sooner than you would
on dry pavement. See Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS) on page 4-7.
• Allow greater following distance on any
slippery road.
• Watch for slippery spots. The road might be fine
What is the worst time for this? Wet ice. Very cold snow
or ice can be slick and hard to drive on. But wet ice
can be even more trouble because it may offer the least
traction of all. You can get wet ice when it is about
freezing (32°F; 0°C) and freezing rain begins to fall.
Try to avoid driving on wet ice until salt and sand crews
can get there.
Whatever the condition — smooth ice, packed, blowing,
or loose snow — drive with caution.
until you hit a spot that is covered with ice.
On an otherwise clear road, ice patches may appear
in shaded areas where the sun cannot reach:
around clumps of trees, behind buildings, or under
bridges. Sometimes the surface of a curve or
an overpass may remain icy when the surrounding
roads are clear. If you see a patch of ice ahead
of you, brake before you are on it. Try not to brake
while you are actually on the ice, and avoid
sudden steering maneuvers.
4-41
If You Are Caught in a Blizzard
• Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around you.
If you have no blankets or extra clothing, make
body insulators from newspapers, burlap bags, rags,
floor mats — anything you can wrap around
yourself or tuck under your clothing to keep warm.
If you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be in a
serious situation. You should probably stay with
your vehicle unless you know for sure that you are near
help and you can hike through the snow. Here are
some things to do to summon help and keep yourself
and your passengers safe:
• Turn on your hazard flashers.
• Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police that
you have been stopped by the snow.
4-42
You can run the engine to keep warm, but be careful.
{CAUTION:
Snow can trap exhaust gases under your
vehicle. This can cause deadly CO (carbon
monoxide) gas to get inside. CO could
overcome you and kill you. You cannot see it
or smell it, so you might not know it is in your
vehicle. Clear away snow from around the
base of your vehicle, especially any that is
blocking your exhaust pipe. And check around
again from time to time to be sure snow does
not collect there.
Open a window just a little on the side of the
vehicle that is away from the wind. This will
help keep CO out.
Run your engine only as long as you must. This saves
fuel. When you run the engine, make it go a little
faster than just idle. That is, push the accelerator
slightly. This uses less fuel for the heat that you get
and it keeps the battery charged. You will need a
well-charged battery to restart the vehicle, and possibly
for signaling later on with your headlamps. Let the
heater run for a while.
Then, shut the engine off and close the window almost
all the way to preserve the heat. Start the engine
again and repeat this only when you feel really
uncomfortable from the cold. But do it as little as
possible. Preserve the fuel as long as you can.
To help keep warm, you can get out of the vehicle and
do some fairly vigorous exercises every half hour or
so until help comes.
4-43
If You Are Stuck: In Sand, Mud,
Ice or Snow
In order to free your vehicle when it is stuck, you will
need to spin the wheels, but you do not want to
spin your wheels too fast. The method known as rocking
can help you get out when you are stuck, but you
must use caution.
{CAUTION:
If you let your tires spin at high speed, they can
explode, and you or others could be injured.
And, the transmission or other parts of the
vehicle can overheat. That could cause an
engine compartment fire or other damage.
When you are stuck, spin the wheels as little as
possible. Do not spin the wheels above 35 mph
(55 km/h) as shown on the speedometer.
Notice: Spinning your wheels can destroy parts of
your vehicle as well as the tires. If you spin the
wheels too fast while shifting your transmission
back and forth, you can destroy your transmission.
For more information about using tire chains on your
vehicle, see Tire Chains on page 5-68.
4-44
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out
First, turn your steering wheel left and right. That
will clear the area around your front wheels. If your
vehicle has the Stabilitrak® System, turn the system off
by pressing and holding the Traction button so that
the STABILITY SYS DISABLED message and the
traction off light are illuminated on the instrument
panel cluster. Then shift back and forth between
REVERSE (R) and a forward gear, spinning the wheels
as little as possible. Release the accelerator pedal
while you shift, and press lightly on the accelerator pedal
when the transmission is in gear. By slowly spinning
your wheels in the forward and reverse directions, you
will cause a rocking motion that may free your
vehicle. If that does not get you out after a few tries,
you may need to be towed out. Or, you can use
your recovery hook if your vehicle has one. If you do
need to be towed out, see Towing Your Vehicle on
page 4-50.
Recovery Hook
Loading Your Vehicle
Your vehicle may be equipped with a recovery hook.
The recovery hook is provided in the jack storage area.
The hook can be installed either at the front of the
vehicle on the passenger side or at the rear of
the vehicle on the driver side. At either location, remove
the access cap from the vehicle trim and screw the
hook into position. You may need to use the hook if you
are stuck off-road and need to be pulled to some
place where you can continue driving.
It is very important to know how much weight your
vehicle can carry. This weight is called the vehicle
capacity weight and includes the weight of all occupants,
cargo and all nonfactory-installed options. Two labels
on your vehicle show how much weight it may properly
carry, the Tire and Loading Information label and the
Certification/Tire label.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
The recovery hook, when used, is under a lot
of force. Always pull the vehicle straight out.
Never pull on the hook at a sideways angle.
The hook could break off and you or others
could be injured from the chain or cable
snapping back.
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
GVWR, or either the maximum front or rear
GAWR. If you do, parts on your vehicle can
break, and it can change the way your vehicle
handles. These could cause you to lose
control and crash. Also, overloading can
shorten the life of your vehicle.
Notice: Never use the recovery hook to tow the
vehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged and it would
not be covered by warranty.
4-45
Tire and Loading Information Label
The Tire and Loading Information label also shows the
size of the original equipment tires (C) and the
recommended cold tire inflation pressures (D). For more
information on tires and inflation see Tires on page 5-52
and Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-58.
There is also important loading information on the
vehicle Certification/Tire label. It tells you the Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) and the Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for the front and rear axle.
See “Certification/Tire Label” later in this section.
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed
XXX kg or XXX pounds” on your vehicle’s placard.
Label Example
A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information label is
attached to the center pillar (B-pillar). With the driver’s
door open, you will find the label attached below
the door lock post (striker). The tire and loading
information label shows the number of occupant seating
positions (A), and the maximum vehicle capacity
weight (B) in kilograms and pounds.
4-46
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and
passengers from XXX kilograms or XXX pounds.
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if
the “XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs and there will be
five 150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount
of available cargo and luggage load capacity is
650 lbs (1400 − 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and
cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight
may not safely exceed the available cargo
and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the load from
your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle.
Consult this manual to determine how this reduces
the available cargo and luggage load capacity of
your vehicle.
If your vehicle can tow a trailer, see Towing a
Trailer on page 4-52 for important information
on towing a trailer, towing safety rules, and
trailering tips.
Example 1
Item
Description
Total
A
Vehicle Capacity Weight
for Example 1 =
B
Subtract Occupant Weight 300 lbs (136 kg)
150 lbs (68 kg) × 2 =
C
Available Occupant and
Cargo Weight =
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
700 lbs (317 kg)
4-47
Example 3
Example 2
Item
Description
Total
Item
Description
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
A
Vehicle Capacity Weight
for Example 3 =
Total
A
Vehicle Capacity Weight
for Example 2 =
B
Subtract Occupant Weight 750 lbs (340 kg)
150 lbs (68 kg) × 5 =
B
Subtract Occupant Weight 1,000 lbs (453 kg)
200 lbs (91 kg) × 5 =
C
Available Cargo Weight =
C
Available Cargo Weight =
250 lbs (113 kg)
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
0 lbs (0 kg)
Refer to your vehicle’s Tire and Loading Information
label for specific information about your vehicle’s
capacity weight and seating positions. The combined
weight of the driver, passengers, and cargo should
never exceed your vehicle’s capacity weight.
4-48
Certification/Tire Label
The Certification/Tire label also tells you the maximum
weights for the front and rear axles, called Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). To find out the actual loads
on your front and rear axles, you need to go to a
weigh station and weigh your vehicle. Your dealer can
help you with this. Be sure to spread out your load
equally on both sides of the centerline.
Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle, or the
GAWR for either the front or rear axle.
And, if you do have a heavy load, you should spread
it out.
Similar appearing vehicles may have different GVWRs
and payloads. Please note the Certification/Tire label on
your truck or consult your dealer for additional details.
United States version shown, Canada similar
The Certification/Tire label is found on the driver’s door
edge. This label shows the gross weight capacity of
your vehicle and is called the Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating (GVWR). The GVWR includes the weight of the
vehicle, all occupants, fuel, cargo and trailer tongue
weight, if pulling a trailer.
{CAUTION:
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
GVWR, or either the maximum front or rear
GAWR. If you do, parts on your vehicle can
break, and it can change the way your vehicle
handles. These could cause you to lose
control and crash. Also, overloading can
shorten the life of your vehicle.
4-49
If you put things inside your vehicle — like suitcases,
tools, packages, or anything else — they will go as fast
as the vehicle goes. If you have to stop or turn
quickly, or if there is a crash, they’ll keep going.
{CAUTION:
Things you put inside your vehicle can strike
and injure people in a sudden stop or turn, or
in a crash.
• Put things in the cargo area of your
vehicle. Try to spread the weight evenly.
• Never stack heavier things, like suitcases,
inside the vehicle so that some of them
are above the tops of the seats.
• Do not leave an unsecured child restraint
in your vehicle.
• When you carry something inside the
vehicle, secure it whenever you can.
• Do not leave a seat folded down unless
you need to.
There’s also important loading information for
off-road driving in this manual. See Operating Your
All-Wheel-Drive Vehicle Off Paved Roads on page 4-17.
4-50
Towing
Towing Your Vehicle
Consult your dealer or a professional towing service
if you need to have your disabled vehicle towed.
See Roadside Service on page 7-6.
If you want to tow your vehicle behind another vehicle
for recreational purposes (such as behind a motorhome),
see Recreational Vehicle Towing following.
Recreational Vehicle Towing
Recreational vehicle towing means towing your vehicle
behind another vehicle – such as behind a motorhome.
The two most common types of recreational vehicle
towing are known as “dinghy towing” (towing your vehicle
with all four wheels on the ground) and “dolly towing”
(towing your vehicle with two wheels on the ground and
two wheels up on a device known as a “dolly”).
With the proper preparation and equipment, many
vehicles can be towed in these ways. See “Dinghy
Towing” and “Dolly Towing,” following.
Here are some important things to consider before you
do recreational vehicle towing:
Dolly Towing
• What’s the towing capacity of the towing vehicle?
•
•
•
Be sure you read the tow vehicle manufacturer’s
recommendations.
How far will you tow? Some vehicles have
restrictions on how far and how long they can tow.
Do you have the proper towing equipment?
See your dealer or trailering professional for
additional advice and equipment recommendations.
Is your vehicle ready to be towed? Just as you
would prepare your vehicle for a long trip, you’ll
want to make sure your vehicle is prepared to be
towed. See Before Leaving on a Long Trip on
page 4-37.
Dinghy Towing
Notice: If you tow your vehicle with all four wheels
on the ground, the drivetrain components could
be damaged. The repairs would not be covered by
your warranty. Do not tow your vehicle with all
four wheels on the ground.
Your vehicle was not designed to be towed with all four
wheels on the ground. If your vehicle must be towed,
see “Dolly Towing” following for more information.
If your vehicle is a rear-wheel drive, it can be towed
using a dolly. If you have an All-Wheel-Drive (AWD)
vehicle, it can only be towed on a flat-bed trailer.
To tow your vehicle using a dolly, follow these steps:
1. Put the rear wheels on the dolly.
2. Put the vehicle in PARK (P).
3. Set the parking brake and then remove the key.
4. Clamp the steering wheel in a straight-ahead
position with a clamping device designed for towing.
5. Release the parking brake.
4-51
Level Control
This feature keeps the rear of your vehicle level as the
load changes. It’s automatic — you don’t need to
adjust anything.
Towing a Trailer
{CAUTION:
If you do not use the correct equipment and
drive properly, you can lose control when you
pull a trailer. For example, if the trailer is too
heavy, the brakes may not work well — or even
at all. You and your passengers could be
seriously injured. You may also damage your
vehicle; the resulting repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. Pull a trailer only if
you have followed all the steps in this section.
Ask your dealer for advice and information
about towing a trailer with your vehicle.
4-52
Your vehicle can tow a trailer if it is equipped with the
proper trailer towing equipment. To identify what
the vehicle trailering capacity is for your vehicle, you
should read the information in “Weight of the Trailer” that
appears later in this section. But trailering is different
than just driving your vehicle by itself. Trailering means
changes in handling, acceleration, braking, durability
and fuel economy. Successful, safe trailering takes
correct equipment, and it has to be used properly.
That’s the reason for this part. In it are many time-tested,
important trailering tips and safety rules. Many of
these are important for your safety and that of your
passengers. So please read this section carefully before
you pull a trailer.
Load-pulling components such as the engine,
transmission, rear axle, wheel assemblies and tires are
forced to work harder against the drag of the added
weight. The engine is required to operate at relatively
higher speeds and under greater loads, generating extra
heat. What’s more, the trailer adds considerably to
wind resistance, increasing the pulling requirements.
If You Do Decide to Pull a Trailer
If you do, here are some important points:
• There are many different laws, including speed limit
restrictions, having to do with trailering. Make sure
your rig will be legal, not only where you live
but also where you’ll be driving. A good source for
this information can be state or provincial police.
• Consider using a sway control. You can ask a hitch
dealer about sway controls.
• Don’t tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(805 km) your new vehicle is driven. Your engine,
axle or other parts could be damaged.
• Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that you
Three important considerations have to do with weight:
• the weight of the trailer
• the weight of the trailer tongue
• and the total weight on your vehicle’s tires
Weight of the Trailer
How heavy can a trailer safely be?
It depends on how you plan to use your rig.
For example, speed, altitude, road grades, outside
temperature and how much your vehicle is used to
pull a trailer are all important. And, it can also
depend on any special equipment that you have on
your vehicle.
tow a trailer, don’t drive over 50 mph (80 km/h)
and don’t make starts at full throttle. This helps your
engine and other parts of your vehicle wear in at
the heavier loads.
• Obey speed limit restrictions when towing a trailer.
Don’t drive faster than the maximum posted speed
for trailers, or no more than 55 mph (90 km/h),
to save wear on your vehicle’s parts.
4-53
Look in the following chart to find the maximum trailer weight for your vehicle.
Vehicle
Trailer Package
Maximum Trailer Weight
*GCWR
V6/V8
Base
2,000 lbs (907 kg)
6,853 lbs (3 808 kg)
*The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) is the total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicle
and trailer including any passengers, cargo, equipment and conversions. The GCWR for your vehicle should not
be exceeded.
You can ask your dealer for our trailering information or
advice, or you can write us at:
Cadillac Customer Assistance Center
Cadillac Motor Car Division
P.O. Box 33169
Detroit, MI 48232-5169
4-54
In Canada, write to:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Weight of the Trailer Tongue
The tongue load (A) of any trailer is an important weight
to measure because it affects the total or gross weight
of your vehicle. The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW)
includes the curb weight of the vehicle, any cargo you
may carry in it, and the people who will be riding in
the vehicle. If you have a lot of options, equipment,
passengers or cargo in the vehicle, it will reduce
the tongue weight your vehicle can carry, which will also
reduce the trailer weight your vehicle can tow. And if
you tow a trailer, you must add the tongue load to
the GVW because your vehicle will be carrying that
weight, too. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-45
for more information about your vehicle’s maximum
load capacity.
If you’re using a weight-carrying hitch or a
weight-distributing hitch, the trailer tongue (A) should
weigh 10-15 percent of the total loaded trailer weight (B).
After you’ve loaded your trailer, weigh the trailer and then
the tongue, separately, to see if the weights are proper.
If they aren’t, you may be able to get them right simply by
moving some items around in the trailer.
4-55
Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s Tires
Safety Chains
Be sure your vehicle’s tires are inflated to the upper
limit for cold tires. You’ll find these numbers on
the Certification/Tire label. See Loading Your Vehicle on
page 4-45. Then be sure you don’t go over the GVW
limit for your vehicle, including the weight of the
trailer tongue.
You should always attach chains between your vehicle
and your trailer. Cross the safety chains under the
tongue of the trailer so that the tongue will not drop to
the road if it becomes separated from the hitch.
Instructions about safety chains may be provided by the
hitch manufacturer or by the trailer manufacturer.
Follow the manufacturer’s recommendation for attaching
safety chains and do not attach them to the bumper.
Always leave just enough slack so you can turn
with your rig. And, never allow safety chains to drag on
the ground.
Hitches
It’s important to have the correct hitch equipment.
Crosswinds, large trucks going by and rough roads
are a few reasons why you’ll need the right hitch.
Here are some rules to follow:
• The rear bumper on your vehicle is not intended
for hitches. Do not attach rental hitches or
other bumper-type hitches to it. Use only a
frame-mounted hitch that does not attach to
the bumper.
• Will you have to make any holes in the body of
your vehicle when you install a trailer hitch?
If you do, then be sure to seal the holes later
when you remove the hitch. If you don’t seal them,
deadly carbon monoxide (CO) from your exhaust
can get into your vehicle. See Engine Exhaust
on page 2-33. Dirt and water can, too.
4-56
Trailer Brakes
Because your vehicle has anti-lock brakes, don’t try to
tap into your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system. If you do,
both brake systems won’t work well, or at all. If you
tow more than 1,000 lbs (450 kg), use trailer brakes.
Be sure to read and follow the instructions for the trailer
brakes so you’ll be able to install, adjust and maintain
them properly.
Driving with a Trailer
Passing
Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience.
Before setting out for the open road, you’ll want to get
to know your rig. Acquaint yourself with the feel of
handling and braking with the added weight of the trailer.
And always keep in mind that the vehicle you are
driving is now a good deal longer and not nearly as
responsive as your vehicle is by itself.
You’ll need more passing distance up ahead when
you’re towing a trailer. And, because you’re a good deal
longer, you’ll need to go much farther beyond the
passed vehicle before you can return to your lane.
Before you start, check all trailer hitch parts and
attachments, safety chains, electrical connector, lamps,
tires and mirror adjustment. If the trailer has electric
brakes, start your vehicle and trailer moving and then
apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be sure
the brakes are working. This lets you check your
electrical connection at the same time.
During your trip, check occasionally to be sure that the
load is secure, and that the lamps and any trailer
brakes are still working.
Following Distance
Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as
you would when driving your vehicle without a trailer.
This can help you avoid situations that require
heavy braking and sudden turns.
Backing Up
Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand.
Then, to move the trailer to the left, just move that hand
to the left. To move the trailer to the right, move your
hand to the right. Always back up slowly and, if possible,
have someone guide you.
Making Turns
Notice: Making very sharp turns while trailering
could cause the trailer to come in contact with
the vehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged.
Avoid making very sharp turns while trailering.
When you’re turning with a trailer, make wider turns than
normal. Do this so your trailer won’t strike soft shoulders,
curbs, road signs, trees or other objects. Avoid jerky or
sudden maneuvers. Signal well in advance.
4-57
Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer
When you tow a trailer, your vehicle may need a
different turn signal flasher and/or extra wiring. Check
with your dealer. The arrows on your instrument
panel will flash whenever you signal a turn or lane
change. Properly hooked up, the trailer lamps will also
flash, telling other drivers you’re about to turn,
change lanes or stop.
When towing a trailer, the arrows on your instrument
panel will flash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailer
are burned out. Thus, you may think drivers behind
you are seeing your signal when they are not. It’s
important to check occasionally to be sure the trailer
bulbs are still working.
Driving on Grades
Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before you start
down a long or steep downgrade. If you don’t shift
down, you might have to use your brakes so much that
they would get hot and no longer work well.
On a long uphill grade, shift down and reduce your
speed to around 45 mph (70 km/h) to reduce the
possibility of the engine and the transmission
overheating.
Parking on Hills
{CAUTION:
You really should not park your vehicle, with a
trailer attached, on a hill. If something goes
wrong, your rig could start to move. People
can be injured, and both your vehicle and the
trailer can be damaged.
But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill, here’s
how to do it:
1. Apply your regular brakes, but don’t shift into
PARK (P).
When parking uphill, turn your wheels away from
the curb. When parking downhill, turn your wheels
into the curb.
2. Have someone place chocks behind the trailer
wheels.
3. When the chocks are in place, release the regular
brakes until the chocks absorb the load.
4. Reapply the regular brakes. Then apply your
parking brake and shift into PARK (P).
5. Release the regular brakes.
4-58
When You Are Ready to Leave After
Parking on a Hill
Maintenance When Trailer Towing
2. Let up on the brake pedal.
Your vehicle will need service more often when you’re
pulling a trailer. See Scheduled Maintenance on
page 6-4 for more information. Things that are especially
important in trailer operation are automatic transmission
fluid (don’t overfill), engine oil, axle lubricant, drive
belt, cooling system and brake system. Each of these is
covered in this manual, and the Index will help you
find them quickly. If you’re trailering, it’s a good idea to
review this information before you start your trip.
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of
the chocks.
Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts
are tight.
4. Stop and have someone pick up and store
the chocks.
Engine Cooling When Trailer Towing
1. Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal
down while you:
• start your engine,
• shift into a gear, and
• release the parking brake.
Your cooling system may temporarily overheat during
severe operating conditions. See Engine Overheating
on page 5-27.
4-59
✍ NOTES
4-60
Section 5
Service and Appearance Care
Service ............................................................5-3
Doing Your Own Service Work .........................5-4
Adding Equipment to the Outside of
Your Vehicle ..............................................5-5
Fuel ................................................................5-5
Gasoline Octane ............................................5-5
Gasoline Specifications ....................................5-6
California Fuel ...............................................5-6
Additives .......................................................5-6
Fuels in Foreign Countries ...............................5-7
Filling Your Tank ............................................5-8
Filling a Portable Fuel Container .....................5-10
Checking Things Under the Hood ....................5-10
Hood Release ..............................................5-11
Engine Compartment Overview .......................5-12
Engine Oil ...................................................5-16
Engine Oil Life System ..................................5-20
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter ................................5-22
Automatic Transmission Fluid .........................5-23
Engine Coolant .............................................5-24
Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap ..................5-27
Engine Overheating .......................................5-27
Overheated Engine Protection
Operating Mode ........................................5-29
Cooling System ............................................5-30
Power Steering Fluid .....................................5-35
Windshield Washer Fluid ................................5-36
Brakes ........................................................5-37
Battery ........................................................5-40
Jump Starting ...............................................5-41
All-Wheel Drive ..............................................5-46
Rear Axle .......................................................5-48
Front Axle ......................................................5-49
Bulb Replacement ..........................................5-50
High Intensity Discharge (HID) Lighting ............5-50
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ..............5-50
Tires ..............................................................5-52
Tire Sidewall Labelling ...................................5-53
Tire Terminology and Definitions .....................5-56
Inflation - Tire Pressure .................................5-58
Tire Pressure Monitor System .........................5-61
Tire Inspection and Rotation ...........................5-63
When It Is Time for New Tires .......................5-64
Buying New Tires .........................................5-64
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ..........................5-66
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ..................5-67
Wheel Replacement ......................................5-67
5-1
Section 5
Service and Appearance Care
Tire Chains ..................................................5-68
If a Tire Goes Flat ........................................5-69
Changing a Flat Tire .....................................5-70
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ................5-71
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the
Spare Tire ................................................5-73
Secondary Latch System ...............................5-77
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools ............5-79
Compact Spare Tire ......................................5-82
Appearance Care ............................................5-83
Fabric/Carpet ...............................................5-84
Vinyl ...........................................................5-86
Leather .......................................................5-86
Instrument Panel ..........................................5-86
Interior Plastic Components ............................5-86
Wood Panels ...............................................5-86
Speaker Covers ............................................5-86
Glass Surfaces .............................................5-87
Care of Safety Belts ......................................5-87
Weatherstrips ...............................................5-87
Washing Your Vehicle ...................................5-87
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses .....................5-88
Finish Care ..................................................5-88
5-2
Windshield and Wiper Blades .........................5-88
Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels ................5-89
Tires ...........................................................5-90
Sheet Metal Damage .....................................5-90
Finish Damage .............................................5-90
Underbody Maintenance ................................5-90
Chemical Paint Spotting .................................5-90
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ..................5-91
Vehicle Identification ......................................5-92
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) .................5-92
Service Parts Identification Label .....................5-92
Electrical System ............................................5-92
Add-On Electrical Equipment ..........................5-92
Windshield Wiper Fuses ................................5-93
Power Windows and Other Power Options .......5-93
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ............................5-93
Underhood Fuse Block ..................................5-94
Rear Underseat Fuse Block
(Driver Side) .............................................5-98
Rear Underseat Fuse Block
(Passenger Side) .....................................5-100
Capacities and Specifications ........................5-102
Service
Your dealer knows your vehicle best and wants you to
be happy with it. We hope you will go to your dealer
for all your service needs. You will get genuine GM parts
and GM-trained and supported service people.
We hope you will want to keep your GM vehicle all GM.
Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:
California Proposition 65 Warning
Most motor vehicles, including this one, contain and/or
emit chemicals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive
harm. Engine exhaust, many parts and systems
(including some inside the vehicle), many fluids, and
some component wear by-products contain and/or emit
these chemicals.
5-3
Doing Your Own Service Work
If you want to do some of your own service work, you
will want to use the proper service manual. It tells
you much more about how to service your vehicle than
this manual can. To order the proper service manual,
see Service Publications Ordering Information on
page 7-12.
Your vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting
to do your own service work, see Servicing Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-58.
You should keep a record with all parts receipts and list
the mileage and the date of any service work you
perform. See Maintenance Record on page 6-14.
5-4
{CAUTION:
You can be injured and your vehicle could be
damaged if you try to do service work on a
vehicle without knowing enough about it.
• Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,
experience, the proper replacement parts
and tools before you attempt any vehicle
maintenance task.
• Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts and
other fasteners. English and metric
fasteners can be easily confused. If you
use the wrong fasteners, parts can later
break or fall off. You could be hurt.
Adding Equipment to the Outside
of Your Vehicle
Things you might add to the outside of your vehicle
can affect the airflow around it. This may cause
wind noise and affect windshield washer performance.
Check with your dealer before adding equipment to
the outside of your vehicle.
Fuel
The 8th digit of your vehicle identification number (VIN)
shows the code letter or number that identifies your
engine. You will find the VIN at the top left of the
instrument panel. See Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN) on page 5-92.
Gasoline Octane
If your vehicle has the 3.6L V6 engine, use regular
unleaded gasoline with a posted octane of 87 or higher.
However, for best performance and for trailer towing,
you may wish to use middle grade or premium unleaded
gasoline. If the octane is less than 87, you may get a
heavy knocking noise when you drive. If this occurs,
use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher as soon as
possible. Otherwise, you might damage your engine.
If your vehicle has the 4.6L V8 engine, use premium
unleaded gasoline with a posted octane of 91 or higher
for best performance. You may also use middle
grade or regular unleaded gasoline rated at 87 octane
or higher, but your vehicle’s acceleration may be slightly
reduced. If the octane is less than 87, you may get a
heavy knocking noise when you drive. If this occurs,
use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher as soon as
possible. Otherwise, you might damage your engine.
5-5
Gasoline Specifications
Additives
It is recommended that gasoline meet specifications
which were developed by automobile manufacturers
around the world and contained in the World-Wide
Fuel Charter which is available from the
Alliance of Automobile Manufacturers at
www.autoalliance.org/fuel_charter.htm. Gasoline
meeting these specifications could provide improved
driveability and emission control system performance
compared to other gasoline.
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United States
are now required to contain additives that will help
prevent engine and fuel system deposits from forming,
allowing your emission control system to work
properly. You should not have to add anything to
your fuel. However, some gasolines contain only the
minimum amount of additive required to meet
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency regulations.
General Motors recommends that you buy gasolines that
are advertised to help keep fuel injectors and intake
valves clean. If your vehicle experiences problems due
to dirty injectors or valves, try a different brand of
gasoline.
California Fuel
If your vehicle is certified to meet California Emission
Standards (see the underhood emission control label),
it is designed to operate on fuels that meet California
specifications. If this fuel is not available in states
adopting California emissions standards, your vehicle
will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal
specifications, but emission control system performance
may be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp may
turn on and your vehicle may fail a smog-check test.
See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 3-42.
If this occurs, return to your authorized GM dealer for
diagnosis. If it is determined that the condition is caused
by the type of fuel used, repairs may not be covered by
your warranty.
5-6
Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethers and
ethanol, and reformulated gasolines may be available in
your area to contribute to clean air. General Motors
recommends that you use these gasolines, particularly if
they comply with the specifications described earlier.
Notice: Your vehicle was not designed for fuel that
contains methanol. Do not use fuel containing
methanol. It can corrode metal parts in your fuel
system and also damage the plastic and rubber
parts. That damage would not be covered under
your warranty.
Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low
emissions may contain an octane-enhancing additive
called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl
(MMT); ask the attendant where you buy gasoline
whether the fuel contains MMT. General Motors does
not recommend the use of such gasolines. Fuels
containing MMT can reduce the life of spark plugs and
the performance of the emission control system may
be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp may turn on.
If this occurs, return to your authorized GM dealer
for service.
Fuels in Foreign Countries
If you plan on driving in another country outside the
United States or Canada, the proper fuel may be hard
to find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel
not recommended in the previous text on fuel. Costly
repairs caused by use of improper fuel would not
be covered by your warranty.
To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, or
contact a major oil company that does business in the
country where you will be driving.
5-7
Filling Your Tank
{CAUTION:
Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can
cause bad injuries. To help avoid injuries to you
and others, read and follow all the instructions
on the pump island. Turn off your engine when
you are refueling. Do not smoke if you are near
fuel or refueling your vehicle. Keep sparks,
flames and smoking materials away from fuel.
Do not leave the fuel pump unattended when
refueling your vehicle — this is against the law
in some places. Keep children away from the
fuel pump; never let children pump fuel.
The tethered fuel cap
is located behind a
hinged fuel door on the
passenger’s side of
the vehicle.
To open the fuel door, press on the rear edge of the
fuel door and it will pop open.
To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowly to the left
(counterclockwise). The fuel cap has a spring in it;
if the cap is released too soon, it will spring back to
the right.
While refueling, hang the tethered fuel cap from the
hook on the fuel door.
5-8
{CAUTION:
If you spill fuel and then something ignites it,
you could be badly burned. Fuel can spray out
on you if you open the fuel cap too quickly.
This spray can happen if your tank is nearly
full, and is more likely in hot weather. Open
the fuel cap slowly and wait for any hiss noise
to stop. Then unscrew the cap all the way.
Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not top off or overfill the
tank, and wait a few seconds after you have finished
pumping before removing the nozzle. Clean fuel
from painted surfaces as soon as possible.
See Washing Your Vehicle on page 5-87.
When replacing the fuel cap, turn it to the right
(clockwise) until it clicks. Make sure the cap is fully
installed. The diagnostic system can determine if the
fuel cap has been left off or improperly installed.
This would allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere.
See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 3-42.
The Check Gas Cap message will appear on the Driver
Information Center (DIC) display if the fuel cap is not
reinstalled properly. See DIC Warnings and Messages
on page 3-57 for more information.
{CAUTION:
If a fire starts while you are refueling, do not
remove the nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel by
shutting off the pump or by notifying the
station attendant. Leave the area immediately.
Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure to get
the right type. Your dealer can get one for you.
If you get the wrong type, it may not fit properly.
This may cause your malfunction indicator lamp to
light and may damage your fuel tank and emissions
system. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on
page 3-42.
5-9
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
Checking Things Under
the Hood
{CAUTION:
Never fill a portable fuel container while it is in
your vehicle. Static electricity discharge from
the container can ignite the gasoline vapor.
You can be badly burned and your vehicle
damaged if this occurs. To help avoid injury to
you and others:
• Dispense gasoline only into approved
containers.
• Do not fill a container while it is inside a
vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup bed or
on any surface other than the ground.
• Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the
inside of the fill opening before operating
the nozzle. Contact should be maintained
until the filling is complete.
• Do not smoke while pumping gasoline.
5-10
{CAUTION:
An electric fan under the hood can start up
and injure you even when the engine is not
running. Keep hands, clothing and tools away
from any underhood electric fan.
{CAUTION:
Things that burn can get on hot engine parts
and start a fire. These include liquids like fuel,
oil, coolant, brake fluid, windshield washer and
other fluids, and plastic or rubber. You or
others could be burned. Be careful not to drop
or spill things that will burn onto a hot engine.
Hood Release
To open the hood, do the following:
1. Pull the hood release lever inside the vehicle.
It is located on the lower left side of the
instrument panel.
2. Then go to the front of the vehicle and find the
secondary hood release lever. The lever is
located under the front edge of the grille near the
center. Move the release lever to the side and raise
the hood.
Before closing the hood, be sure all the filler caps are
on properly. Then pull the hood down and close it firmly.
5-11
Engine Compartment Overview
When you open the hood on the 3.6L V6 engine, you will see the following:
5-12
A. Underhood Fuse Block. See Underhood Fuse Block
on page 5-94.
B. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See “Adding
Washer Fluid” under Windshield Washer Fluid
on page 5-36.
C. Battery. See Battery on page 5-40.
D. Passenger Compartment Air Filter. See Passenger
Compartment Air Filter on page 3-32.
E. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir. See Power Steering
Fluid on page 5-35.
F. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine Oil”
under Engine Oil on page 5-16.
G. Engine Oil Dipstick (Out of View). See “Checking
Engine Oil” under Engine Oil on page 5-16.
H. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See “Brake Fluid”
under Brakes on page 5-37.
I. Engine Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap.
See Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap on page 5-27
and Cooling System on page 5-30.
J. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 5-22.
5-13
When you open the hood on the 4.6L V8 engine, you will see the following:
5-14
A. Underhood Fuse Block. See Underhood Fuse Block
on page 5-94.
B. Battery. See Battery on page 5-40.
C. Passenger Compartment Air Filter. See Passenger
Compartment Air Filter on page 3-32.
D. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See “Adding
Washer Fluid” under Windshield Washer Fluid
on page 5-36.
E. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir. See Power Steering
Fluid on page 5-35.
F. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine Oil”
under Engine Oil on page 5-16.
G. Engine Oil Dipstick (Out of View). See “Checking
Engine Oil” under Engine Oil on page 5-16.
H. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See “Brake Fluid”
under Brakes on page 5-37.
I. Engine Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap.
See Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap on page 5-27
and Cooling System on page 5-30.
J. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 5-22.
5-15
Checking Engine Oil
Engine Oil
If the oil pressure light
and/or the Oil Pressure
Low — Stop Engine
message on the DIC
appears on the instrument
cluster, it means you
need to check your engine
oil level right away.
For more information, see “Oil Pressure Low — Stop
Engine” under DIC Warnings and Messages on
page 3-57 and Oil Pressure Light on page 3-45.
It is a good idea to check your engine oil every time you
get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading, the oil
must be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground.
The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12
for the location of the engine oil dipstick.
1. Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutes
to drain back into the oil pan. If you do not do this,
the oil dipstick might not show the actual level.
2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel
or cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it
again, keeping the tip down, and check the level.
You should check your engine oil level regularly; this is
an added reminder.
3.6L V6 Engine
5-16
4.6L V8 Engine
When to Add Engine Oil
If the oil is at or below the cross-hatched area at the
tip of the dipstick, then you will need to add at least
one quart of oil. But you must use the right kind.
This section explains what kind of oil to use.
For engine oil crankcase capacity, see Capacities
and Specifications on page 5-102.
Notice: Do not add too much oil. If your engine has
so much oil that the oil level gets above the
cross-hatched area that shows the proper operating
range, your engine could be damaged.
3.6L V6 Engine
4.6L V8 Engine
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for
the location of the engine oil fill cap.
Be sure to add enough oil to put the level somewhere in
the proper operating range. Push the dipstick all the
way back in when you are through.
5-17
What Kind of Engine Oil to Use
Look for two things:
• GM4718M
Your vehicle’s engine requires a special oil meeting
GM Standard GM4718M. Oils meeting this
standard may be identified as synthetic. However,
not all synthetic oils will meet this GM standard.
You should look for and use only an oil that meets
GM Standard GM4718M.
Notice: If you use oils that do not have the
GM4718M Standard designation, you can cause
engine damage not covered by your warranty.
5-18
• SAE 5W-30
As shown in the viscosity chart, SAE 5W-30 is best
for your vehicle.
These numbers on an oil container show its
viscosity, or thickness. Do not use other viscosity oils
such as SAE 20W-50.
Oils meeting these
requirements should also
have the starburst
symbol on the container.
This symbol indicates
that the oil has been
certified by the American
Petroleum Institute (API).
Your vehicle’s engine is filled at the factory with a
Mobil 1® synthetic oil, which meets all requirements
for your vehicle.
Substitute Engine Oil: When adding oil to maintain
engine oil level, oil meeting GM Standard GM4718M
may not be available. You can add substitute oil
designated SAE 5W-30 with the starburst symbol
at all temperatures. If temperatures are above
0°F (–18°C), you may substitute SAE 10W-30 with
the starburst symbol. Substitute oil not meeting
GM Standard GM4718M should not be used for
an oil change.
Engine Oil Additives
Do not add anything to your oil. The recommended oils
with the starburst symbol that meet GM Standard
GM4718M are all you will need for good performance
and engine protection.
You should look for this on the oil container, and use
only those oils that are identified as meeting GM
Standard GM4718M and have the starburst symbol on
the front of the oil container.
5-19
Engine Oil Life System
When to Change Engine Oil
Your vehicle has a computer system that lets you know
when to change the engine oil and filter. This is
based on engine revolutions and engine temperature,
and not on mileage. Based on driving conditions,
the mileage at which an oil change will be indicated can
vary considerably. For the oil life system to work
properly, you must reset the system every time the
oil is changed.
When the system has calculated that oil life has been
diminished, it will indicate that an oil change is
necessary. A Change Engine Oil message in the DIC
will come on. Change your oil as soon as possible within
the next 600 miles (1 000 km). It is possible that,
if you are driving under the best conditions, the oil life
system may not indicate that an oil change is necessary
for over a year. However, your engine oil and filter
must be changed at least once a year and at this time
the system must be reset. Your dealer has GM-trained
service people who will perform this work using
genuine GM parts and reset the system. It is also
important to check your oil regularly and keep it at the
proper level.
5-20
If the system is ever reset accidentally, you must
change your oil at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) since your
last oil change. Remember to reset the oil life system
whenever the oil is changed.
After the oil has been changed, the Change Engine Oil
message and the oil life indicator must be reset.
To reset the message and indicator, use one of the
following procedures:
How to Reset the Engine Oil Life
System and the Oil Life Indicator
The Engine Oil Life System calculates when to change
your engine oil and filter based on vehicle use.
Anytime your oil is changed, reset the system so it can
calculate when the next oil change is required. If a
situation occurs where you change your oil prior to a
Change Engine Oil Message in the DIC being turned on,
reset the system.
Base Audio System
What to Do with Used Oil
Press the CLR button located to the right of the DIC
display to acknowledge the Change Engine Oil
message. This will clear the message from the display
and reset it.
Used engine oil contains certain elements that may be
unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer.
Do not let used oil stay on your skin for very long.
Clean your skin and nails with soap and water, or a
good hand cleaner. Wash or properly dispose of
clothing or rags containing used engine oil. See the
manufacturer’s warnings about the use and disposal
of oil products.
To reset the oil life indicator, use the following steps:
1. Press the up or down arrow on the INFO button
located to the right of the DIC display to access
the DIC menu.
2. Once XXX% ENGINE OIL LIFE menu item is
highlighted, press and hold the CLR button.
The percentage will return to 100, and the oil life
indicator will be reset.
3. Turn the key to OFF.
If the Change Engine Oil message comes back on
when you start your vehicle or the percentage does not
return to 100, the engine oil life system has not reset.
Repeat the procedure.
Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If you
change your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil from the
filter before disposal. Never dispose of oil by putting it
in the trash, pouring it on the ground, into sewers,
or into streams or bodies of water. Instead, recycle it by
taking it to a place that collects used oil. If you have
a problem properly disposing of your used oil, ask your
dealer, a service station or a local recycling center
for help.
Navigation System
If you have the navigation system, see “Vehicle
Customization” in the SRX Navigation System Owner
Supplement for how to reset the oil life indicator.
5-21
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
When to Inspect the Engine
Air Cleaner/Filter
Inspect the air cleaner/filter at every oil change and
replace it at the first oil change after 25,000 miles
(40 000 km).
How to Inspect the Engine
Air Cleaner/Filter
To inspect the air cleaner/filter remove the filter from the
vehicle and lightly shake the filter to release loose
dust and dirt. If the filter remains caked with dirt, a new
filter is required.
To inspect or replace the filter, do the following:
4.6L V8 shown, 3.6L V6 similar
The engine air cleaner/filter is in the engine
compartment on the driver’s side of the vehicle, near
the front. See Engine Compartment Overview on
page 5-12 for more information on location.
1. Remove the two screws located on the top of the
cover.
2. Disconnect the coolant recovery hose so that it is
not going across the top of the engine air
cleaner/filter.
3. Loosen the clamp and remove the duct from the
passenger’s side of the engine air cleaner/filter.
4. The two sides of the airbox are hinged at the
bottom. Open the airbox by pushing the top of
the airbox cover toward the engine.
5-22
5. Remove the air filter by lifting it straight up through
the opening in the airbox.
6. Inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter.
See Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts
on page 6-13 for the correct part number for
the filter.
7. Reinstall the cover by reversing Steps 1 through 4.
{CAUTION:
Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filter
off can cause you or others to be burned.
The air cleaner not only cleans the air; it helps
to stop flame if the engine backfires. If it is
not there and the engine backfires, you could
be burned. Do not drive with it off, and be
careful working on the engine with the air
cleaner/filter off.
Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfire can
cause a damaging engine fire. And, dirt can
easily get into your engine, which will damage it.
Always have the air cleaner/filter in place when you
are driving.
Automatic Transmission Fluid
It is not necessary to check the transmission fluid level.
A transmission fluid leak is the only reason for fluid
loss. If a leak occurs, take your vehicle to the dealership
service department and have it repaired as soon as
possible. You may also have your fluid level checked
by your dealer or service center when you have your
oil changed.
Change both the fluid and filter every 50,000 miles
(83 000 km) if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or
more of these conditions:
• In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature
regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or higher.
• In hilly or mountainous terrain.
• When doing frequent trailer towing.
• Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery
service.
If you do not use your vehicle under any of these
conditions, the fluid and filter do not require changing.
Notice: Use of automatic transmission fluid
labeled other than DEXRON®-III, Approved for the
H-Specification, may damage your vehicle, and
the damages may not be covered by your warranty.
Always use automatic transmission fluid labeled
DEXRON®-III, Approved for the H-Specification.
5-23
How to Reset the Change Transmission
Fluid Message and the Transmission
Fluid Indicator
After the transmission fluid has been changed, the
Change Trans Fluid message and the transmission fluid
life indicator must be reset. To reset the message
and indicator, use one of the following procedures:
Base Audio System
Press the CLR button located to the right of the DIC
display to acknowledge the CHANGE TRANS FLUID
message. This will clear the message from the display
and reset it.
To reset the transmission fluid life indicator, use the
following steps:
1. Press the up or down arrow on the INFO button
located to the right of the DIC display to access
the DIC menu.
2. Once the XXX% TRANS FLUID LIFE menu item is
highlighted, press and hold the CLR button.
The percentage will return to 100, and the
transmission fluid life indicator will be reset.
3. Repeat the steps if the percentage does not return
to 100.
Navigation System
If your vehicle has a navigation system, see your
navigation system supplement for instructions on how to
reset the transmission fluid life indicator.
5-24
Engine Coolant
The cooling system in your vehicle is filled with
DEX-COOL® engine coolant. This coolant is designed
to remain in your vehicle for 5 years or 150,000 miles
(240 000 km), whichever occurs first, if you add
only DEX-COOL® extended life coolant.
The following explains your cooling system and how to
add coolant when it is low. If you have a problem
with engine overheating, see Engine Overheating on
page 5-27.
A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and
DEX-COOL® coolant will:
• Give freezing protection down to −34°F (−37°C).
• Give boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C).
• Protect against rust and corrosion.
• Help keep the proper engine temperature.
• Let the warning lights and gages work as
they should.
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL® may
cause premature engine, heater core or radiator
corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant may
require changing sooner, at 30,000 miles (50 000 km)
or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs
would not be covered by your warranty. Always use
DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in your vehicle.
What to Use
Use a mixture of one-half clean, drinkable water and
one-half DEX-COOL® coolant which will not damage
aluminum parts. If you use this coolant mixture, you do
not need to add anything else.
{CAUTION:
Adding only plain water to your cooling
system can be dangerous. Plain water, or
some other liquid such as alcohol, can boil
before the proper coolant mixture will. Your
vehicle’s coolant warning system is set for the
proper coolant mixture. With plain water or the
wrong mixture, your engine could get too hot
but you would not get the overheat warning.
Your engine could catch fire and you or others
could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.
Notice: If you use an improper coolant mixture,
your engine could overheat and be badly damaged.
The repair cost would not be covered by your
warranty. Too much water in the mixture can freeze
and crack the engine, radiator, heater core and
other parts.
If you have to add coolant more than once or twice a
year, have your dealer check your cooling system.
Notice: If you use the proper coolant, you do not
have to add extra inhibitors or additives which claim
to improve the system. These can be harmful.
5-25
Checking Coolant
{CAUTION:
Turning the surge tank pressure cap when the
engine and radiator are hot can allow steam
and scalding liquids to blow out and burn you
badly. Never turn the surge tank pressure
cap — even a little — when the engine and
radiator are hot.
The coolant surge tank and pressure cap are located on
the driver’s side of the vehicle, toward the rear of the
engine compartment. See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 5-12 for more information on location.
5-26
The vehicle must be on a level surface. When your
engine is cold, the coolant level should be at the
FULL COLD/FROID line on the side of the surge tank.
Follow the arrow from the top of the tank down the
side to the horizontal mark.
If the Check Coolant Level message in the Driver
Information Center (DIC) comes on and stays on,
it means you are low on engine coolant. See DIC
Warnings and Messages on page 3-57 for more
information.
Adding Coolant
If you need more coolant, add the proper DEX-COOL®
coolant mixture at the surge tank, but only when the
engine is cool.
Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap
Notice: If the surge tank pressure cap is not tightly
installed, coolant loss and possible engine damage
may occur. Be sure the cap is properly and
tightly secured.
{CAUTION:
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12
for more information on location.
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol,
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.
Engine Overheating
When replacing the pressure cap, make sure it is
hand-tight.
There are three engine hot messages that may be
displayed in the Driver Information Center (DIC).
See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-57
for more information.
5-27
If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine
{CAUTION:
Steam from an overheated engine can burn
you badly, even if you just open the hood.
Stay away from the engine if you see or hear
steam coming from it. Just turn it off and get
everyone away from the vehicle until it cools
down. Wait until there is no sign of steam or
coolant before you open the hood.
If you keep driving when your engine is
overheated, the liquids in it can catch fire.
You or others could be badly burned. Stop
your engine if it overheats, and get out of the
vehicle until the engine is cool.
See Overheated Engine Protection Operating
Mode on page 5-29 for information on driving
to a safe place in an emergency.
5-28
Notice: If your engine catches fire because you
keep driving with no coolant, your vehicle can
be badly damaged. The costly repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. See Overheated Engine
Protection Operating Mode on page 5-29 for
information on driving to a safe place in an
emergency.
If No Steam Is Coming From
Your Engine
An overheat warning, along with a Check Coolant Level
message, can indicate a serious problem.
If you get an engine overheat warning with no Check
Coolant Level message, but see or hear no steam,
the problem may not be too serious. Sometimes
the engine can get a little too hot when you:
•
•
•
•
Climb a long hill on a hot day.
Stop after high-speed driving.
Idle for long periods in traffic.
Tow a trailer.
If you get the overheat warning with no sign of steam,
try this for a minute or so:
1. In heavy traffic, let the engine idle in NEUTRAL (N)
while stopped. If it is safe to do so, pull off the road,
shift to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) and let the
engine idle.
2. Set the climate controls to the highest heat setting
and fan speed and open the windows, as necessary.
If you no longer have the overheat warning, you can
drive. Just to be safe, drive slower for about 10 minutes.
If the warning does not come back on, you can drive
normally.
If the warning continues and you have not stopped,
pull over, stop, and park your vehicle right away.
If there is still no sign of steam, you can idle the engine
for three minutes while you are parked. If you still
have the warning, turn off the engine and get everyone
out of the vehicle until it cools down.
Overheated Engine Protection
Operating Mode
This operating mode allows your vehicle to be driven to
a safe place in an emergency. Should an overheated
engine condition exist, an overheat protection mode
which alternates firing groups of cylinders helps prevent
engine damage. In this mode, you will notice a loss
in power and engine performance. A low coolant and/or
engine overheat warning will indicate that an overheat
condition exists. Driving extended miles (km) and/or
towing a trailer in the overheat protection mode should
be avoided.
Notice: After driving in the overheated engine
protection operating mode, to avoid engine damage,
allow the engine to cool before attempting any
repair. The engine oil will be severely degraded.
Repair the cause of coolant loss and change the oil.
See Engine Oil on page 5-16.
You may decide not to lift the hood but to get service
help right away.
5-29
Cooling System
When you decide it is safe to lift the hood, here is what
you will see:
{CAUTION:
An electric engine cooling fan under the hood
can start up even when the engine is not
running and can injure you. Keep hands,
clothing and tools away from any underhood
electric fan.
If the coolant inside the coolant surge tank is boiling,
do not do anything else until it cools down. The vehicle
should be parked on a level surface.
3.6L V6 shown, 4.6L V8 similar
A. Electric Engine Cooling Fans
B. Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap
Some vehicles may be equipped with an engine driven
fan, as well as the electric pusher fans (A) which
are located behind the vehicle’s grille.
5-30
When the engine is cold, the coolant level should be at
or slightly above the FULL COLD/FROID line on the
side of the coolant surge tank. If it is not, you may have
a leak at the pressure cap or in the radiator hoses,
heater hoses, radiator, water pump or somewhere else
in the cooling system.
{CAUTION:
Heater and radiator hoses, and other engine
parts, can be very hot. Do not touch them.
If you do, you can be burned.
Do not run the engine if there is a leak. If you
run the engine, it could lose all coolant.
That could cause an engine fire, and you could
be burned. Get any leak fixed before you drive
the vehicle.
Notice: Engine damage from running your engine
without coolant is not covered by your warranty.
See Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode
on page 5-29 for information on driving to a safe
place in an emergency.
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL® may
cause premature engine, heater core or radiator
corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant may
require changing sooner, at 30,000 miles (50 000 km)
or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs
would not be covered by your warranty. Always use
DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in your vehicle.
If there seems to be no leak, with the engine on, check
to see if the electric engine cooling fans are running.
If the engine is overheating, both fans should be
running. If they are not, your vehicle needs service.
5-31
How to Add Coolant to the Coolant
Surge Tank
If you have not found a problem yet, check to see if
coolant is visible in the surge tank. If coolant is visible
but the coolant level is not at the FULL COLD/FROID
line on the side of the coolant surge tank, add a
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL®
coolant at the coolant surge tank, but be sure the
cooling system, including the coolant surge tank
pressure cap, is cool before you do it. See Engine
Coolant on page 5-24 for more information.
{CAUTION:
Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling
system can blow out and burn you badly. They
are under pressure, and if you turn the coolant
surge tank pressure cap — even a little — they
can come out at high speed. Never turn the
cap when the cooling system, including the
coolant surge tank pressure cap, is hot.
Wait for the cooling system and coolant surge
tank pressure cap to cool if you ever have to
turn the pressure cap.
5-32
{CAUTION:
Adding only plain water to your cooling
system can be dangerous. Plain water, or
some other liquid such as alcohol, can boil
before the proper coolant mixture will. Your
vehicle’s coolant warning system is set for the
proper coolant mixture. With plain water or the
wrong mixture, your engine could get too hot
but you would not get the overheat warning.
Your engine could catch fire and you or others
could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.
Notice: In cold weather, water can freeze and crack
the engine, radiator, heater core and other parts.
Use the recommended coolant and the proper
coolant mixture.
{CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.
If no coolant is visible in the surge tank, add coolant
as follows:
1. You can remove the coolant surge tank pressure
cap when the cooling system, including the coolant
surge tank pressure cap and upper radiator hose,
is no longer hot. Turn the pressure cap slowly
counterclockwise (left) about one-quarter turn and
then stop.
If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. A hiss
means there is still some pressure left.
2. Then keep turning the pressure cap slowly, and
remove it.
5-33
4. With the coolant surge tank pressure cap off, start
the engine and let it run until you can feel the upper
radiator hose getting hot. The upper radiator hose
is the largest of the hoses which comes out of
the radiator, on the passenger’s side of the vehicle.
Watch out for the engine cooling fans.
By this time, the coolant level inside the coolant
surge tank may be lower. If the level is lower, add
more of the proper mixture to the coolant surge tank
until the level reaches the FULL COLD/FROID
line on the side of the coolant surge tank.
5. Then replace the pressure cap. Be sure the
pressure cap is hand-tight and fully seated.
3. Fill the coolant surge tank with the proper mixture,
to slightly above the FULL COLD/FROID line on the
side of the coolant surge tank.
5-34
Start the engine and allow it to warm up. If the Check
Coolant Level message does not appear on the
Driver Information Center, the coolant is at the proper fill
level. If a Check Coolant Level message does appear,
repeat Steps 1 to 3 then reinstall the pressure cap,
or see your GM dealer.
Power Steering Fluid
The power steering fluid
reservoir is located in the
center of the engine
compartment, toward the
front of the vehicle.
See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 5-12
for more information
on location.
When to Check Power Steering Fluid
It is not necessary to regularly check power steering fluid
unless you suspect there is a leak in the system or
you hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss in this system
could indicate a problem. Have the system inspected
and repaired.
How to Check Power Steering Fluid
To check the power steering fluid, do the following:
1. Turn the key off and let the engine compartment
cool down.
2. Wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean.
3. Unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with a
clean rag.
4. Replace the cap and completely tighten it.
5. Remove the cap again and look at the fluid level
on the dipstick.
The level should be within the HOT mark.
If necessary, add only enough fluid to bring the
level within the mark.
What to Use
To determine what kind of fluid to use, see
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-11.
Always use the proper fluid. Failure to use the proper
fluid can cause leaks and damage hoses and seals.
5-35
Windshield Washer Fluid
• When using concentrated washer fluid,
What to Use
When you need windshield washer fluid, be sure to read
the manufacturer’s instructions before use. If you will
be operating your vehicle in an area where the
temperature may fall below freezing, use a fluid that has
sufficient protection against freezing.
Adding Washer Fluid
The Check Washer Fluid message will appear on the
Driver Information Center (DIC) when the fluid level
is low. See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-57
for more information.
Open the cap with the
washer symbol on it.
Add washer fluid until the
tank is full. See Engine
Compartment Overview
on page 5-12 for
reservoir location.
5-36
Notice:
follow the manufacturer’s instructions for
adding water.
• Do not mix water with ready-to-use washer fluid.
Water can cause the solution to freeze and
damage your washer fluid tank and other parts
of the washer system. Also, water does not
clean as well as washer fluid.
• Fill your washer fluid tank only three-quarters
full when it is very cold. This allows for
expansion if freezing occurs, which could
damage the tank if it is completely full.
• Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) in your
windshield washer. It can damage your washer
system and paint.
Brakes
Brake Fluid
Your brake master cylinder
reservoir is filled with
DOT-3 brake fluid.
See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 5-12
for the location of
the reservoir.
There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in
the reservoir might go down. The first is that the
brake fluid goes down to an acceptable level during
normal brake lining wear. When new linings are put in,
the fluid level goes back up. The other reason is
that fluid is leaking out of the brake system. If it is, you
should have your brake system fixed, since a leak
means that sooner or later your brakes will not work
well, or will not work at all.
So, it is not a good idea to top off your brake fluid.
Adding brake fluid will not correct a leak. If you add fluid
when your linings are worn, then you will have too
much fluid when you get new brake linings. You should
add or remove brake fluid, as necessary, only when
work is done on the brake hydraulic system.
{CAUTION:
If you have too much brake fluid, it can spill on
the engine. The fluid will burn if the engine is
hot enough. You or others could be burned,
and your vehicle could be damaged. Add brake
fluid only when work is done on the brake
hydraulic system. See “Checking Brake Fluid”
in this section.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine when
to check your brake fluid. See Scheduled Maintenance
on page 6-4.
5-37
Checking Brake Fluid
You can check the brake fluid without taking off the cap.
Just look at the brake fluid
reservoir. The fluid level
should be above MIN.
If it is not, have your brake
system checked to see
if there is a leak.
Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the area
around the cap before removing it. This will help
keep dirt from entering the reservoir.
{CAUTION:
With the wrong kind of fluid in your brake
system, your brakes may not work well, or they
may not even work at all. This could cause a
crash. Always use the proper brake fluid.
Notice:
• Using the wrong fluid can badly damage brake
After work is done on the brake hydraulic system,
make sure the level is above the MIN but not over the
MAX mark.
What to Add
When you do need brake fluid, use only DOT-3 brake
fluid. Use new brake fluid from a sealed container only.
See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-11.
5-38
system parts. For example, just a few drops of
mineral-based oil, such as engine oil, in your
brake system can damage brake system parts so
badly that they will have to be replaced. Do not
let someone put in the wrong kind of fluid.
• If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’s painted
surfaces, the paint finish can be damaged.
Be careful not to spill brake fluid on your
vehicle. If you do, wash it off immediately.
See Appearance Care on page 5-83.
Brake Wear
Your vehicle has four-wheel disc brakes.
Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators that make a
high-pitched warning sound when the brake pads are
worn and new pads are needed. The sound may come
and go or be heard all the time your vehicle is moving,
except when you are pushing on the brake pedal firmly.
Brake linings should always be replaced as complete
axle sets.
Brake Pedal Travel
See your dealer if the brake pedal does not return to
normal height, or if there is a rapid increase in
pedal travel. This could be a sign of brake trouble.
Brake Adjustment
{CAUTION:
Every time you make a brake stop, your disc brakes
adjust for wear.
The brake wear warning sound means that soon
your brakes will not work well. That could lead
to an accident. When you hear the brake wear
warning sound, have your vehicle serviced.
Replacing Brake System Parts
Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-out brake
pads could result in costly brake repair.
Some driving conditions or climates may cause a brake
squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly applied.
This does not mean something is wrong with your brakes.
Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help
prevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated, inspect
brake pads for wear and evenly tighten wheel nuts in
the proper sequence to GM torque specifications.
The braking system on a vehicle is complex. Its many
parts have to be of top quality and work well together if
the vehicle is to have really good braking. Your vehicle
was designed and tested with top-quality GM brake
parts. When you replace parts of your braking
system —for example, when your brake linings wear
down and you need new ones put in — be sure you get
new approved GM replacement parts. If you do not,
your brakes may no longer work properly. For example,
if someone puts in brake linings that are wrong for
your vehicle, the balance between your front and rear
brakes can change — for the worse. The braking
performance you have come to expect can change in
many other ways if someone puts in the wrong
replacement brake parts.
5-39
Battery
Vehicle Storage
Your vehicle has a maintenance free battery.
When it is time for a new battery, get one that has the
replacement number shown on the original battery’s
label. We recommend an ACDelco® replacement
battery. See Engine Compartment Overview on
page 5-12 for battery location.
If you are not going to drive your vehicle for 25 days
or more, remove the black, negative (−) cable from
the battery. This will help keep your battery from
running down.
Warning: Battery posts, terminals and related
accessories contain lead and lead compounds,
chemicals known to the State of California to cause
cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands after
handling.
{CAUTION:
Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas
that can explode. You can be badly hurt if you
are not careful. See Jump Starting on
page 5-41 for tips on working around a battery
without getting hurt.
Also, for your audio system, see Theft-Deterrent
Feature on page 3-111.
5-40
Jump Starting
If your battery has run down, you may want to use
another vehicle and some jumper cables to start your
vehicle. Be sure to use the following steps to do it safely.
{CAUTION:
Batteries can hurt you. They can be dangerous
because:
• They contain acid that can burn you.
• They contain gas that can explode or ignite.
• They contain enough electricity to burn you.
If you do not follow these steps exactly, some or
all of these things can hurt you.
Notice: Ignoring these steps could result in costly
damage to your vehicle that would not be covered
by your warranty.
Trying to start your vehicle by pushing or pulling it
will not work, and it could damage your vehicle.
1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt
battery with a negative ground system.
Notice: If the other vehicle’s system is not a 12-volt
system with a negative ground, both vehicles can
be damaged. Only use vehicles with 12-volt systems
with negative grounds to jump start your vehicle.
2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables
can reach, but be sure the vehicles are not touching
each other. If they are, it could cause a ground
connection you do not want. You would not be able
to start your vehicle and the bad grounding could
damage the electrical systems.
To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling, set
the parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved
in the jump start procedure. Put an automatic
transmission in PARK (P) or a manual transmission
in NEUTRAL before setting the parking brake.
Notice: If you leave your radio or other accessories
on during the jump starting procedure, they could
be damaged. The repairs would not be covered
by your warranty. Always turn off your radio and
other accessories when jump starting your vehicle.
3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplug
unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette
lighter or the accessory power outlets. Turn off
the radio and all lamps that are not needed.
This will avoid sparks and help save both batteries.
And it could save the radio!
5-41
4. Open the hoods and locate the positive (+) and
negative (−) terminal locations of the other vehicle,
as well as the positive (+) terminal location on
your vehicle’s battery. See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 5-12 for more information on the
location of the battery.
5-42
Your vehicle has a remote negative (−) ground
location, as shown in the illustration. It is located
between the battery and the underhood fuse block.
You should always use this remote ground
location, instead of the terminal on the battery.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
An electric fan can start up even when the
engine is not running and can injure you.
Keep hands, clothing and tools away from any
underhood electric fan.
Using a match near a battery can cause battery
gas to explode. People have been hurt doing
this, and some have been blinded. Use a
flashlight if you need more light.
Be sure the battery has enough water. You do
not need to add water to the battery installed
in your new vehicle. But if a battery has filler
caps, be sure the right amount of fluid is there.
If it is low, add water to take care of that first.
If you do not, explosive gas could be present.
Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you.
Do not get it on you. If you accidentally get it
in your eyes or on your skin, flush the place
with water and get medical help immediately.
5-43
{CAUTION:
Fans or other moving engine parts can injure
you badly. Keep your hands away from moving
parts once the engine is running.
5. Check that the jumper cables do not have loose or
missing insulation. If they do, you could get a
shock. The vehicles could be damaged too.
Before you connect the cables, here are some
basic things you should know. Positive (+) will go to
positive (+) or to a remote positive (+) terminal if
the vehicle has one. Negative (−) will go to a heavy,
unpainted metal engine part or to a remote
negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.
Do not connect positive (+) to negative (−) or you
will get a short that would damage the battery
and maybe other parts too. And do not connect the
negative (−) cable to the negative (−) terminal on
the dead battery because this can cause sparks.
5-44
6. Connect the red positive (+) cable to the positive (+)
terminal of the dead battery. Use a remote
positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.
7. Do not let the other end touch metal. Connect it to
the positive (+) terminal of the good battery. Use a
remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.
8. Now connect the black negative (−) cable to the
negative terminal of the good battery. Use a
remote negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.
Do not let the other end touch anything until the
next step. The other end of the negative (−) cable
does not go to the dead battery. It goes to a
heavy, unpainted metal engine part or to a remote
negative (−) terminal on the vehicle with the
dead battery.
9. Connect the other end of the negative (−) cable at
least 18 inches (45 cm) away from the dead battery,
but not near engine parts that move. The electrical
connection is just as good there, and the chance
of sparks getting back to the battery is much less.
Use a remote negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has
one. Your vehicle’s remote negative (−) ground
location is for this purpose.
10. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run
the engine for a while.
11. Try to start the vehicle that had the dead battery.
If it will not start after a few tries, it probably needs
service.
5-45
Notice: If the jumper cables are removed in the
wrong order, electrical shorting may occur and
damage the vehicle. The repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. Remove the jumper
cables in the correct order, making sure that the
cables do not touch each other or other metal.
To disconnect the jumper cables from both vehicles,
do the following:
1. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
vehicle that had the dead battery.
2. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
other vehicle.
All-Wheel Drive
All of the lubricant checks in this section apply to your
vehicle. If you have an all-wheel-drive vehicle, there
is an additional system that need lubrication.
Jumper Cable Removal
A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part or Remote
Negative (−) Terminal
B. Good Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal
C. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal
5-46
Transfer Case
When to Check Lubricant
It is not necessary to regularly check the transfer case
fluid unless you suspect there is a leak or you hear
an unusual noise. A fluid loss could indicate a problem.
Have it inspected and repaired.
How to Check Lubricant
A. Drain Plug
If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole,
located on the transfer case, you’ll need to add
some lubricant. Add enough lubricant to raise the level
to the bottom of the filler plug hole. Use care not to
overtighten the plug.
What to Use
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of lubricant to use. See Recommended Fluids
and Lubricants on page 6-11.
B. Fill Plug
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a
level surface.
5-47
Rear Axle
When to Check Lubricant
It is not necessary to regularly check rear axle fluid
unless you suspect there is a leak or you hear an
unusual noise. A fluid loss could indicate a problem.
Have it inspected and repaired.
How to Check Lubricant
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a
level surface.
5-48
If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole,
located on the rear axle, you’ll need to add some
lubricant. Add enough lubricant to raise the level to the
bottom of the filler plug hole.
What to Use
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of lubricant to use. See Recommended Fluids
and Lubricants on page 6-11.
Front Axle
When to Check and Change Lubricant
It is not necessary to regularly check the front axle fluid
unless you suspect there is a leak or you hear an
unusual noise. A fluid loss could indicate a problem.
Have it inspected and repaired.
If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole,
located on the front axle, you may need to add
some lubricant.
What to Use
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of lubricant to use. See Recommended Fluids
and Lubricants on page 6-11.
How to Check Lubricant
A. Drain Plug
B. Filler Plug
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a
level surface.
5-49
Bulb Replacement
It is recommended that all bulbs be replaced by
your dealer.
High Intensity Discharge (HID)
Lighting
{CAUTION:
The low beam high intensity discharge lighting
system operates at a very high voltage. If you
try to service any of the system components,
you could be seriously injured. Have your
dealer or a qualified technician service them.
Your vehicle may have HID headlamps. After your
vehicle’s HID headlamp bulb has been replaced,
you may notice that the beam is a slightly different
shade than it was originally. This is normal.
5-50
Windshield Wiper Blade
Replacement
Windshield wiper blades should be inspected at least
twice a year for wear or cracking. See Owner Checks
and Services on page 6-8.
It’s a good idea to clean or replace the wiper blade
assembly on a regular basis or when worn. For proper
windshield wiper blade length and type, see Normal
Maintenance Replacement Parts on page 6-13.
To replace the wiper blade assembly, do the following:
1. Turn the ignition to ON with the engine off.
2. Turn on the windshield wipers and turn them off
again when the wipers are in the out-wipe position.
The driver’s side blade will be straight up and
down on the windshield.
3. Pull the windshield wiper assembly away from the
windshield.
4. Lift the wiper blade assembly up so it is in a
T-shaped position. You should be able to see a tab.
Notice: Allowing the wiper blade arm to touch the
windshield when no wiper blade is installed
could damage the windshield. Any damage that
occurs would not be covered by your warranty.
Do not allow the wiper blade arm to touch the
windshield.
7. Reinstall the wiper blade assembly by sliding it over
the wiper arm to engage the J-hooked end. Pull up
on the assembly to lock it into place.
8. Repeat the steps for the other wiper.
5. Squeeze the tab together and pull the wiper blade
assembly down far enough to release it from the
J-hooked end of the wiper arm. Slide the assembly
away from the arm.
6. Replace the blade with a new one.
5-51
Tires
CAUTION:
Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires made by
a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever have questions
about your tire warranty and where to obtain service,
see your GM Warranty booklet for details. For additional
information refer to the tire manufacturer’s booklet
included with your vehicle’s Owner’s Manual.
• Poorly maintained and improperly used
tires are dangerous.
• Overloading your tires can cause
overheating as a result of too much
friction. You could have an air-out and a
serious accident. See Loading Your
Vehicle on page 4-45.
CAUTION:
5-52
• Underinflated tires pose the same danger
•
{CAUTION:
(Continued)
(Continued)
•
as overloaded tires. The resulting accident
could cause serious injury. Check all tires
frequently to maintain the recommended
pressure. Tire pressure should be checked
when your tires are cold.
Overinflated tires are more likely to be
cut, punctured or broken by a sudden
impact — such as when you hit a pothole.
Keep tires at the recommended pressure.
Worn, old tires can cause accidents.
If your tread is badly worn, or if your tires
have been damaged, replace them.
See Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-58, for
inflation pressure adjustment for high speed
driving.
Winter Tires
Tire Sidewall Labelling
If you expect to drive on snow or ice covered roads
often, you may want to get winter tires for your vehicle.
All season tires provide good overall performance on
most surfaces but they may not offer the traction
you would like or the same level of performance as
winter tires on snow or ice covered roads.
Useful information about a tire is molded into its
sidewall. The examples below show a typical passenger
vehicle tire and a compact spare tire sidewall.
See your dealer for details regarding winter tire
availability and proper tire selection. Also, see Buying
New Tires on page 5-64
If you choose to use winter tires:
• Use tires of the same brand and tread type on all
four wheel positions.
• Use only radial ply tires of the same size, load
range, and speed rating as the original equipment
tires.
Winter tires with the same speed rating as your original
equipment tires may not be available for H, V, W
and ZR speed rated tires. If you choose winter tires with
a lower speed rating, never exceed the tire’s maximum
speed capability.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire Example
(A) Tire Size: The tire size is a combination of letters
and numbers used to define a particular tire’s width,
height, aspect ratio, construction type and service
description. See the “Tire Size” illustration later in this
section for more detail.
5-53
(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
Specification): Original equipment tires designed
to GM’s specific tire performance criteria have a
TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.
GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed all federal
safety guidelines.
(C) DOT (Department of Transportation): The
Department of Transportation (DOT) code indicates that
the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of
Transportation Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.
(D) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters and
numbers following DOT (Department of Transportation)
code is the Tire Identification Number (TIN). The TIN
shows the manufacturer and plant code, tire size,
and date the tire was manufactured. The TIN is molded
onto both sides of the tire, although only one side
may have the date of manufacture.
(E) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and number of
plies in the sidewall and under the tread.
(F) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG): Tire
manufacturers are required to grade tires based on
three performance factors: treadwear, traction and
temperature resistance. For more information see
Uniform Tire Quality Grading on page 5-66.
(G) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit: Maximum
load that can be carried and the maximum pressure
needed to support that load.
5-54
Compact Spare Tire Example
(A) Temporary Use Only: The compact spare tire or
temporary use tire has a tread life of approximately
3,000 miles (5 000 km) and should not be driven
at speeds over 65 mph (105 km/h). The compact spare
tire is for emergency use when a regular road tire
has lost air and gone flat. If your vehicle has a compact
spare tire, see Compact Spare Tire on page 5-82
and If a Tire Goes Flat on page 5-69.
(B) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and number of
plies in the sidewall and under the tread.
(C) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters
and numbers following the DOT (Department of
Transportation) code is the Tire Identification Number
(TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturer and plant code,
tire size, and date the tire was manufactured. The TIN
is molded onto both sides of the tire, although only one
side may have the date of manufacture.
(D) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit: Maximum
load that can be carried and the maximum pressure
needed to support that load.
(E) Tire Inflation: The temporary use tire or compact
spare tire should be inflated to 60 psi (420 kPa).
For more information on tire pressure and inflation see
Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-58.
(F) Tire Size: A combination of letters and numbers
define a tire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction
type and service description. The letter T as the
first character in the tire size means the tire is for
temporary use only.
(G) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
Specification): Original equipment tires designed
to GM’s specific tire performance criteria have a
TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.
GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed all federal
safety guidelines.
Tire Size
The following illustration shows an example of a typical
passenger vehicle tire size.
(A) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: The United States
version of a metric tire sizing system. The letter P as
the first character in the tire size means a passenger
vehicle tire engineered to standards set by the U.S. Tire
and Rim Association.
(B) Tire Width: The three-digit number indicates the
tire section width in millimeters from sidewall to sidewall.
(C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit number that indicates
the tire height-to-width measurements. For example,
if the tire size aspect ratio is 60, as shown in item C of
the illustration, it would mean that the tire’s sidewall
is 60 percent as high as it is wide.
5-55
(D) Construction Code: A letter code is used to
indicate the type of ply construction in the tire. The letter
R means radial ply construction; the letter D means
diagonal or bias ply construction; and the letter B means
belted-bias ply construction.
(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel in inches.
(F) Service Description: These characters represent
the load range and speed rating of the tire. The load
index represents the load carry capacity a tire is certified
to carry. The load index can range from 1 to 279.
The speed rating is the maximum speed a tire is certified
to carry a load. Speed ratings range from A to Z.
Tire Terminology and Definitions
Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the tire pressing
outward on each square inch of the tire. Air pressure
is expressed in pounds per square inch (psi) or
kilopascal (kPa).
Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that is located
between the plies and the tread. Cords may be made
from steel or other reinforcing materials.
Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped by
steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the plies are
laid at alternate angles less than 90 degrees to the
centerline of the tread.
Cold Inflation Pressure: The amount of air pressure
in a tire, measured in pounds per square inch (psi)
or kilopascals (kPa) before a tire has built up heat from
driving. See Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-58.
Curb Weight: This means the weight of a motor vehicle
with standard and optional equipment including the
maximum capacity of fuel, oil and coolant, but without
passengers and cargo.
Accessory Weight: This means the combined weight
of optional accessories. Some examples of optional
accessories are, automatic transmission, power steering,
power brakes, power windows, power seats, and
air conditioning.
DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewall of a
tire signifying that the tire is in compliance with the
U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT) motor vehicle
safety standards. The DOT code includes the Tire
Identification Number (TIN), an alphanumeric designator
which can also identify the tire manufacturer, production
plant, brand and date of production.
Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire’s height to
its width.
GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating, see Loading
Your Vehicle on page 4-45.
5-56
GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the front
axle, see Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-45.
GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the rear axle,
see Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-45.
Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of an
asymmetrical tire, that must always face outward when
mounted on a vehicle.
KiloPascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure.
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used on light duty
trucks and some multipurpose passenger vehicles.
Load Index: An assigned number ranging from
1 to 279 that corresponds to the load carrying capacity
of a tire.
Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximum air
pressure to which a cold tire may be inflated. The
maximum air pressure is molded onto the sidewall.
Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tire at the
maximum permissible inflation pressure for that tire.
Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum of curb
weight; accessory weight; vehicle capacity weight;
and production options weight.
Normal Occupant Weight: The number of occupants a
vehicle is designed to seat multiplied by 150 lbs (68 kg).
See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-45.
Occupant Distribution: Designated seating positions.
Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of an
asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that faces
outward when mounted on a vehicle. The side of the tire
that contains a whitewall, bears white lettering or
bears manufacturer, brand, and/or model name molding
that is higher or deeper than the same moldings on
the other sidewall of the tire.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used on passenger
cars and some light duty trucks and multipurpose
vehicles.
Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehicle
manufacturer’s recommended tire inflation pressure and
shown on the tire placard. See Inflation - Tire Pressure
on page 5-58 and Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-45.
Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords
that extend to the beads are laid at 90 degrees to the
centerline of the tread.
Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon which the tire
beads are seated.
Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the tread and
the bead.
Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assigned to a
tire indicating the maximum speed at which a tire
can operate.
5-57
Traction: The friction between the tire and the road
surface. The amount of grip provided.
Tread: The portion of a tire that comes into contact
with the road.
Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimes
called “wear bars,” that show across the tread of a tire
when only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread remains.
See When It Is Time for New Tires on page 5-64.
UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards):
A tire information system that provides consumers
with ratings for a tire’s traction, temperature, and
treadwear. Ratings are determined by tire manufacturers
using government testing procedures. The ratings are
molded into the sidewall of the tire. See Uniform
Tire Quality Grading on page 5-66.
Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number of designated
seating positions multiplied by 150 lbs (68 kg) plus
the rated cargo load. See Loading Your Vehicle
on page 4-45.
Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load on an
individual tire due to curb weight, accessory weight,
occupant weight, and cargo weight.
Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attached to a
vehicle showing the original equipment tire size
and recommended inflation pressure. See Loading Your
Vehicle on page 4-45.
5-58
Inflation - Tire Pressure
Tires need the correct amount of air pressure to
operate effectively.
Notice: Do not let anyone tell you that
under-inflation or over-inflation is all right. It is not.
If your tires do not have enough air (under-inflation),
you can get the following:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Too much flexing
Too much heat
Tire overloading
Premature or irregular wear
Poor handling
Reduced fuel economy
If your tires have too much air (over-inflation),
you can get the following:
•
•
•
•
Unusual wear
Poor handling
Rough ride
Needless damage from road hazards
A Tire and Loading Information label is attached to the
vehicle’s center pillar, below the driver’s door latch.
This label lists your vehicle’s original equipment
tires and shows the correct inflation pressures for your
tires when they are cold. The recommended cold
tire inflation pressure, shown on the label, is the
minimum amount of air pressure needed to support your
vehicle’s maximum load carrying capacity.
For additional information regarding how much weight
your vehicle can carry, and an example of the tire
and loading information label, see Loading Your Vehicle
on page 4-45. How you load your vehicle affects
vehicle handling and ride comfort, never load your
vehicle with more weight than it was designed to carry.
When to Check
Check your tires once a month or more. Do not forget to
check the compact spare tire, it should be at 60 psi
(420 kPa). For additional information regarding
the compact spare tire, see Compact Spare Tire on
page 5-82.
How to Check
Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check tire
pressure. You cannot tell if your tires are properly inflated
simply by looking at them. Radial tires may look properly
inflated even when they’re under-inflated. Check the tire’s
inflation pressure when the tires are cold. Cold means
your vehicle has been sitting for at least three hours or
driven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem. Press
the tire gage firmly onto the valve to get a pressure
measurement. If the cold tire inflation pressure matches
the recommended pressure on the Tire and Loading
Information label, no further adjustment is necessary.
If the inflation pressure is low, add air until you reach the
recommended amount.
If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on the
metal stem in the center of the tire valve. Re-check the
tire pressure with the tire gage.
Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve stems.
They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt and moisture.
5-59
High Speed Operation
{CAUTION:
Driving at high speeds, 100 mph (160 km/h)
or higher, puts an additional strain on tires.
Sustained high-speed driving, causes
excessive heat build up and can cause sudden
tire failure. You could have a crash and you or
others could be killed. Some high-speed rated
tires require inflation pressure adjustment for
high speed operation. When speed limits and
road conditions are such, that a vehicle can be
driven at high speeds, make sure the tires are
rated for high speed operation, in excellent
condition and set to the correct cold tire
inflation pressure for the vehicle load.
5-60
If you will be driving at high speeds, speeds of 100 mph
(160 km/h) or higher, where it is legal, set the cold
inflation pressure to the maximum inflation pressure
shown on the tire sidewall, or 38 psi (265 kPa),
whichever is lower. See the example following.
When you end this high-speed driving, return the tires to
the cold inflation pressure shown on the Tire and
Loading Information label. See Loading Your Vehicle
on page 4-45.
Example:
You will find the maximum load and inflation pressure
molded on the tire’s sidewall, in small letters, near
the rim flange. It will read something like this: Maximum
load 690 kg (1521 lbs) 300 kPa (44 psi) Max. Press.
For this example, you would set the inflation pressure for
high-speed driving at 38 psi (265 kPa).
Tire Pressure Monitor System
Your vehicle may have this feature. The Tire Pressure
Monitor (TPM) system uses radio and sensor technology
to check tire pressure levels. If your vehicle has this
feature, sensors are mounted on each tire and wheel
assembly, except for the compact spare tire and wheel.
Tire pressure readings are sent to a receiver located
in the vehicle once every 60 seconds while the vehicle is
being driven, and once every 60 minutes if the vehicle
is stationary for more than 15 minutes.
Using the Driver Information Center (DIC), tire pressure
levels can be viewed by the driver. For additional
information and details about the DIC operation and
displays see System Controls on page 3-48 and
DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-57. When a
low tire pressure condition is detected, the TPM system
will display the CHECK TIRE PRESSURE warning
message on the Driver Information Center (DIC) and, at
the same time, illuminate the low tire pressure warning
symbol, on the instrument panel cluster.
When the tire pressure
monitoring system warning
light is lit, one or more
of your tires is significantly
under-inflated.
You should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure as
indicated on the vehicle’s tire information placard.
Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes
the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread
life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping
ability. Each tire, including the spare, should be
checked monthly when cold and set to the
recommended inflation pressure as specified in the
vehicle placard and owner’s manual.
The Tire and Loading Information Label (your vehicle’s
tire information placard) shows the size of your
vehicle’s original tires and their recommended cold
inflation pressures. See Loading Your Vehicle on
page 4-45, for the location of the tire and loading
information label. Also see Inflation - Tire Pressure on
page 5-58.
Your vehicle’s TPM system can alert you about a low
tire pressure condition but it does not replace normal tire
maintenance. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-63 and Tires on page 5-52.
Notice: Do not use a tire sealant if your vehicle is
equipped with Tire Pressure Monitors. The liquid
sealant can damage the tire pressure monitor
sensors.
5-61
TPM Sensor Identification Codes
5. Start with the left (driver’s side) front tire.
Each TPM sensor has a unique identification code.
Any time you replace one or more of the TPM sensors,
the identification codes will need to be matched to
the new tire/wheel position. Each tire/wheel position is
matched, to a sensor, by increasing or decreasing
the tire’s air pressure. The sensors are matched, to the
tire/wheel positions, in the following order: left front
(LF), right front (RF), right rear (RR), and left rear (LR).
6. Remove the valve cap from the valve stem.
Activate the TPM sensor by increasing or
decreasing the tire’s air pressure for five seconds,
or until a horn chirp sounds. The horn chirp,
which may take up to 30 seconds, confirms that the
sensor identification code has been matched to
this tire position. To decrease the tire’s air-pressure
use the pointy end of the valve cap, a pencil-style
air pressure gage or a key.
You will have one minute to match the first tire/wheel
position, and five minutes overall, to match all four
tire/wheel positions. If it takes longer than one minute,
to match the first tire and wheel, or more than five
minutes to match all four tire and wheel positions the
matching process stops and you will need to start over.
The TPM matching process is outlined below:
1. Set the Parking brake.
2. Turn the ignition switch to ON with the engine off.
3. Using the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter,
lock and unlock the vehicle’s doors.
4. Press the lock and unlock buttons, at the same
time, on the RKE transmitter. A single horn chirp
will sound, indicating that the TPM system is ready,
and the sensor matching process can begin.
5-62
7. Proceed to the right (passenger’s side) front tire,
and repeat the procedure in Step 6.
8. Proceed to the right (passenger’s side) rear tire,
and repeat the procedure in Step 6.
9. Proceed to the left (driver’s side) rear tire, and
repeat the procedure in Step 6.
10. After hearing the confirming double horn chirp,
for the left rear tire, exit the matching process
by turning the ignition switch to OFF.
11. Set all four tires to the recommended air pressure
level as indicated on the tire and loading
information label.
12. Put the valve caps back on the valve stems.
The spare tire does not have a TPM sensor. If you
replace one of the road tires with the spare, the
SERVICE TIRE MESSAGE will be displayed on the DIC
screen. This message should go off once you re-install
the road tire containing the TPM sensor. The Service
Tire Monitor message is also displayed when the
TPM system is malfunctioning. One or more missing or
inoperable TPM sensors will cause the service tire
monitor message to be displayed. See your GM dealer
for service.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
Tire Inspection and Rotation
The tires on your vehicle are different sizes front to rear.
Due to this, your tires should not be rotated. Each tire
and wheel should be used only in the position it is in.
Check your tires and wheels regularly for unusual wear
and damage. Also see, Scheduled Maintenance on
page 6-4, When It Is Time for New Tires on page 5-64
and Wheel Replacement on page 5-67.
5-63
When It Is Time for New Tires
One way to tell when it’s
time for new tires is to
check the treadwear
indicators, which will
appear when your tires
have only 1/16 inch
(1.6 mm) or less of
tread remaining.
Some commercial truck
tires may not have
treadwear indicators.
You need a new tire if any of the following statements
are true:
• You can see the indicators at three or more places
around the tire.
• You can see cord or fabric showing through the
tire’s rubber.
• The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut or snagged
deep enough to show cord or fabric.
• The tire has a bump, bulge or split.
• The tire has a puncture, cut or other damage that
can’t be repaired well because of the size or
location of the damage.
5-64
Buying New Tires
To find out what kind and size of tires you need, look at
the Tire and Loading Information label. See Loading
Your Vehicle on page 4-45, for an example of the label
and where it can be found on your vehicle.
The tires installed on your vehicle when it was new had a
Tire Performance Criteria Specification (TPC Spec)
number on each tire’s sidewall. When you get new tires,
GM recommends that you get tires with that same TPC
Spec number. That way your vehicle will continue to have
tires that are designed to give proper endurance,
handling, speed rating, load range, traction, ride, tire
pressure monitoring system performance and other
things during normal service on your vehicle. If your tires
have an all-season tread design, the TPC number will be
followed by an “MS” (for mud and snow).
Whenever you replace your tires with those not having
a TPC Spec number, make sure they are the same
size, load range, speed rating and construction
type (bias, bias-belted or radial) as your original tires.
Winter tires with the same speed rating as your original
equipment tires may not be available for H, V, W
and ZR speed rated tires. If you choose snow tires with
a lower speed rating, never exceed the tire’s maximum
speed capability.
If you replace your vehicle’s tires with those not having
a TPC Spec number, the tire pressure monitoring
system may give an inaccurate low-pressure warning.
Non-TPC Spec tires may give a low-pressure warning
that is higher or lower than the proper warning level you
would get with TPC Spec numbered tires.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle, the
wheel rim flanges could develop cracks after
many miles of driving. A tire and/or wheel
could fail suddenly, causing a crash. Use only
radial-ply tires with the wheels on your vehicle.
Mixing tires could cause you to lose control
while driving. If you mix tires of different sizes
(other than those originally installed on your
vehicle) or types (radial and bias-belted tires),
the vehicle may not handle properly, and you
could have a crash. Using tires of different
sizes (other than those originally installed
on your vehicle) may also cause damage to
your vehicle. Be sure to use the correct size
and type tires on all wheels. It is all right to
drive with your compact spare temporarily,
it was developed for use on your vehicle.
See Compact Spare Tire on page 5-82.
5-65
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Treadwear
Quality grades can be found where applicable on the
tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum
section width. For example:
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and
a half (1.5) times as well on the government course as
a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of their use,
however, and may depart significantly from the norm
due to variations in driving habits, service practices and
differences in road characteristics and climate.
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
The following information relates to the system
developed by the United States National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration, which grades tires by
treadwear, traction and temperature performance.
(This applies only to vehicles sold in the United States.)
The grades are molded on the sidewalls of most
passenger car tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading
system does not apply to deep tread, winter-type
snow tires, space-saver or temporary use spare tires,
tires with nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches
(25 to 30 cm), or to some limited-production tires.
While the tires available on General Motors passenger
cars and light trucks may vary with respect to these
grades, they must also conform to federal safety
requirements and additional General Motors Tire
Performance Criteria (TPC) standards.
5-66
Traction – AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A,
B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s ability
to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled
conditions on specified government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance. Warning: The traction grade
assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking
traction tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
Temperature – A, B, C
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation
of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can
cause the material of the tire to degenerate and
reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a
level of performance which all passenger car tires must
meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory test wheel than the
minimum required by law.
The wheels on your vehicle were aligned and balanced
carefully at the factory to give you the longest tire life
and best overall performance.
Warning: The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or
excessive loading, either separately or in combination,
can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
If you notice unusual tire wear or your vehicle pulling
one way or the other, the alignment may need to
be reset. If you notice your vehicle vibrating when driving
on a smooth road, your wheels may need to be
rebalanced.
Wheel Replacement
Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked or badly rusted
or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose, the
wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts should be replaced.
If the wheel leaks air, replace it (except some
aluminum wheels, which can sometimes be repaired).
See your dealer if any of these conditions exist.
Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you need.
Each new wheel should have the same load-carrying
capacity, diameter, width, offset and be mounted
the same way as the one it replaces.
5-67
If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel bolts
or wheel nuts, replace them only with new GM
original equipment parts. This way, you will be sure to
have the right wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts
for your vehicle.
{CAUTION:
Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel
bolts or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be
dangerous. It could affect the braking and
handling of your vehicle, make your tires lose
air and make you lose control. You could have
a collision in which you or others could be
injured. Always use the correct wheel, wheel
bolts and wheel nuts for replacement.
Notice: The wrong wheel can also cause problems
with bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or
odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper height,
vehicle ground clearance and tire or tire chain
clearance to the body and chassis.
See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5-70 for more
information.
5-68
Used Replacement Wheels
{CAUTION:
Putting a used wheel on your vehicle is
dangerous. You can’t know how it’s been used
or how far it’s been driven. It could fail
suddenly and cause a crash. If you have to
replace a wheel, use a new GM original
equipment wheel.
Tire Chains
Notice: Use tire chains only where legal and only
when you must. Use only SAE Class “S” type chains
that are the proper size for your tires. Install them
on the rear axle tires and tighten them as tightly
as possible with the ends securely fastened.
Drive slowly and follow the chain manufacturer’s
instructions. If you can hear the chains contacting
your vehicle, stop and retighten them. If the contact
continues, slow down until it stops. Driving too
fast or spinning the wheels with chains on will
damage your vehicle.
If a Tire Goes Flat
It’s unusual for a tire to “blowout” while you’re driving,
especially if you maintain your tires properly. If air goes
out of a tire, it’s much more likely to leak out slowly.
But if you should ever have a “blowout,” here are a few
tips about what to expect and what to do:
If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a drag that
pulls the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off the
accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly.
Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake to
a stop well out of the traffic lane.
A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much like a
skid and may require the same correction you’d use
in a skid. In any rear blowout, remove your foot from the
accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle under control by
steering the way you want the vehicle to go. It may be
very bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer. Gently
brake to a stop, well off the road if possible.
{CAUTION:
Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to do
maintenance or repairs is dangerous without
the appropriate safety equipment and training.
The jack provided with your vehicle is
designed only for changing a flat tire. If it is
used for anything else, you or others could be
badly injured or killed if the vehicle slips off
the jack. Use the jack provided with your
vehicle only for changing a flat tire.
If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to use your
jacking equipment to change a flat tire safely.
5-69
Changing a Flat Tire
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage
by driving slowly to a level place. Turn on your
hazard warning flashers.
{CAUTION:
Changing a tire can be dangerous. The vehicle
can slip off the jack and roll over or fall on you
or other people. You and they could be badly
injured or even killed. Find a level place to
change your tire. To help prevent the vehicle
from moving:
CAUTION:
(Continued)
To be even more certain the vehicle will not
move, you should put blocks at the front and
rear of the tire farthest away from the one
being changed. That would be the tire, on the
other side, at the opposite end of the vehicle.
When you have a flat tire, use the following example as
a guide to assist you in the placement of wheel blocks.
1. Set the parking brake firmly.
2. Put the shift lever in PARK (P).
3. Turn off the engine and do not restart
while the vehicle is raised.
4. Do not allow passengers to remain in
the vehicle.
CAUTION:
(Continued)
The following information will tell you next how to use
the jack and change a tire.
5-70
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools
Removing the Spare Tire
The equipment you’ll need is located in the rear of
the vehicle.
The compact spare tire is located under the vehicle,
ahead of the rear bumper. See Compact Spare Tire on
page 5-82 for more information about the compact spare.
1. Remove the storage bin to access the jack if your
vehicle has the cargo management system.
If your vehicle has the third row seat, remove the
head rest storage tray to access the jack.
A.
B.
C.
D.
Wheel Wrench
Cable
Retainer
Compact Spare Tire
1. Open the storage compartment door of the cargo
management system that is nearest the liftgate
and remove the container.
2. Attach the wheel wrench (A) into the hoist shaft.
2. Turn the wing nut (A) holding the jack (B)
(and storage tray, if applicable) counterclockwise
and remove it.
3. Then remove the jack and wheel wrench (C).
5-71
3. Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise to lower
the spare tire to the ground. Continue turning the
wrench until the spare tire can be pulled out
from under the vehicle.
4. Tilt the retainer (C) and slip it through the
wheel opening to remove the spare tire from the
cable (B).
5. Turn the wrench clockwise until you feel two slips
or hear two clicks after removing the spare tire to
raise the cable back up.
Do not store a full-size or a flat road tire under the
vehicle. See Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and
Tools on page 5-79.
To continue changing the flat tire, see Removing the
Flat Tire and Installing the Spare Tire on page 5-73.
If the spare tire will not lower, the secondary latch may
be engaged causing the tire not to lower. Do the
following to check the cable:
1. Check under the vehicle to see if the cable is visible.
2. If it’s not visible, see Secondary Latch System on
page 5-77.
If it is visible, first try to tighten the cable by turning
the wheel wrench clockwise until you hear two
clicks or feel it skip twice. You cannot over-tighten
the cable.
3. Loosen the cable then by turning the wrench
counterclockwise three or four turns.
4. Tighten the cable all the way and then loosen it at
least two times, if the spare tire has not lowered.
If the spare tire did lower to the ground, continue
with Step 4 under Removing the Spare Tire
and Tools on page 5-71.
If you still cannot lower the spare tire to the ground,
see Secondary Latch System on page 5-77.
5-72
Removing the Flat Tire and
Installing the Spare Tire
1. Using the flat end of the wheel wrench, pry off the
center cap at the notch. Be careful; the edges may
be sharp. Don’t try to remove the cover with
your bare hands.
2. Loosen the wheel nuts — but do not remove
them — using the wheel wrench. (Turn the
handle about 180 degrees, then flip the handle
back to the starting position. This avoids taking the
wrench off the lug nut for each turn.)
3. Find the jacking
location using the
hoisting notches
located in the plastic
molding. The notches
in the plastic molding
are marked with a
triangle shape to help
you find them.
{CAUTION:
Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is
dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack you
could be badly injured or killed. Never get under
a vehicle when it is supported only by a jack.
{CAUTION:
Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly
positioned can damage the vehicle and even
make the vehicle fall. To help avoid personal
injury and vehicle damage, be sure to fit the
jack lift head into the proper location before
raising the vehicle.
5-73
{CAUTION:
Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to do
maintenance or repairs is dangerous without
the appropriate safety equipment and training.
The jack provided with your vehicle is
designed only for changing a flat tire. If it is
used for anything else, you or others could be
badly injured or killed if the vehicle slips off
the jack. Use the jack provided with your
vehicle only for changing a flat tire.
4. Attach the wheel wrench to the jack.
5. Turn the wheel wrench clockwise to raise the jack
lift head until the jack just fits under the vehicle.
6. Raise the jack by turning the wheel wrench
clockwise until the slots in the jack head fit into the
metal flange located behind the triangle on the
plastic molding as shown.
Notice: Using a jack to raise the vehicle without
positioning it correctly could damage your vehicle.
When raising your vehicle on a jack, be sure to
position it correctly under the frame and avoid
contact with the plastic molding.
5-74
7. Put the compact spare tire near you.
8. Raise the vehicle by turning the wheel wrench
clockwise. Raise the vehicle far enough off the
ground for the compact spare tire to fit under
the vehicle.
9. Remove all the wheel nuts and take off the flat tire.
{CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on the wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make the wheel nuts
become loose after a time. The wheel could
come off and cause an accident. When you
change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from
the places where the wheel attaches to the
vehicle. In an emergency, you can use a cloth
or a paper towel to do this; but be sure to use
a scraper or wire brush later, if you need to,
to get all the rust or dirt off.
{CAUTION:
Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts. If you
do, the nuts might come loose. Your wheel
could fall off, causing a serious accident.
10. Remove any rust or dirt
from the wheel bolts,
mounting surfaces
and spare wheel.
11. Install the spare tire and put the wheel nuts back on
with the rounded end of the nuts toward the wheel.
12. Tighten each nut by hand until the wheel is
held against the hub.
5-75
13. Lower the vehicle by attaching the wheel wrench to
the jack and turning the wrench counterclockwise.
Lower the jack completely.
14. Tighten the wheel nuts
firmly in a crisscross
sequence, as shown.
{CAUTION:
Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened
wheel nuts can cause the wheel to come loose
and even come off. This could lead to an
accident. Be sure to use the correct wheel
nuts. If you have to replace them, be sure to
get new GM original equipment wheel nuts.
Stop somewhere as soon as you can and have
the nuts tightened with a torque wrench to the
proper torque specification. See Capacities
and Specifications on page 5-102 for wheel nut
torque specification.
Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead
to brake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoid
expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel
nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper
torque specification.
5-76
Notice: Wheel covers will not fit on your compact
spare. If you try to put a wheel cover on the compact
spare, you could damage the cover or the spare.
15. Don’t try to put a wheel cover on the compact spare
tire. It won’t fit. Store the wheel cover securely in
the rear of the vehicle until you have the flat
tire repaired or replaced.
Secondary Latch System
Your vehicle has an underbody mounted tire hoist
assembly equipped with a secondary latch system. It is
designed to stop the compact spare tire from suddenly
falling off your vehicle if the cable holding the spare
tire is damaged. For the secondary latch to work, the tire
must be stowed with the valve stem pointing down.
See Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools on page 5-79
for instructions on storing the spare tire correctly.
{CAUTION:
Before beginning this procedure read all the
instructions. Failure to read and follow the
instructions could damage the hoist assembly
and you and others could get hurt. Read and
follow the instructions listed below.
{CAUTION:
Someone standing too close during the
procedure could be injured by the jack. If the
spare tire does not slide off the jack completely,
make sure no one is behind you or on either
side of you as you pull the jack out from the
spare.
To release the spare tire from the secondary latch,
do the following:
1. If the cable is not visible, start this procedure
at Step 3.
2. If the cable is visible, turn the wrench
counterclockwise until approximately 6 inches
(15 cm) of cable is exposed.
3. Attach the wheel wrench to the jack and raise the
jack at least 10 turns.
4. Place the jack under the vehicle, ahead of the rear
bumper. Position the center lift point of the jack
under the center of the spare tire.
5-77
5. Turn the wheel wrench clockwise to raise the jack
until it lifts the secondary latch spring.
8. Grasp the spare tire with both hands and pull it out
from under the vehicle.
6. Keep raising the jack until the spare tire stops
moving upward and is held firmly in place, this lets
you know that the secondary latch has released.
9. Reach under the vehicle and remove the wheel
wrench and jack.
7. Lower the jack by turning the wheel wrench
counterclockwise. Keep lowering the jack until
the spare tire is resting on the wheel wrench.
10. Tilt the retainer and slip it through the wheel opening
when the spare tire has been completely lowered.
11. Turn the wrench clockwise to raise the cable back
up if the cable is hanging.
Have the hoist assembly inspected as soon as you can.
You will not be able to store a spare tire using the
hoist assembly until it has been repaired or replaced.
5-78
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire
and Tools
Storing the Flat Tire with Third Row
Passengers
{CAUTION:
Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipment in the
passenger compartment of the vehicle could
cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision,
loose equipment could strike someone.
Store all these in the proper place.
Put back all tools as they were stored in the rear storage
compartment and put the compartment cover back on.
1. Use the power third row seat button, near the
liftgate, to tilt the third row seatback forward slightly.
2. Place the flat tire in the tire storage bag and put the
tire in an upright position against the third row seat.
3. Route the tie-down strap through the tire as shown
in the graphic and attach the strap to the cargo
tie-downs in the rear of the vehicle.
4. Tighten the tie-down strap.
5-79
Storing the Flat Tire with a
Flat Load Floor
Storing the Spare Tire and Tools
{CAUTION:
The underbody-mounted spare tire needs to be
stored with the valve stem pointing down. If the
spare tire is stored with the valve stem pointing
upwards, its secondary latch won’t work
properly and the spare tire could loosen and
suddenly fall from your vehicle. If this happened
when your vehicle was being driven, the tire
might contact a person or another vehicle,
causing injury and, of course, damage to itself
as well. Be sure the underbody-mounted spare
tire is stored with its valve stem pointing down.
Put back all tools as they were stored in the rear storage
compartment and put the compartment cover back on.
1. Place the flat tire in the tire storage bag and put the
tire in a horizontal position on the floor in the rear of
the vehicle.
2. Route the tie-down strap through the tire as shown
in the graphic and attach the strap to the cargo
tie-downs in the rear of the vehicle.
3. Tighten the tie-down strap.
5-80
1. Lay the compact spare tire on the ground at the
rear of the vehicle. Position the compact spare
tire so that the valve stem is pointed down facing
the rear of the vehicle.
2. Lower the cable to the ground. See Removing the
Spare Tire and Tools on page 5-71.
3. Tilt the retainer downward and slip it through the
center hole of the spare tire.
Make sure the retainer is fully seated across the
underside of the wheel.
4. Attach the wheel wrench to the hoist shaft.
5. Turn the wheel wrench clockwise to lift the
spare tire.
6. When the tire is almost in the stored position, turn
the tire so that the valve stem is towards the rear of
the vehicle.
This will help when you check and maintain tire
pressure in the spare.
7. Raise the tire fully against the underside of the
vehicle. Continue turning the wheel wrench until you
feel more than two clicks. This indicates that the
compact spare tire is secure and the cable is tight.
The spare tire hoist cannot be overtightened.
8. Make sure the tire is stored securely. Push, pull (A),
and then try to turn the tire (B). If the tire moves,
use the wheel wrench to tighten the cable.
Put back all tools as they were stored in the rear
storage compartment and put the compartment cover
back on.
5-81
Compact Spare Tire
Although the compact spare tire was fully inflated when
the vehicle was new, it can lose air after a time.
Check the inflation pressure regularly. It should be
60 psi (420 kPa).
After installing the compact spare on the vehicle, stop
as soon as possible and make sure the spare tire
is correctly inflated. The compact spare is made to
perform well at speeds up to 65 mph (105 km/h)
for distances up to 3,000 miles (5 000 km), so you can
finish your trip and have the full-size tire repaired or
replaced at your convenience. Of course, it is best
to replace the spare with a full-size tire as soon as
possible. The spare tire will last longer and be in good
shape in case it is needed again.
5-82
Notice: When the compact spare is installed, do
not take your vehicle through an automatic car wash
with guide rails. The compact spare can get
caught on the rails. That can damage the tire and
wheel, and maybe other parts of your vehicle.
Do not use the compact spare on other vehicles.
And do not mix the compact spare tire or wheel with
other wheels or tires. They will not fit. Keep the
spare tire and its wheel together.
Notice: Tire chains will not fit your compact spare.
Using them can damage your vehicle and can
damage the chains too. Do not use tire chains on
your compact spare.
Appearance Care
Cleaning products can be hazardous. Some are toxic.
Other cleaning products can burst into flames if a match
is struck near them or if they get on a hot part of the
vehicle. Some are dangerous if their fumes are inhaled
in a closed space. When anything from a container
is used to clean the vehicle, be sure to follow the
manufacturer’s warnings and instructions. Always open
the doors or windows of the vehicle when cleaning
the inside.
Never use these to clean the vehicle:
•
•
•
•
•
Gasoline
Benzene
Naphtha
•
•
•
•
Paint Thinner
Turpentine
Lacquer Thinner
Nail Polish Remover
They can all be hazardous — some more than
others — and they can all damage the vehicle, too.
Do not use any of these products unless this manual
says you can. In many uses, these will damage the
vehicle:
•
•
•
•
Alcohol
Laundry Soap
Bleach
Reducing Agents
Carbon Tetrachloride
Acetone
5-83
Fabric/Carpet
Most stains can be removed with club soda water.
To clean, use the following instructions:
Use a vacuum cleaner often to get rid of dust and loose
dirt. Wipe vinyl, leather, plastic, and painted surfaces
with a clean, damp cloth.
1. For liquids: blot with a clean, soft, white cloth.
For solids: remove as much as possible and
then vacuum or brush.
GM-approved cleaning products can be obtained from
your dealer.
2. Apply club soda water to a clean, soft, white cloth.
Do not over-saturate; the cloth should not
drip water.
Here are some cleaning tips:
•
•
•
•
Always read the instructions on the cleaner label.
Clean up stains as soon as you can before they set.
3. Clean the entire area. Avoid getting the fabric
too wet.
Carefully scrape off any excess stain.
4. Start cleaning from the seams into the stain to
avoid a ring effect.
Use a clean cloth or sponge, and change to a
clean area often. A soft brush may be used if stains
are stubborn.
5. Continue cleaning, using a clean area of the cloth
each time it becomes soiled.
• To avoid forming a ring on fabric after spot cleaning,
clean the entire area immediately or it will set.
5-84
6. When the stain is removed, blot the cleaned area
with another dry, clean, soft, white cloth.
Using Cleaner on Fabric
1. First, try the cleaner in an inconspicuous area to
make sure the cleaner does not affect the color of
the fabric.
2. For liquids: blot with a clean, soft, white cloth.
For solids: remove as much as possible and
then vacuum or brush.
3. Spray a small amount of the cleaner onto a clean
soft, white, cloth. Do not apply spray directly to
the fabric.
4. Start cleaning from the seams into the stain to
avoid a ring effect.
5. Continue cleaning, using a clean area of the cloth
each time it becomes soiled.
6. When the stain is removed, blot the cleaned area
with another dry, clean, soft, white cloth.
Special Fabric Cleaning Problems
Stains caused by such things as catsup, black coffee,
egg, fruit, fruit juice, milk, soft drinks, vomit, urine,
and blood can be removed using the club soda water
instructions given earlier in this section. If an odor lingers
after cleaning vomit or urine, treat the area with a
water and baking soda solution: 1 teaspoon (5 ml) of
baking soda to 1 cup (250 ml) of lukewarm water.
Let dry.
Stains caused by oil and grease can be cleaned with an
approved GM cleaner and a clean, white cloth.
1. Carefully scrape off excess stain.
2. Clean with cool water and allow to dry completely.
3. If a stain remains, follow the cleaner instructions
described earlier.
7. If the cleaner leaves a ring effect, follow up with
the club soda water instructions given earlier in
this section.
5-85
Vinyl
Instrument Panel
Use warm water and a clean cloth.
Use only mild soap and water to clean the top surfaces
of the instrument panel. Sprays containing silicones
or waxes may cause annoying reflections in the
windshield and even make it difficult to see through the
windshield under certain conditions.
• Rub with a clean, damp cloth to remove dirt.
This may have to be done more than once.
• Things like tar, asphalt, and shoe polish will stain if
they are not removed quickly. Use a clean cloth
and vinyl cleaner. See your dealer for this product.
Leather
Use a soft cloth with lukewarm water and a mild soap or
saddle soap and wipe dry with a soft cloth. Then,
let the leather dry naturally. Do not use heat to dry.
• For stubborn stains, use a leather cleaner.
• Never use oils, varnishes, solvent-based or abrasive
cleaners, furniture polish, or shoe polish on leather.
Interior Plastic Components
Use only a mild soap and water solution on a soft cloth
or sponge. Commercial cleaners may affect the
surface finish.
Wood Panels
Use a clean cloth moistened in warm, soapy water
(use mild dish washing soap). Dry the wood immediately
with a clean cloth.
• Soiled or stained leather should be cleaned
immediately. If dirt is allowed to work into the finish,
it can harm the leather.
Speaker Covers
Vacuum around a speaker cover gently, so that the
speaker will not be damaged. Clean spots with
just water and mild soap.
5-86
Glass Surfaces
Weatherstrips
Glass should be cleaned often. GM Glass Cleaner or a
liquid household glass cleaner will remove normal
tobacco smoke and dust films on interior glass. See
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials on page 5-91.
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last
longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply
silicone grease with a clean cloth. During very cold,
damp weather frequent application may be required.
See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-11.
Notice: If you use abrasive cleaners when cleaning
glass surfaces on your vehicle, you could scratch
the glass and/or cause damage to the rear window
defogger and the integrated radio antenna. When
cleaning the glass on your vehicle, use only a soft
cloth and glass cleaner.
Care of Safety Belts
Keep belts clean and dry.
{CAUTION:
Do not bleach or dye safety belts. If you do,
it may severely weaken them. In a crash, they
might not be able to provide adequate
protection. Clean safety belts only with mild
soap and lukewarm water.
Washing Your Vehicle
The paint finish on the vehicle provides beauty, depth of
color, gloss retention, and durability.
The best way to preserve the vehicle’s finish is to keep it
clean by washing it often with lukewarm or cold water.
Do not wash the vehicle in the direct rays of the sun.
Use a car washing soap. Do not use strong soaps
or chemical detergents. Be sure to rinse the vehicle well,
removing all soap residue completely. GM-approved
cleaning products can be obtained from your dealer.
See Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials on page 5-91.
Do not use cleaning agents that are petroleum
based, or that contain acid or abrasives. All cleaning
agents should be flushed promptly and not allowed
to dry on the surface, or they could stain. Dry the finish
with a soft, clean chamois or an all-cotton towel to
avoid surface scratches and water spotting.
High pressure car washes may cause water to enter
the vehicle.
5-87
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a
car washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses.
Follow instructions under Washing Your Vehicle on
page 5-87.
Finish Care
Occasional waxing or mild polishing of the vehicle by
hand may be necessary to remove residue from the paint
finish. GM-approved cleaning products can be obtained
from your dealer. See Vehicle Care/Appearance
Materials on page 5-91.
The vehicle has a “basecoat/clearcoat” paint finish.
The clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored
basecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that are
non-abrasive and made for a basecoat/clearcoat
paint finish.
can damage the vehicle’s finish if they remain on painted
surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as possible.
If necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that are marked
safe for painted surfaces to remove foreign matter.
Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weather,
and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a period
of years. To help keep the paint finish looking new, keep
the vehicle in a garage or covered whenever possible.
Windshield and Wiper Blades
If the windshield is not clear after using the windshield
washer, or if the wiper blade chatters when running,
wax, sap, or other material may be on the blade
or windshield.
Clean the outside of the windshield with a glass cleaning
liquid or powder and water solution. The windshield is
clean if beads do not form when it is rinsed with water.
Notice: Machine compounding or aggressive
polishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish may
damage it. Use only non-abrasive waxes and
polishes that are made for a basecoat/clearcoat
paint finish on your vehicle.
Grime from the windshield will stick to the wiper blades
and affect their performance. Clean the blade by
wiping vigorously with a cloth soaked in full-strength
windshield washer solvent. Then rinse the blade
with water.
Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other
salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird
droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc.,
Check the wiper blades and clean them as necessary;
replace blades that look worn.
5-88
Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels
The vehicle may be equipped with either aluminum or
chrome-plated wheels.
Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with mild
soap and water. Rinse with clean water. After rinsing
thoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel. A wax may then
be applied.
Notice: If you use strong soaps, chemicals,
abrasive polishes, cleaners, brushes, or cleaners
that contain acid on aluminum or chrome-plated
wheels, you could damage the surface of the
wheel(s). The repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Use only GM-approved cleaners on
aluminum or chrome-plated wheels.
The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted
surface of your vehicle. Do not use strong soaps,
chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners,
cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaning brushes on
them because you could damage the surface. Do not
use chrome polish on aluminum wheels.
Notice: Using chrome polish on aluminum wheels
could damage the wheels. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Use chrome polish on
chrome wheels only.
Use chrome polish only on chrome-plated wheels, but
avoid any painted surface of the wheel, and buff off
immediately after application.
Notice: If you drive your vehicle through an
automatic car wash that has silicone carbide tire
cleaning brushes, you could damage the aluminum
or chrome-plated wheels. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Never drive a vehicle
equipped with aluminum or chrome-plated wheels
through an automatic car wash that uses silicone
carbide tire cleaning brushes.
Do not take your vehicle through an automatic car wash
that has silicone carbide tire cleaning brushes. These
brushes can also damage the surface of these wheels.
5-89
Tires
Underbody Maintenance
To clean the tires, use a stiff brush with tire cleaner.
Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust
control can collect on the underbody. If these are not
removed, corrosion and rust can develop on the
underbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan,
and exhaust system even though they have corrosion
protection.
Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressing
products on your vehicle may damage the paint
finish and/or tires. When applying a tire dressing,
always wipe off any overspray from all painted
surfaces on your vehicle.
Sheet Metal Damage
If the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal
repair or replacement, make sure the body repair shop
applies anti-corrosion material to parts repaired or
replaced to restore corrosion protection.
Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide the
corrosion protection while maintaining the warranty.
Finish Damage
Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the finish
should be repaired right away. Bare metal will corrode
quickly and may develop into major repair expense.
Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch-up
materials available from your GM dealer. Larger areas
of finish damage can be corrected in your GM
dealer’s body and paint shop.
5-90
At least every spring, flush these materials from the
underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where mud
and debris can collect. Dirt packed in close areas of
the frame should be loosened before being flushed.
Your GM dealer or an underbody car washing system
can do this for you.
Chemical Paint Spotting
Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create a
chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon and
attack painted surfaces on the vehicle. This damage can
take two forms: blotchy, ring-shaped discolorations,
and small, irregular dark spots etched into the
paint surface.
Although no defect in the paint job causes this, GM will
repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces of
new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within
12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase,
whichever occurs first.
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials
See your GM dealer for more information on purchasing
the following products.
Description
Usage
Polishing Cloth
Wax-Treated
Interior and exterior
polishing cloth.
Tar and Road
Oil Remover
Removes tar, road oil,
and asphalt.
Chrome Cleaner
and Polish
Use on chrome or
stainless steel.
White Sidewall
Tire Cleaner
Removes soil and black
marks from whitewalls.
Vinyl Cleaner
Cleans vinyl tops,
upholstery, and
convertible tops.
Glass Cleaner
Removes dirt, grime,
smoke and fingerprints.
Chrome and Wire
Wheel Cleaner
Removes dirt and grime
from chrome wheels and
wire wheel covers.
Finish Enhancer
Removes dust,
fingerprints, and surface
contaminants. Spray on
and wipe off.
Description
Usage
Swirl Remover Polish
Removes swirl marks, fine
scratches, and other light
surface contamination.
Cleaner Wax
Removes light scratches
and protects finish.
Foaming Tire Shine
Low Gloss
Cleans, shines, and
protects in one step.
No wiping necessary.
Wash Wax Concentrate
Medium foaming
shampoo. Cleans and
lightly waxes.
Biodegradable and
phosphate free.
Spot Lifter
Quickly removes spots
and stains from carpets,
vinyl, and cloth
upholstery.
Odor Eliminator
Odorless spray odor
eliminator used on fabrics,
vinyl, leather and carpet.
See your General Motors parts department for these
products. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
on page 6-11.
5-91
Vehicle Identification
Service Parts Identification Label
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
You will find this label in the passenger side rear storage
compartment or at the lower edge of the liftgate. It is
very helpful if you ever need to order parts. On this
label, you will find the following:
•
•
•
•
VIN
Model designation
Paint information
Production options and special equipment
Be sure that this label is not removed from the vehicle.
Electrical System
This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. It appears on
a plate in the front corner of the instrument panel, on
the driver’s side. You can see it if you look through the
windshield from outside your vehicle. The VIN also
appears on the Vehicle Certification and Service Parts
labels and the certificates of title and registration.
Add-On Electrical Equipment
Engine Identification
Notice: Don’t add anything electrical to your vehicle
unless you check with your dealer first. Some
electrical equipment can damage your vehicle and
the damage wouldn’t be covered by your warranty.
Some add-on electrical equipment can keep other
components from working as they should.
The 8th character in your VIN is the engine code.
This code will help you identify your engine,
specifications and replacement parts.
Your vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting to
add anything electrical to your vehicle, see Servicing
Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-58.
5-92
Windshield Wiper Fuses
Fuses and Circuit Breakers
The windshield wiper motor is protected by an internal
circuit breaker. If the wiper motor overheats due to
heavy snow, the wipers will stop until the motor cools
and will then restart.
The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected from
short circuits by a combination of fuses and circuit
breakers. This greatly reduces the chance of fires
caused by electrical problems.
Power Windows and Other
Power Options
Circuit breakers protect the power windows and power
seats. When the current load is too heavy, the circuit
breaker opens and closes, protecting the circuit until the
problem is fixed or goes away.
Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. If the
band is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure you
replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical
size and rating. If a fuse blows, see your dealer
for service immediately.
If you ever have a problem on the road and don’t have
a spare fuse, you can “borrow” one that has the
same amperage. Pick some feature of your vehicle that
you can get along without – like the radio or cigarette
lighter – and use its fuse, if it is the correct amperage.
Replace it as soon as you can.
The fuses are located in three fuse blocks, one located
in the engine compartment on the passenger’s side
and the other two under the rear seat.
5-93
Underhood Fuse Block
The underhood fuse block is located in the engine
compartment on the passenger’s side of the vehicle.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12
for more information on location.
To access the fuses, push in the two tabs located on
each side of the fuse block cover. Then lift the cover off.
5-94
Relays
LO SPEED
FAN RELAY
MINI
HI SPEED FAN
RELAY MINI
ACCESSORY
RELAY MINI
S/P FAN
RELAY MINI
PARK LAMP
RELAY MICRO
HORN RELAY
MICRO
Usage
Low Speed Fan Motor
High Speed Fan Motor
Accessory Power Outlets
Series/Parallel Fan
Parking Lamps
Horn
Relays
HI BEAM
RELAY MICRO
DRL RELAY
MICRO-OPT
LO BEAM
RELAY/HID
MINI-OPT
HDLP WASH
RELAY
MINI-OPT
SPARE
BLOWER
RELAY MINI
FOG LAMP
RELAY MICRO
MAIN RELAY
MICRO
STARTER
RELAY MINI
CMP CLU
RELAY MICRO
IGN-1 RELAY
MICRO
Usage
High-Beam Headlamps
Daytime Running Lamps
Low-Beam HID Headlamps (Option)
Wiring
Harnesses
BODY W/H
I/P W/H
ENG W/H
FORWARD
LAMP
Headlamp Washer Motor (Option)
J Cases
Not Used
R REAR
Front Blower
R REAR
Fog Lamps
L REAR
Powertrain/ECM
L REAR
Starter Solenoid
HI FAN
LOW FAN
BLOWER
STARTER
EBCM
Compressor Clutch
Ignition Switch (ON)
Usage
Wiring Harness Connection
Wiring Harness Connection
Engine Wiring Harness Connection
Forward Lamp Wiring Harness
Connection
Usage
RRPDB (Passenger’s Side Rear
Power Distribution Box)
RRPDB (Passenger’s Side Rear
Power Distribution Box)
LRPDB (Driver’s Side Rear Power
Distribution Box)
LRPDB (Driver’s Side Rear Power
Distribution Box)
High Cooling Fan Motor
Low Cooling Fan Motor
PWM Fan Motor Assembly
Starter Solenoid
Electronic Brake Control Module
5-95
Fuses
RT PARK
HORN
LT HI BEAM
Usage
Passenger’s Side Taillamp
Assembly, Front Sidemarker and
Front Parking Lamp Assembly
Dual Horn Assembly
Driver’s Side High-Beam Headlamp
LT LOW BEAM Driver’s Side Low-Beam Headlamp
Fuses
Usage
DIM/ALDL
DIM, ALDL (Assembly Line Data Link)
FLASHER
Turn Signal/Hazard Flasher Module
V8 ECM
STRG CTLS
V8 ECM, Canister Purge
Steering Wheel Control Pad,
Headlamp Switch
STARTER RLY Jumper to Starter Relay
Side Low-Beam
RT LOW BEAM Passenger’s
Headlamp
WASH NOZ
Driver’s and Passenger’s Side
Heated Washer Nozzles
Passenger’s Side High-Beam
Headlamp
ODD COILS
Odd Ignition Coils, Fuel Injectors,
Odd Injection Coils
RT HI BEAM
HFV6 ECM
High Feature V6 ECM
(Electronic Control Module)
REAR WPR
Rear Wiper Motor
THEFT
LT PARK
LIC/DIMMING
5-96
ECM, TCM (Transmission Control
Module), PASS-Key® III+ Module
Driver’s Side Taillamp Assembly,
Front Sidemarker and Front Parking
Lamp Assembly
Rear License Plate Assembly,
DIM (Dash Integration Module)
TCM/IPC
SPARE
TCM, ECM and IPC
(Instrument Panel Cluster)
Not Used
ABS
Anti-Lock Brake System
VICS
Vehicle Information and
Communication System
SPARE
Not Used
SPARE
Not Used
Fuses
IGN SW
VOLT CHECK
Usage
Ignition Switch
(Power to IGN-3 and CRANK)
DIM
Fuses
I/P OUTLET
CCP
Usage
Instrument Panel Accessory
Power Outlet
Climate Control
ECM/TCM
ECM, TCM, IPC, PASS-Key® III+
Module
WPR MOD
Windshield Wiper Module Assembly
SPARE
Not Used
Post O2 Sensors
SPARE
Not Used
SPARE
Not Used
POSTO2
COMP CLUTCH Compressor Clutch
WPR SW
FOG LAMP
OUTLET
EVEN COILS
PREO2/CAM
Driver’s and Passenger’s Side
Oxygen Sensors, CAM Phaser
Windshield Wiper/Washer Switch
Fog Lamps
Center Console Accessory
Power Outlet
Even Injection Coils
Circuit
Breakers
HDLP WASH
C/B-OPT
Usage
Headlamp Washer Motor (Optional)
5-97
Rear Underseat Fuse Block
(Driver Side)
Relays
BASS RELAY
MINI
SPARE
ELC RELAY
MINI
SPARE
Usage
Brake Apply Sensor
Not Used
ELC (Electronic Level Control)
Compressor Motor
Not Used
L POSITION Driver’s Side Position Lamp
RELAY MICRO
The driver’s side rear fuse block is located under the
rear seat on the driver’s side of the vehicle. The carpet
must be lifted up to access the rear fuse block.
To access the fuse block, push in the two tabs located
at each end of the fuse block cover. Then lift the
cover off.
R POSITION
RELAY MICRO Passenger’s Side Position Lamp
IGN 3 RELAY
MICRO
STANDING
LAMP
RLY MICRO
SPARE
Heated Seat Modules, Air Inlet
Motor, Shifter Assembly
Control for Position Lamp Relays
Not Used
REV LAMP
ISRVM (Inside Rearview Mirror),
RELAY MICRO License Plate Lamp Assembly
5-98
Fuses
L FRT HTD
SEAT MOD
MEM/ADAPT
SEAT
THEFT
REVERSE
LAMP
SPARE
POSITION
LAMP
SPARE
ELC COMP
Usage
Driver’s Heated Seat Module
Driver’s Power Seat Switch, Memory
Seat Module
Universal Garage Door Opener,
Intrusion Sensor, Diversity Antenna
Module
ISRVM (Inside Rearview Mirror),
License Plate Lamp Assembly
Fuses
BASS
HDLP
LEVELING
SPARE
Usage
Taillamps, Center High-Mounted
Stop Lamp, Flasher Module, ABS
Module, Trailer Lamps
Headlamp Leveling System Chassis
Sensors (Export Only)
Not Used
CCP
CCP (Climate Control Panel)
IGN 3
Heated Seat Modules, Air Inlet
Motor, Shifter Assembly
Not Used
Taillamp Assemblies, Front Position
Lamp Assemblies
Not Used
ELC Compressor, ELC Solenoid
AUDIO
Radio, OnStar Module
FFS SW
Flip Fold Seat Switch
REAR DR MOD Rear Door Modules
FFSM
Flip Fold Seat Module
DRIVER
DR MOD
Driver’s Door Module
J Cases
AMP
ELC
Usage
Audio Amplifier
ELC Compressor
Circuit
Breakers
Usage
SEAT C/B
Power Seat Switches, Memory Seat
Module
5-99
Rear Underseat Fuse Block
(Passenger Side)
Relays
Usage
PRIMARY
QUARTER A/C Rear A/C
RELAY MINI
SPARE
Not Used
REAR DEFOG Rear Window Defogger
RELAY MINI
SPARE
The passenger’s side rear fuse block is located under
the rear seat on the passenger’s side of the vehicle.
The carpet must be lifted up to access the rear
fuse block.
To access the fuse block, push in the two tabs located
at each end of the fuse block cover. Then lift the
cover off.
5-100
Not Used
AFTERBOIL
RELAY MICRO Afterboil Pump
INT LAMP
Hush Panel Lamps, Puddle Lamps,
RELAY MICRO Overhead Courtesy Lamp Assembly
IGN 1 RELAY
MICRO
SPARE
Ignition Switch
Not Used
REAR FOG
LAMP
RLY MICRO
Rear Fog Lamps (Export Only)
FUEL PUMP
MOTOR
RLY MICRO
Fuel Pump Motor
Fuses
Usage
Fuses
INTERIOR
LAMP
Hush Panel Lamps, Puddle Lamps,
Overhead Courtesy Lamp Assembly
REAR HVAC
RT FRT
DR MOD
RIM
Passenger’s Door Module
R FRT HTD
SEAT MOD
REAR HATCH
RIM (Rear Integration Module),
Ignition Switch, Key Lock Cylinder
Usage
Rear Climate Control System
Passenger’s Side Heated Seat
Module
Rear Hatch Latch
AIR BAG
SDM (Sensing Diagnostic Module)
IGN 1
Shifter, Power Sounder, Rear
Parking Aid, Rearview Mirror, RIM
REAR FOG
LAMP
Rear Fog Lamps (Export Only)
SUSPNTN
Suspension Module
SPARE
Not Used
TV Tuner Assembly, VICS
(Vehicle Information Communication
System) Module
SPARE
Not Used
VICS
SPARE
Not Used
POWER
SOUNDER
Power Sounder, Inclination Sensor
AFTERBOIL
Afterboil Heater Pump
CANISTER
VENT
Canister Vent Solenoid
FUEL
PUMP MTR
Fuel Pump Motor
J Cases
Usage
SUNROOF MOD Power Sunroof Module
REAR DEFOG Rear Window Defogger Element
Circuit
Breakers
DR MOD
PWR C/B
Usage
Door Modules
5-101
Capacities and Specifications
The following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions. See Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 6-11 for more information.
Application
Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a
Front A/C
Front and Rear A/C
Capacities
English
1.26 lbs
1.76 lbs
Metric
0.57 kg
0.80 kg
Automatic Transmission
9.0 quarts
Cooling System
3.6L V6
4.6L V8
9.7 quarts
10.4 quarts
9.2 L
9.8 L
Engine Oil with Filter
3.6L V6
4.6L V8 AWD
4.6L V8 RWD
6.0 quarts
7.5 quarts
8.0 quarts
5.7 L
7.1 L
7.6 L
Fuel Tank
Wheel Nut Torque
8.5 L
20.0 gallons
75.7 L
100 ft lb
140 Y
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in this
manual. Recheck fluid level after filling.
5-102
Engine Specifications
Engine
VIN Code
Transmission
Spark Plug Gap
3.6L V6 (LY7)
7
Automatic
0.044 inches (1.1 mm)
4.6L V8 (LH2)
A
Automatic
0.040 inches (1.0 mm)
5-103
✍ NOTES
5-104
Section 6
Maintenance Schedule
Maintenance Schedule ......................................6-2
Introduction ...................................................6-2
Maintenance Requirements ..............................6-2
Your Vehicle and the Environment ....................6-2
Using Your Maintenance Schedule ....................6-2
Scheduled Maintenance ...................................6-4
Additional Required Services ............................6-6
Maintenance Footnotes ...................................6-7
Owner Checks and Services ............................6-8
At Each Fuel Fill ............................................6-8
At Least Once a Month ...................................6-9
At Least Once a Year .....................................6-9
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ...............6-11
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ..........6-13
Maintenance Record .....................................6-14
6-1
Maintenance Schedule
Introduction
Important: Keep engine oil at the proper level and
change as recommended.
Your Vehicle and the Environment
Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep your
vehicle in good working condition, but also helps the
environment. All recommended maintenance is
important. Improper vehicle maintenance can even
affect the quality of the air we breathe. Improper fluid
levels or the wrong tire inflation can increase the level
of emissions from your vehicle. To help protect our
environment, and to keep your vehicle in good condition,
be sure to maintain your vehicle properly.
Using Your Maintenance Schedule
Maintenance Requirements
We at General Motors want to help you keep your
vehicle in good working condition. But we do not know
exactly how you will drive it. You may drive very
short distances only a few times a week. Or you may
drive long distances all the time in very hot, dusty
weather. You may use your vehicle in making deliveries.
Or you may drive it to work, to do errands or in many
other ways.
Notice: Maintenance intervals, checks, inspections,
replacement parts and recommended fluids and
lubricants as prescribed in this manual are necessary
to keep your vehicle in good working condition.
Any damage caused by failure to follow scheduled
maintenance may not be covered by warranty.
Because of all the different ways people use their
vehicles, maintenance needs vary. You may need more
frequent checks and replacements. So please read
the following and note how you drive. If you have any
questions on how to keep your vehicle in good condition,
see your GM Goodwrench dealer.
Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? The Plan
supplements your new vehicle warranties. See your
Warranty and Owner Assistance booklet or your dealer
for details.
6-2
This schedule is for vehicles that:
• carry passengers and cargo within recommended
limits. You will find these limits on the tire and
loading information label. See Loading Your Vehicle
on page 4-45.
• are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal
driving limits.
• are driven off-road in the recommended manner.
See Operating Your All-Wheel-Drive Vehicle Off
Paved Roads on page 4-17.
• use the recommended fuel. See Gasoline Octane
{CAUTION:
Performing maintenance work on a vehicle
can be dangerous. In trying to do some jobs,
you can be seriously injured. Do your own
maintenance work only if you have the
required know-how and the proper tools and
equipment for the job. If you have any doubt,
see your GM Goodwrench dealer to have a
qualified technician do the work.
on page 5-5.
The services in Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4
should be performed when indicated. See Additional
Required Services on page 6-6 and Maintenance
Footnotes on page 6-7 for further information.
Some maintenance services can be complex. So,
unless you are technically qualified and have the
necessary equipment, you should have your
GM Goodwrench dealer do these jobs.
When you go to your GM Goodwrench dealer for your
service needs, you will know that GM-trained and
supported service technicians will perform the work
using genuine GM parts.
If you want to get service information, see Service
Publications Ordering Information on page 7-12.
6-3
Owner Checks and Services on page 6-8 tells you what
should be checked, when to check it and what you can
easily do to help keep your vehicle in good condition.
The proper replacement parts, fluids and lubricants to
use are listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
on page 6-11 and Normal Maintenance Replacement
Parts on page 6-13. When your vehicle is serviced,
make sure these are used. All parts should be replaced
and all necessary repairs done before you or anyone
else drives the vehicle. We recommend the use of
genuine GM parts.
Scheduled Maintenance
When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL message comes on,
it means that service is required for your vehicle.
Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible within
the next 600 miles (1 000 km). It is possible that,
if you are driving under the best conditions, the engine
oil life system may not indicate that vehicle service
is necessary for over a year. However, your engine
oil and filter must be changed at least once a
year and at this time the system must be reset.
Your GM Goodwrench dealer has GM-trained service
technicians who will perform this work using genuine
GM parts and reset the system.
6-4
If the engine oil life system is ever reset accidentally,
you must service your vehicle within 3,000 miles
(5 000 km) since your last service. Remember to reset
the oil life system whenever the oil is changed. See
Engine Oil Life System on page 5-20 for information on
the Engine Oil Life System and resetting the system.
When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL message appears,
certain services, checks and inspections are required.
Required services are described in the following for
“Maintenance I” and “Maintenance II.” Generally,
it is recommended that your first service be
Maintenance I, your second service be Maintenance II
and that you alternate Maintenance I and Maintenance II
thereafter. However, in some cases, Maintenance II
may be required more often.
Maintenance I — Use Maintenance I if the CHANGE
ENGINE OIL message comes on within 10 months
since vehicle was purchased or Maintenance II
was performed.
Maintenance II — Use Maintenance II if the previous
service performed was Maintenance I. Always use
Maintenance II whenever the message comes on
10 months or more since the last service or if the
message has not come on at all for one year.
Scheduled Maintenance
Service
Maintenance I
Maintenance II
Change engine oil and filter. See Engine Oil on page 5-16. Reset oil life system.
See Engine Oil Life System on page 5-20. An Emission Control Service.
•
•
Lubricate chassis components. See footnote #.
•
•
Visually check for any leaks or damage. See footnote (g).
•
•
Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary, replace filter. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 5-22. An Emission Control Service. See footnote †.
•
•
Check tires for inflation pressures and wear. See Tires on page 5-52.
•
•
Inspect brake system. See footnote (a).
•
•
Check engine coolant and windshield washer fluid levels and add fluid
as needed.
•
•
Perform any needed additional services. See “Additional Required Services”
in this section.
•
•
Inspect suspension and steering components. See footnote (b).
•
Inspect engine cooling system. See footnote (c).
•
Inspect wiper blades. See footnote (d).
•
Inspect restraint system components. See footnote (e).
•
Lubricate body components. See footnote (f).
•
Check transmission fluid level and add fluid as needed.
•
Replace passenger compartment air filter. See footnote (j).
•
6-5
Additional Required Services
The following services should be performed at the first maintenance service (I or II) after the indicated miles
(kilometers) shown for each item.
Additional Required Services
Service and Miles (Kilometers)
Inspect fuel system for damage or leaks.
Inspect exhaust system for loose or
damaged components.
Replace engine air cleaner filter.
See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on
page 5-22. An Emission Control Service.
For vehicles used for trailer towing:
Change transfer case fluid.
Change automatic transmission fluid and
filter (severe service). See footnote (h).
Change automatic transmission fluid and
filter (normal service).
Replace spark plugs. An Emission
Control Service.
Engine cooling system service
(or every 5 years, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
See footnote (i).
Inspect engine accessory drive belt.
An Emission Control Service.
6-6
25,000
(41 500)
•
50,000
(83 000)
•
75,000
(125 000)
•
100,000
(166 000)
•
125,000
(207 500)
•
150,000
(240 000)
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Maintenance Footnotes
† The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or the
California Air Resources Board has determined that the
failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify
the emission warranty or limit recall liability prior to
the completion of the vehicle’s useful life. We, however,
urge that all recommended maintenance services be
performed at the indicated intervals and the
maintenance be recorded.
# Lubricate the front suspension, ball joints, steering
linkage, transmission shift linkage and parking
brake cable guides. Ball joints should not be lubricated
unless their temperature is 10°F (-12°C) or higher,
or they could be damaged.
(a) Visually inspect brake lines and hoses for proper
hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Inspect
disc brake pads for wear and rotors for surface
condition. Inspect other brake parts, including calipers,
parking brake, etc.
(b) Visually inspect front and rear suspension and
steering system for damaged, loose or missing parts,
signs of wear or lack of lubrication. Inspect power
steering lines and hoses for proper hook-up, binding,
leaks, cracks, chafing, etc.
(c) Visually inspect hoses and have them replaced if they
are cracked, swollen or deteriorated. Inspect all pipes,
fittings and clamps; replace with genuine GM parts as
needed. To help ensure proper operation, a pressure test
of the cooling system and pressure cap and cleaning the
outside of the radiator and air conditioning condenser is
recommended at least once a year.
(d) Visually inspect wiper blades for wear or cracking.
Replace blade inserts that appear worn or damaged
or that streak or miss areas of the windshield.
(e) Make sure the safety belt reminder light and all your
belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors and anchorages
are working properly. Look for any other loose or
damaged safety belt system parts. If you see anything
that might keep a safety belt system from doing its
job, have it repaired. Have any torn or frayed safety belts
replaced. Also look for any opened or broken airbag
coverings, and have them repaired or replaced.
(The airbag system does not need regular maintenance.)
(f) Lubricate all key lock cylinders, hood latch
assemblies, secondary latch, pivots, spring anchor,
release pawl, hood hinges, body door hinges, rear
compartment hinges and any folding seat hardware.
More frequent lubrication may be required when
exposed to a corrosive environment. Applying silicone
grease on weatherstrips with a clean cloth will make
them last longer, seal better and not stick or squeak.
See Weatherstrips on page 5-87.
6-7
(g) A fluid loss in any vehicle system could indicate a
problem. Have the system inspected and repaired
and the fluid level checked. Add fluid if needed.
(h) Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the
vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these
conditions:
− In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature
regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or higher.
− In hilly or mountainous terrain.
− When doing frequent trailer towing.
− Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery
service.
(i) Drain, flush and refill cooling system. See Engine
Coolant on page 5-24 for what to use. Inspect hoses.
Clean radiator, condenser, pressure cap and filler neck.
Pressure test the cooling system and pressure cap.
(j) If you drive regularly under dusty conditions, the filter
may require replacement more often.
Owner Checks and Services
These owner checks and services should be performed
at the intervals specified to help ensure the safety,
dependability and emission control performance of your
vehicle. Your GM Goodwrench dealer can assist you
with these checks and services.
Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once.
Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to your
vehicle, make sure they are the proper ones, as shown
in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-11.
At Each Fuel Fill
It is important to perform these underhood checks at
each fuel fill.
Engine Oil Level Check
Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil
if necessary. See Engine Oil on page 5-16 for
further details.
Notice: It is important to check your oil regularly
and keep it at the proper level. Failure to keep your
engine oil at the proper level can cause damage
to your engine not covered by your warranty.
6-8
Engine Coolant Level Check
At Least Once a Year
Check the engine coolant level and add DEX-COOL®
coolant mixture if necessary. See Engine Coolant
on page 5-24 for further details.
Starter Switch Check
Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check
Check the windshield washer fluid level in the windshield
washer tank and add the proper fluid if necessary.
At Least Once a Month
Tire Inflation Check
Visually inspect your tires and make sure tires are
inflated to the correct pressures. Do not forget to check
your spare tire. See Tires on page 5-52 for further
details. Check to make sure the spare tire is stored
securely. Push, pull and then try to turn the spare tire.
If it moves, tighten it. See Changing a Flat Tire on
page 5-70.
{CAUTION:
When you are doing this inspection, the
vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle
moves, you or others could be injured.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room
around the vehicle.
2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and the regular
brake. See Parking Brake on page 2-28 if necessary.
Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be ready to
turn off the engine immediately if it starts.
3. Try to start the engine in each gear. The starter
should work only in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
If the starter works in any other position, contact
your GM Goodwrench dealer for service.
6-9
Automatic Transmission Shift Lock
Control System Check
{CAUTION:
When you are doing this inspection, the
vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle
moves, you or others could be injured.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room
around the vehicle. It should be parked on a
level surface.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake. See Parking Brake
on page 2-28 if necessary.
Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately if
the vehicle begins to move.
3. With the engine off, turn the ignition to ON, but do
not start the engine. Without applying the regular
brake, try to move the shift lever out of PARK (P)
with normal effort. If the shift lever moves out
of PARK (P), contact your GM Goodwrench dealer
for service.
6-10
Ignition Transmission Lock Check
While parked, and with the parking brake set, try to turn
the ignition to OFF in each shift lever position.
• The ignition should turn to OFF only when the shift
lever is in PARK (P).
• The key should come out only in OFF.
Contact your GM Goodwrench dealer if service is
required.
Parking Brake and Automatic
Transmission Park (P) Mechanism Check
{CAUTION:
When you are doing this check, your vehicle
could begin to move. You or others could be
injured and property could be damaged.
Make sure there is room in front of your
vehicle in case it begins to roll. Be ready to
apply the regular brake at once should the
vehicle begin to move.
Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing
downhill. Keeping your foot on the regular brake,
set the parking brake.
• To check the parking brake’s holding ability:
With the engine running and transmission in
NEUTRAL (N), slowly remove foot pressure from
the regular brake pedal. Do this until the vehicle is
held by the parking brake only.
Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants
Fluids and lubricants identified below by name, part
number or specification may be obtained from your
dealer.
Usage
• To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holding ability:
With the engine running, shift to PARK (P).
Then release the parking brake followed by the
regular brake.
Contact your GM Goodwrench dealer if service is
required.
Underbody Flushing Service
At least every spring, use plain water to flush any
corrosive materials from the underbody. Take care to
clean thoroughly any areas where mud and other debris
can collect.
Engine Oil
Fluid/Lubricant
The engine requires a special
engine oil meeting GM Standard
GM4718M. Oils meeting this
standard may be identified as
synthetic, and should also be
identified with the American
Petroleum Institute Certified for
Gasoline Engines starburst symbol.
However, not all synthetic API oils
with the starburst symbol will meet
this GM standard. You should
look for and use only an oil that
meets GM Standard GM4718M.
GM Goodwrench oil meets all the
requirements for your vehicle.
For the proper viscosity,
see Engine Oil on page 5-16.
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
water and use only DEX-COOL®
Engine Coolant Coolant.
See Engine Coolant on
page 5-24.
6-11
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Hydraulic Brake Delco Supreme 11 Brake Fluid or
System
equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid.
Usage
Transfer Case
DEXRON -III Automatic
Transmission Fluid. Look for
“Approved for the H-Specification”
on the label.
Hood Hinges
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,
in Canada 10953474).
Body Door
Hinge Pins,
Tailgate Hinge
and Linkage,
Folding Seats
and Fuel
Door Hinge
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,
in Canada 10953474).
Outer Tailgate
Handle Pivot
Points
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,
in Canada 10953474).
Windshield
®
Washer Solvent.
Washer Solvent GM Optikleen
Power Steering Fluid
Power Steering GM
(GM Part No. U.S. 89021184,
System
in Canada 89021186).
Automatic
Transmission
DEXRON®-III Automatic
Transmission Fluid. Look for
“Approved for the H-Specification”
on the label.
Key Lock
Cylinders
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,
in Canada 10953474).
Chassis
Lubrication
Chassis Lubricant (GM Part No.
U.S. 12377985, in Canada
88901242) or lubricant meeting
requirements of NLGI #2, Category
LB or GC-LB.
Front and
Rear Axle
SAE 75W-90 Synthetic Axle
Lubricant (GM Part No. U.S.
12378261, in Canada 10953455)
meeting GM Specification 9986115.
6-12
Fluid/Lubricant
®
Weatherstrip
Conditioning
Dielectric Silicone Grease
(GM Part No. U.S. 12345579,
in Canada 992887).
Weatherstrip
Squeaks
Synthetic Grease with Teflon,
Superlube (GM Part No. U.S.
12371287, in Canada 10953437).
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts
Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.
GM Part Numbers
ACDelco® Part
Numbers
25728874
A2029C
25177917
89017342
PF2129
PF61
25740404
—
Spark Plugs
3.6L V6
4.6L V8
12565996
12571533
41-988
41-986
Windshield Wiper Blades (Hook Type)
Driver’s Side – 22 inches (56.5 cm)
Passenger’s Side – 21 inches (53.3 cm)
12367281
88892785
8-2221
8-2211
Part
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
Engine Oil Filter
3.6L V6
4.6L V8
Passenger Compartment Air Filter Element
6-13
Maintenance Record
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service and the
type of services performed in the boxes provided. See Maintenance Requirements on page 6-2 in this section.
Any additional information from Owner Checks and Services on page 6-8 can be added on the following record pages.
Also, you should retain all maintenance receipts.
Maintenance Record
Date
6-14
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Services Performed
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Date
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Services Performed
6-15
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Date
6-16
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Services Performed
Section 7
Customer Assistance and Information
Customer Assistance and Information ...............7-2
Customer Satisfaction Procedure ......................7-2
Online Owner Center ......................................7-4
Customer Assistance for Text Telephone
(TTY) Users ...............................................7-4
Customer Assistance Offices ............................7-4
GM Mobility Program for Persons
with Disabilities ...........................................7-6
Roadside Service ...........................................7-6
Courtesy Transportation ...................................7-8
Vehicle Data Collection and Event
Data Recorders .........................................7-10
Reporting Safety Defects ................................7-11
Reporting Safety Defects to the
United States Government ..........................7-11
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government ................................7-12
Reporting Safety Defects to
General Motors .........................................7-12
Service Publications Ordering Information .........7-12
7-1
Customer Assistance
and Information
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to
your dealer and to Cadillac. Normally, any concerns
with the sales transaction or the operation of your
vehicle will be resolved by your dealer’s sales or service
departments. Sometimes, however, despite the best
intentions of all concerned, misunderstandings can
occur. If your concern has not been resolved to your
satisfaction, the following steps should be taken:
STEP ONE: Discuss your concern with a member of
dealership management. Normally, concerns can
be quickly resolved at that level. If the matter has
already been reviewed with the sales, service or parts
manager, contact the owner of the dealership or
the general manager.
7-2
STEP TWO: If after contacting a member of dealership
management, it appears your concern cannot be
resolved by the dealership without further help, contact
the Cadillac Customer Assistance Center, 24 hours
a day, by calling 1-800-458-8006. In Canada, contact
GM of Canada, Canadian Cadillac Customer
Communication Centre by calling 1-888-446–2000.
We encourage you to call the toll-free number in order
to give your inquiry prompt attention. Please have
the following information available to give the Customer
Assistance Representative:
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). This is
available from the vehicle registration or title, or the
plate at the top left of the instrument panel and
visible through the windshield.
• Dealership name and location.
• Vehicle delivery date and present mileage.
When contacting Cadillac, please remember that your
concern will likely be resolved at a dealer’s facility.
That is why we suggest you follow Step One first if you
have a concern.
STEP THREE: Both General Motors and your dealer
are committed to making sure you are completely
satisfied with your new vehicle. However, if you continue
to remain unsatisfied after following the procedure
outlined in Steps One and Two, you should file with the
BBB Auto Line Program to enforce any additional
rights you may have. Canadian owners refer to your
Warranty and Owner Assistance Information booklet for
information on the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration
Plan (CAMVAP).
The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court program
administered by the Council of Better Business
Bureaus to settle automotive disputes regarding vehicle
repairs or the interpretation of the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. Although you may be required to
resort to this informal dispute resolution program prior to
filing a court action, use of the program is free of
charge and your case will generally be heard within
40 days. If you do not agree with the decision given in
your case, you may reject it and proceed with any other
venue for relief available to you.
You may contact the BBB Auto Line Program using
the toll-free telephone number or write them at the
following address:
BBB Auto Line Program
Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.
4200 Wilson Boulevard
Suite 800
Arlington, VA 22203-1838
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
This program is available in all 50 states and the
District of Columbia. Eligibility is limited by vehicle age,
mileage and other factors. General Motors reserves
the right to change eligibility limitations and/or
discontinue its participation in this program.
7-3
Online Owner Center
The Owner Center is a resource for your GM ownership
needs. Specific vehicle information can be found in
one place.
The Online Owner Center allows you to:
• Get e-mail service reminders.
• Access information about your specific vehicle,
including tips and videos and an electronic
version of this owner’s manual (United States only).
• Keep track of your vehicle’s service history and
maintenance schedule.
• Find GM dealers for service nationwide.
• Receive special promotions and privileges only
available to members (United States only).
Refer to the web for updated information.
To register your vehicle, visit www.MyGMLink.com.
(United States) or My GM Canada within
www.gmcanada.com (Canada).
7-4
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users
To assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing, or
speech-impaired and who use Text Telephones (TTYs),
Cadillac has TTY equipment available at its Customer
Assistance Center. Any TTY user can communicate
with Cadillac by dialing: 1-800-833-CMCC (2622).
(TTY users in Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.)
Customer Assistance Offices
Cadillac encourages customers to call the toll-free
number for assistance. If a U.S. customer wishes to
write to Cadillac, the letter should be addressed
to Cadillac’s Customer Assistance Center.
United States — Customer Assistance
Cadillac Customer Assistance Center
Cadillac Motor Car Division
P.O. Box 33169
Detroit, MI 48232-5169
1-800-458-8006
1-800-833-2622 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-882-1112
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
From Puerto Rico:
1-800-496-9992 (English)
1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
From U.S. Virgin Islands:
1-800-496-9994
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
Canada — Customer Assistance
General Motors of Canada Limited
Canadian Cadillac Customer Communication
Centre, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
1-888-446-2000
1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-882-1112
Overseas — Customer Assistance
Please contact the local General Motors Business Unit.
Mexico, Central America and
Caribbean Islands/Countries
(Except Puerto Rico and U.S. Virgin
Islands) — Customer Assistance
General Motors de Mexico, S. de R.L. de C.V.
Customer Assistance Center
Paseo de la Reforma # 2740
Col. Lomas de Bezares
C.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F.
01-800-508-0000
Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800
7-5
GM Mobility Program for Persons
with Disabilities
This program, available to
qualified applicants, can
reimburse you up to
$1,000 toward eligible
aftermarket driver or
passenger adaptive
equipment that may be
required for your vehicle,
such as hand controls,
wheelchair/scooter
lifts, etc.
This program can also provide you with free resource
information, such as area driver assessment centers and
mobility equipment installers. The offer is available for
a limited period of time from the date of vehicle
purchase/lease. For more details, or to determine your
vehicle’s eligibility, see your GM dealer or call the
GM Mobility Assistance Center at 1-800-323-9935.
Text telephone (TTY) users, call 1-800-833-9935.
GM of Canada also has a Mobility Program.
Call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) for details.
All TTY users call 1-800-263-3830.
7-6
Roadside Service
Cadillac’s exceptional Roadside Service is more than an
auto club or towing service. It provides every Cadillac
owner with the advantage of contacting a Cadillac
advisor and, where available, a Cadillac trained dealer
technician who can provide on-site service.
Each technician travels with a specially equipped
service vehicle complete with the necessary Cadillac
parts and tools required to handle most roadside repairs.
Cadillac Roadside Service® can be reached by dialing
1-800-882-1112, 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
This service is provided at no charge for any
warranty-covered situation and for a nominal charge
if the Cadillac is no longer under warranty.
Roadside Service is available only in the United States
and Canada.
Cadillac Owner Privileges™
Reaching Roadside Service
Roadside Service provides several Cadillac Owner
Privileges™ at “no charge,” throughout your Cadillac
Warranty Period — 48 months/50,000 miles (80 000 km).
Dial the toll-free Roadside Service number:
1-800-882-1112. A Roadside Service Advisor will assist
you and request the following information:
Emergency Road Service is performed on site for the
following situations:
• Towing Service
• Battery Jump Starting
• Lock Out Assistance
• Fuel Delivery
• Flat Tire Change (Covers change only)
• Trip Interruption — If your trip is interrupted due to
a warranty failure, incidental expenses may be
reimbursed during the 48 months/50,000 miles
(80 000 km) warranty period. Items covered
are hotel, meals, and rental car.
Roadside Service Availability
Wherever you drive in the United States or Canada,
an advisor is available to assist you over the phone.
A dealer technician, if available, can travel to your
location within a 30 mile (50 km) radius of a participating
Cadillac dealership. If beyond this radius, we will
arrange to have your car towed to the nearest
Cadillac dealership.
• A description of the problem
• Name, home address, home telephone number
• Location of your Cadillac and number you are
calling from
• The model year, Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN), mileage, and date of delivery
Roadside Service for the Hearing or
Speech Impaired
Roadside Service is prepared to assist owners who
have hearing difficulties or are speech impaired.
Cadillac has installed special telecommunication
devices called Text Telephone (TTY) in the Roadside
Service Center.
Any customer who has access to a (TTY) or a
conventional teletypewriter can communicate with
Cadillac by dialing from the United States or Canada
1-888-889-2438 — daily, 24 hours.
7-7
Courtesy Transportation
Cadillac has always exemplified quality and value in its
offering of motor vehicles. To enhance your ownership
experience, we and our participating dealers are
proud to offer Courtesy Transportation, a customer
support program for new vehicles.
The Courtesy Transportation program is offered to
retail purchase/lease customers in conjunction with
the Bumper-to-Bumper coverage provided by the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Several transportation
options are available when warranty repairs are
required. This will reduce your inconvenience during
warranty repairs.
Scheduling Service Appointments
When your vehicle requires warranty service, you should
contact your dealer and request an appointment.
By scheduling a service appointment and advising your
service consultant of your transportation needs, your
dealer can help minimize your inconvenience.
If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the service
department immediately, keep driving it until it can be
scheduled for service, unless, of course, the problem is
safety-related. If it is, please call your dealership,
let them know this, and ask for instructions.
7-8
If the dealer requests that you simply drop the vehicle
off for service, you are urged to do so as early in
the work day as possible to allow for same day repair.
Transportation Options
Warranty service can generally be completed while you
wait. However, if you are unable to wait Cadillac
helps minimize your inconvenience by providing several
transportation options. Depending on the circumstances,
your dealer can offer you one of the following:
Shuttle Service
Participating dealers can provide you with shuttle
service to get you to your destination with minimal
interruption of your daily schedule. This includes a one
way or round trip shuttle service to a destination up
to 10 miles from the dealership.
Public Transportation or Fuel
Reimbursement
If your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs,
reimbursement (five days maximum) may be available
for the use of public transportation such as taxi or
bus. In addition, should you arrange transportation
through a friend or relative, reimbursement for
reasonable fuel expenses (five day maximum) may be
available. Claim amounts should reflect actual costs and
be supported by original receipts.
Courtesy Rental Vehicle
Additional Program Information
Your dealer may arrange to provide you with a courtesy
rental vehicle or reimburse you for a rental vehicle
you obtained if your vehicle is kept for a warranty repair.
Reimbursement will be limited to a maximum of $40 a
day and must be supported by receipts. This requires
that you sign and complete a rental agreement and meet
state, local and rental vehicle provider requirements.
Requirements vary and may include minimum age
requirements, insurance coverage, credit card, etc.
You are responsible for fuel usage charges and may
also be responsible for taxes, levies, usage fees,
excessive mileage, or rental usage beyond the
completion of the repair.
Courtesy Transportation is available during the
Bumper-to-Bumper warranty coverage period,
but it is not part of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
A separate booklet entitled Warranty and Owner
Assistance Information furnished with each new vehicle
provides detailed warranty coverage information.
Generally it is not possible to provide a like-vehicle as a
courtesy rental.
Canadian Vehicles: For warranty repairs during
the Complete Vehicle Coverage period of the General
Motors of Canada New Vehicle Limited Warranty,
alternative transportation may be available under the
Courtesy Transportation Program. Please consult
your dealer for details.
Courtesy Transportation is available only at participating
dealers and all program options, such as shuttle
service, may not be available at every dealer. Please
contact your dealer for specific information about
availability. All Courtesy Transportation arrangements
will be administered by appropriate dealer personnel.
General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally modify,
change or discontinue Courtesy Transportation at
any time and to resolve all questions of claim eligibility
pursuant to the terms and conditions described
herein at its sole discretion.
7-9
Vehicle Data Collection and Event
Data Recorders
Your vehicle, like other modern motor vehicles, has a
number of sophisticated computer systems that monitor
and control several aspects of the vehicle’s
performance. Your vehicle uses on-board vehicle
computers to monitor emission control components to
optimize fuel economy, to monitor conditions for air bag
deployment and, if so equipped, to provide anti-lock
braking and to help the driver control the vehicle
in difficult driving situations. Some information may be
stored during regular operations to facilitate repair
of detected malfunctions; other information is stored only
in a crash event by computer systems, such as those
commonly called event data recorders (EDR).
In a crash event, computer systems, such as the
Air Bag Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) in your
vehicle may record information about the condition
of the vehicle and how it was operated, such as data
related to engine speed, brake application, throttle
position, vehicle speed, safety belt usage, air bag
7-10
readiness, air bag performance, and the severity of a
collision. This information has been used to improve
vehicle crash performance and may be used to improve
crash performance of future vehicles and driving
safety. Unlike the data recorders on many airplanes,
these on-board systems do not record sounds, such as
conversation of vehicle occupants.
To read this information, special equipment is needed
and access to the vehicle or the device that stores
the data is required. GM will not access information
about a crash event or share it with others other than:
• with the consent of the vehicle owner or, if the
vehicle is leased, with the consent of the lessee,
• in response to an official request of police or similar
government office,
• as part of GM’s defense of litigation through the
discovery process, or
• as required by law.
In addition, once GM collects or receives data, GM may:
• use the data for GM research needs,
• make it available for research where appropriate
confidentiality is to be maintained and need is
shown, or
• share summary data which is not tied to a specific
vehicle with non-GM organizations for research
purposes.
Others, such as law enforcement, may have access to
the special equipment that can read the information
if they have access to the vehicle or the device
that stores the data.
If your vehicle is equipped with OnStar®, please check
the OnStar® subscription service agreement or
manual for information on its operations and data
collection.
Reporting Safety Defects
Reporting Safety Defects to the
United States Government
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could
cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA), in addition to notifying
General Motors.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between you, your dealer,
or General Motors.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll-free at 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 in
the Washington, D.C. area) or write to:
NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from the hotline.
7-11
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government
If you live in Canada, and you believe that your vehicle
has a safety defect, you should immediately notify
Transport Canada, in addition to notifying General
Motors of Canada Limited. You may write to:
Transport Canada
330 Sparks Street
Tower C
Ottawa, Ontario K1A 0N5
Reporting Safety Defects to
General Motors
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada) in
a situation like this, we certainly hope you will notify us.
Please call us at 1-800-458-8006, or write:
Cadillac Customer Assistance Center
Cadillac Motor Car Division
P.O. Box 33169
Detroit, MI 48232-5169
In Canada, please call us at 1– 888– 446–2000.
Or, write:
Canadian Cadillac Customer Communication
Centre, 163-005
General Motors of Canada Limited
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Service Publications Ordering
Information
Service Manuals
Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair
information on engines, transmission, axle, suspension,
brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $120.00
Transmission, Transaxle, Transfer
Case Unit Repair Manual
This manual provides information on unit repair service
procedures, adjustments, and specifications for GM
transmissions, transaxles, and transfer cases.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $50.00
7-12
Service Bulletins
Current and Past Model Order Forms
Service Bulletins give technical service information
needed to knowledgeably service General Motors cars
and trucks. Each bulletin contains instructions to
assist in the diagnosis and service of your vehicle.
Service Publications are available for current and
past model GM vehicles. To request an order form,
please specify year and model name of the vehicle.
In Canada, information pertaining to Product Service
Bulletins can be obtained by contacting your General
Motors dealer or by calling 1-800-GM-DRIVE
(1-800-463-7483).
Owner’s Information
Owner publications are written specifically for owners
and intended to provide basic operational information
about the vehicle. The owner’s manual will include
the Maintenance Schedule for all models.
In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner’s Manual, and
Warranty Booklet.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $35.00
Without Portfolio: Owner’s Manual only.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $25.00
ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123
Monday-Friday 8:00 AM - 6:00 PM
Eastern Time
For Credit Card Orders Only
(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit Helm, Inc. on the
World Wide Web at: www.helminc.com
Or you can write to:
Helm, Incorporated
P. O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
Prices are subject to change without notice and without
incurring obligation. Allow ample time for delivery.
Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices are
quoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents are to make
checks payable in U.S. funds.
7-13
✍ NOTES
7-14
A
Accessory Power Outlets ................................. 3-23
Additives, Fuel ................................................. 5-6
Add-On Electrical Equipment ............................ 5-92
Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal .................. 2-23
Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine ................................. 5-22
Air Conditioning .............................................. 3-25
Airbag
Readiness Light .......................................... 3-37
Airbag Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) ...... 7-10
Airbag System ................................................ 1-47
How Does an Airbag Restrain? ...................... 1-55
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .......... 1-58
What Makes an Airbag Inflate? ...................... 1-55
What Will You See After an
Airbag Inflates? ........................................ 1-56
When Should an Airbag Inflate? .................... 1-54
Where Are the Airbags? ............................... 1-50
All-Wheel Drive ............................................... 5-46
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) System ......................... 2-28
Antenna, Diversity Antenna System .................. 3-114
Antenna, XM™ Satellite Radio
Antenna System ........................................ 3-114
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ........................... 4-7
Anti-Lock Brake, System Warning Light ..............
Appearance Care ............................................
Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels ..............
Care of Safety Belts ....................................
Chemical Paint Spotting ...............................
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses ....................
Fabric/Carpet ..............................................
Finish Care .................................................
Finish Damage ............................................
Glass Surfaces ............................................
Instrument Panel .........................................
Interior Plastic Components ...........................
Leather ......................................................
Sheet Metal Damage ...................................
Speaker Covers ..........................................
Tires ..........................................................
Underbody Maintenance ...............................
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ................
Vinyl ..........................................................
Washing Your Vehicle ...................................
Weatherstrips ..............................................
Windshield and Wiper Blades ........................
Wood Panels ..............................................
Ashtrays ........................................................
Assist Handles ...............................................
3-39
5-83
5-89
5-87
5-90
5-88
5-84
5-88
5-90
5-87
5-86
5-86
5-86
5-90
5-86
5-90
5-90
5-91
5-86
5-87
5-87
5-88
5-86
3-24
2-47
1
Audio System(s) ............................................. 3-80
Audio Steering Wheel Controls .................... 3-111
Care of Your CD and DVD Player ................ 3-113
Care of Your CDs and DVDs ....................... 3-113
Diversity Antenna System ............................ 3-114
Navigation/Radio System ............................. 3-111
Radio with CD ............................................ 3-81
Setting the Time .......................................... 3-80
Theft-Deterrent Feature ............................... 3-111
Understanding Radio Reception ................... 3-113
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ........... 3-114
Automatic Transmission
Fluid .......................................................... 5-23
Operation ................................................... 2-25
B
Battery .......................................................... 5-40
Exterior Lighting Battery Saver ...................... 3-19
Before Leaving on a Long Trip ......................... 4-37
Brake
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ........................ 4-7
Emergencies ................................................ 4-8
Panic Assist ................................................ 4-11
Parking ...................................................... 2-28
System Warning Light .................................. 3-38
2
Brake Pedal, Throttle ....................................... 2-23
Brakes .......................................................... 5-37
Braking ........................................................... 4-6
Braking in Emergencies ..................................... 4-8
Break-In, New Vehicle ..................................... 2-20
Bulb Replacement ........................................... 5-50
High Intensity Discharge (HID) Lighting ........... 5-50
Buying New Tires ........................................... 5-64
C
California Fuel .................................................. 5-6
Canadian Owners ................................................ ii
Capacities and Specifications .......................... 5-102
Carbon Monoxide ................... 2-12, 2-33, 4-40, 4-52
Care of
Safety Belts ................................................ 5-87
Your CD and DVD Player ........................... 3-113
Your CDs and DVDs .................................. 3-113
Cargo Cover .................................................. 2-49
Cargo Management System ............................. 2-49
Cell Phone Storage Area ................................. 2-47
Center Console Storage Area ........................... 2-47
Chains, Tire ................................................... 5-68
Charging System Light .................................... 3-38
Check
Engine Light ...............................................
Checking Things Under the Hood ......................
Chemical Paint Spotting ...................................
Child Restraints
Child Restraint Systems ...............................
Infants and Young Children ...........................
Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) ..........................
Older Children .............................................
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for
the LATCH System ...................................
Securing a Child Restraint in a
Rear Seat Position ...................................
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Right Front Seat Position ..........................
Top Strap ...................................................
Top Strap Anchor Location ............................
Where to Put the Restraint ...........................
Cigarette Lighter .............................................
Cleaning
Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels ..............
Exterior Lamps/Lenses .................................
Fabric/Carpet ..............................................
Finish Care .................................................
Glass Surfaces ............................................
3-42
5-10
5-90
1-34
1-31
1-40
1-28
1-42
1-42
1-45
1-38
1-39
1-37
3-24
5-89
5-88
5-84
5-88
5-87
Cleaning (cont.)
Instrument Panel ......................................... 5-86
Interior Plastic Components ........................... 5-86
Leather ...................................................... 5-86
Speaker Covers .......................................... 5-86
Tires .......................................................... 5-90
Underbody Maintenance ............................... 5-90
Vinyl .......................................................... 5-86
Washing Your Vehicle ................................... 5-87
Weatherstrips .............................................. 5-87
Windshield and Wiper Blades ........................ 5-88
Wood Panels .............................................. 5-86
Climate Control System
Air Filter, Passenger Compartment ................. 3-32
Dual .......................................................... 3-25
Outlet Adjustment ........................................ 3-30
Rear Air Conditioning System ........................ 3-31
Comfort Guides, Rear Safety Belt ..................... 1-25
Compact Spare Tire ........................................ 5-82
Control of a Vehicle .......................................... 4-6
Convenience Net ............................................ 2-49
Coolant
Engine Temperature Gage ............................ 3-41
Engine Temperature Warning Light ................. 3-40
Heater, Engine ............................................ 2-24
Surge Tank Pressure Cap ............................. 5-27
3
Cooling System .............................................. 5-30
Cruise Control Lever ....................................... 3-12
Cruise Control Light ........................................ 3-46
Cupholder(s) .................................................. 2-47
Customer Assistance Information
Courtesy Transportation .................................. 7-8
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users ............................... 7-4
Customer Assistance Offices ........................... 7-4
Customer Satisfaction Procedure ..................... 7-2
GM Mobility Program for Persons with
Disabilities ................................................ 7-6
Reporting Safety Defects to
General Motors ........................................ 7-12
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government .............................. 7-12
Reporting Safety Defects to the
United States Government ......................... 7-11
Roadside Service .......................................... 7-6
Service Publications Ordering Information ........ 7-12
D
Daytime Running Lamps .................................. 3-17
Defensive Driving ............................................. 4-2
Delayed Locking ............................................... 2-9
Diversity Antenna System ............................... 3-114
4
Doing Your Own Service Work ........................... 5-4
Door
Central Door Unlocking System ....................... 2-9
Delayed Locking ........................................... 2-9
Locks .......................................................... 2-8
Power Door Locks ......................................... 2-9
Programmable Automatic Door Locks ............. 2-10
Rear Door Security Locks ............................. 2-10
Driver
Position, Safety Belt ..................................... 1-15
Driver Information Center (DIC) ......................... 3-48
DIC Main Menu ........................................... 3-53
DIC Vehicle Personalization .......................... 3-66
DIC Warnings and Messages ........................ 3-57
Status of Vehicle Systems ............................ 3-49
System Controls .......................................... 3-48
Driving
At Night ..................................................... 4-30
City ........................................................... 4-35
Defensive ..................................................... 4-2
Drunken ....................................................... 4-3
Freeway ..................................................... 4-36
Hill and Mountain Roads .............................. 4-38
In Rain and on Wet Roads ........................... 4-32
Recovery Hook ........................................... 4-45
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out ................. 4-44
Winter ........................................................ 4-40
Dual Climate Control System ............................ 3-25
DVD
Rear Seat Entertainment System ................... 3-98
E
Electrical System
Add-On Equipment ...................................... 5-92
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ........................... 5-93
Power Windows and Other
Power Options ......................................... 5-93
Rear Underseat Fuse Block ................ 5-98, 5-100
Underhood Fuse Block ................................. 5-94
Windshield Wiper Fuses ............................... 5-93
Engine
Air Cleaner/Filter ......................................... 5-22
Battery ....................................................... 5-40
Check and Service Engine Soon Light ............ 3-42
Coolant ...................................................... 5-24
Coolant Heater ............................................ 2-24
Coolant Temperature Gage ........................... 3-41
Coolant Temperature Warning Light ................ 3-40
Engine Compartment Overview ...................... 5-12
Exhaust ..................................................... 2-33
Oil ............................................................. 5-16
Overheated Protection Operating Mode ........... 5-29
Engine (cont.)
Overheating ................................................
Speed Limiter .............................................
Starting ......................................................
Entry Lighting .................................................
Event Data Recorders (EDR) ............................
Extender, Safety Belt .......................................
Exterior Lighting Battery Saver ..........................
5-27
3-36
2-23
3-19
7-10
1-27
3-19
F
Filter
Engine Air Cleaner ...................................... 5-22
Finish Damage ............................................... 5-90
Flash-to-Pass ................................................... 3-9
Flat Tire ........................................................ 5-69
Flat Tire, Changing ......................................... 5-70
Flat Tire, Storing ............................................. 5-79
Fluid
Automatic Transmission ................................ 5-23
Power Steering ........................................... 5-35
Windshield Washer ...................................... 5-36
Fog Lamp Light .............................................. 3-46
Fog Lamps .................................................... 3-18
Front Axle ...................................................... 5-49
Front Storage Area ......................................... 2-47
5
Fuel ............................................................... 5-5
Additives ...................................................... 5-6
California Fuel .............................................. 5-6
Filling a Portable Fuel Container .................... 5-10
Filling Your Tank ........................................... 5-8
Fuels in Foreign Countries .............................. 5-7
Gage ......................................................... 3-47
Gasoline Octane ........................................... 5-5
Gasoline Specifications .................................. 5-6
Fuses
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ........................... 5-93
Rear Underseat Fuse Block ................ 5-98, 5-100
Underhood Fuse Block ................................. 5-94
Windshield Wiper ......................................... 5-93
G
Gage
Engine Coolant Temperature ......................... 3-41
Fuel .......................................................... 3-47
Speedometer .............................................. 3-35
Tachometer ................................................. 3-36
Garage Door Opener ....................................... 2-42
Gasoline
Octane ........................................................ 5-5
Specifications ............................................... 5-6
6
Glove Box ..................................................... 2-47
GM Mobility Program for Persons
with Disabilities ............................................. 7-6
H
Hazard Warning Flashers ................................... 3-6
Head Restraints ............................................... 1-7
Headlamps .................................................... 3-16
Bulb Replacement ....................................... 5-50
Daytime Running Lamps ............................... 3-17
Flash-to-Pass ............................................... 3-9
High Intensity Discharge (HID) Lighting ........... 5-50
High/Low Beam Changer ................................ 3-9
On Reminder .............................................. 3-16
Washer ...................................................... 3-12
Wiper Activated ........................................... 3-16
Heated Seats ................................................... 1-4
Heater ........................................................... 3-25
Highbeam On Light ......................................... 3-47
Highway Hypnosis ........................................... 4-38
Hill and Mountain Roads .................................. 4-38
HomeLink® Transmitter .................................... 2-42
HomeLink® Transmitter, Programming ................ 2-43
Hood
Checking Things Under ................................ 5-10
Release ..................................................... 5-11
Horn ............................................................... 3-6
How to Use This Manual ...................................... ii
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ................... 1-15
I
Ignition Positions ............................................. 2-21
Immobilizer .................................................... 2-18
Immobilizer Operation ...................................... 2-19
Infants and Young Children, Restraints ............... 1-31
Inflation -- Tire Pressure .................................. 5-58
Instrument Panel
Brightness .................................................. 3-19
Cluster ....................................................... 3-34
Overview ..................................................... 3-4
J
Jump Starting ................................................. 5-41
K
Keyless Entry System ....................................... 2-5
Keys ............................................................... 2-3
L
Labelling, Tire Sidewall ....................................
Lamps
Exterior Lighting Battery Saver ......................
Fog ...........................................................
Reading .....................................................
LATCH System
Child Restraints ...........................................
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for
the LATCH System ...................................
Level Control ..................................................
Liftgate ..........................................................
Light
Airbag Readiness ........................................
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning ...................
Brake System Warning .................................
Charging System .........................................
Cruise Control .............................................
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning .............
Fog Lamp ..................................................
Highbeam On .............................................
Lights On Reminder .....................................
Malfunction Indicator ....................................
Oil Pressure ...............................................
5-53
3-19
3-18
3-20
1-40
1-42
4-52
2-12
3-37
3-39
3-38
3-38
3-46
3-40
3-46
3-47
3-46
3-42
3-45
7
Light (cont.)
Safety Belt Reminder ................................... 3-36
Security ..................................................... 3-46
Sport Mode ................................................ 3-45
TCS Warning Light ...................................... 3-40
Tire Pressure .............................................. 3-41
Traction Control System (TCS) Warning .......... 3-40
Lighting
Entry ......................................................... 3-19
Parade Dimming .......................................... 3-20
Lockout Protection .......................................... 2-11
Locks
Central Door Unlocking System ....................... 2-9
Delayed Locking ........................................... 2-9
Door ........................................................... 2-8
Lockout Protection ....................................... 2-11
Power Door .................................................. 2-9
Programmable Automatic Door Locks ............. 2-10
Rear Door Security Locks ............................. 2-10
Loss of Control ............................................... 4-16
Luggage Carrier .............................................. 2-48
Lumbar
Power Controls ............................................. 1-3
8
M
Magnetic Ride Control ..................................... 4-10
Maintenance Schedule
Additional Required Services ........................... 6-6
At Each Fuel Fill ........................................... 6-8
At Least Once a Month .................................. 6-9
At Least Once a Year .................................... 6-9
Introduction .................................................. 6-2
Maintenance Footnotes .................................. 6-7
Maintenance Record .................................... 6-14
Maintenance Requirements ............................. 6-2
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ......... 6-13
Owner Checks and Services ........................... 6-8
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ............. 6-11
Scheduled Maintenance ................................. 6-4
Using Your ................................................... 6-2
Your Vehicle and the Environment ................... 6-2
Malfunction Indicator Light ................................ 3-42
Manual Passenger Seat .................................... 1-2
Map Pocket ................................................... 2-47
Memory Mirrors .............................................. 2-53
Memory Seat ................................................. 2-53
Message
DIC Warnings and Messages ........................ 3-57
Mirrors
Automatic Dimming Rearview
with OnStar® ........................................... 2-35
Automatic Dimming Rearview
with OnStar® and Compass ....................... 2-35
Memory ..................................................... 2-53
Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror ................. 2-39
Outside Convex Mirror ................................. 2-39
Outside Curb View Assist Mirror .................... 2-39
Outside Power Heated Mirrors ....................... 2-38
MyGMLink.com ................................................ 7-4
N
Navigation/Radio System ................................ 3-111
New Vehicle Break-In ...................................... 2-20
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ............ 6-13
O
Odometer ......................................................
Odometers, Trip ..............................................
Off-Road Recovery ..........................................
Oil
Engine .......................................................
Pressure Light .............................................
Older Children, Restraints ................................
3-35
3-35
4-14
5-16
3-45
1-28
Online Owner Center ........................................ 7-4
OnStar® System ............................................. 2-40
Operating Your All-Wheel-Drive Vehicle
Off Paved Roads ......................................... 4-17
Other Warning Devices ...................................... 3-6
Outlet Adjustment ............................................ 3-30
Outside
Automatic Dimming Mirror ............................. 2-39
Convex Mirror ............................................. 2-39
Curb View Assist Mirror ................................ 2-39
Power Heated Mirrors .................................. 2-38
Overheated Engine Protection
Operating Mode .......................................... 5-29
Owner Checks and Services .............................. 6-8
Owners, Canadian ............................................... ii
P
Panic Brake Assist ..........................................
Parade Dimming .............................................
Park Aid ........................................................
Park (P)
Shifting Into ................................................
Shifting Out of ............................................
Parking
Assist ........................................................
Brake ........................................................
Over Things That Burn .................................
4-11
3-20
3-20
2-30
2-32
3-20
2-28
2-33
9
Passenger Compartment Air Filter ..................... 3-32
Passing ......................................................... 4-14
Power
Accessory Outlets ........................................ 3-23
Door Locks .................................................. 2-9
Electrical System ......................................... 5-93
Lumbar Controls ........................................... 1-3
Retained Accessory (RAP) ............................ 2-22
Seat ............................................................ 1-2
Steering Fluid ............................................. 5-35
Windows .................................................... 2-14
Pretensioners, Safety Belt ................................ 1-27
Programmable Automatic Door Locks ................. 2-10
Programming the HomeLink® Transmitter ........... 2-43
Q
Questions and Answers About Safety Belts ......... 1-14
R
Radios .......................................................... 3-80
Care of Your CD and DVD Player ................ 3-113
Care of Your CDs and DVDs ....................... 3-113
Navigation/Radio System ............................. 3-111
10
Radios (cont.)
Radio with CD ............................................ 3-81
Setting the Time .......................................... 3-80
Theft-Deterrent .......................................... 3-111
Understanding Reception ............................ 3-113
Reading Lamps .............................................. 3-20
Rear Air Conditioning System ........................... 3-31
Rear Axle ...................................................... 5-48
Rear Door Security Locks ................................ 2-10
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides ...................... 1-25
Rear Seat Entertainment System ....................... 3-98
Rear Seat Operation ......................................... 1-8
Rear Seat Passengers, Safety Belts .................. 1-22
Rearview Mirror, Automatic Dimming
with OnStar® .............................................. 2-35
Rearview Mirror, Automatic Dimming
with OnStar® and Compass .......................... 2-35
Reclining Seatbacks .......................................... 1-5
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ................. 6-11
Recovery Hook ............................................... 4-45
Recreational Vehicle Towing ............................. 4-50
Remote Keyless Entry System ............................ 2-5
Remote Keyless Entry System, Operation ............ 2-6
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the
Spare Tire .................................................. 5-73
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ................... 5-71
Reporting Safety Defects
Canadian Government .................................. 7-12
General Motors ........................................... 7-12
United States Government ............................ 7-11
Restraint System Check
Checking Your Restraint Systems ................... 1-58
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash .......................................... 1-59
Restraint Systems
Checking .................................................... 1-58
Replacing Parts ........................................... 1-59
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ...................... 2-22
Right Front Passenger Position,
Safety Belts ................................................ 1-22
Roadside
Service ........................................................ 7-6
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out .................... 4-44
Running Your Engine While You Are Parked ....... 2-34
S
Safety Belt
Pretensioners ..............................................
Reminder Light ............................................
Safety Belts
Care of ......................................................
Driver Position ............................................
1-27
3-36
5-87
1-15
Safety Belts (cont.)
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ................ 1-15
Questions and Answers About
Safety Belts ............................................. 1-14
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for
Children and Small Adults ......................... 1-25
Rear Seat Passengers ................................. 1-22
Right Front Passenger Position ...................... 1-22
Safety Belt Extender .................................... 1-27
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ................. 1-21
Safety Belts Are for Everyone ....................... 1-10
Safety Warnings and Symbols .............................. iii
Scheduled Maintenance ..................................... 6-4
Seats
Head Restraints ............................................ 1-7
Heated Seats ............................................... 1-4
Manual Passenger ......................................... 1-2
Memory ..................................................... 2-53
Power Lumbar .............................................. 1-3
Power Seats ................................................. 1-2
Rear Seat Operation ...................................... 1-8
Reclining Seatbacks ...................................... 1-5
Stowable Seat .............................................. 1-8
Secondary Latch System ................................. 5-77
Securing a Child Restraint
Designed for the LATCH System ................... 1-42
Rear Seat Position ...................................... 1-42
Right Front Seat Position .............................. 1-45
11
Security Light ................................................. 3-46
Service ........................................................... 5-3
Adding Equipment to the Outside of
Your Vehicle .............................................. 5-5
Doing Your Own Work ................................... 5-4
Engine Soon Light ....................................... 3-42
Publications Ordering Information ................... 7-12
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .............. 1-58
Setting the Time ............................................. 3-80
Sheet Metal Damage ....................................... 5-90
Shifting Into Park (P) ....................................... 2-30
Shifting Out of Park (P) ................................... 2-32
Signals, Turn and Lane-Change .......................... 3-8
Spare Tire
Installing .................................................... 5-73
Removing ................................................... 5-71
Storing ....................................................... 5-79
Specifications, Capacities ............................... 5-102
Speedometer .................................................. 3-35
Sport Mode Light ............................................ 3-45
Stabilitrak® System ......................................... 4-10
Starting Your Engine ....................................... 2-23
Status of Vehicle Systems, DIC ........................ 3-49
Steering ........................................................ 4-12
Steering Wheel Controls, Audio ....................... 3-111
Steering Wheel, Tilt Wheel ................................. 3-6
12
Storage Areas
Cargo Management System .......................... 2-49
Cell Phone Storage Area .............................. 2-47
Center Console Storage Area ........................ 2-47
Convenience Net ......................................... 2-49
Cupholder(s) ............................................... 2-47
Front Storage Area ...................................... 2-47
Glove Box .................................................. 2-47
Luggage Carrier .......................................... 2-48
Map Pocket ................................................ 2-47
Stowable Seat .................................................. 1-8
Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow ...................... 4-44
Sun Visors ..................................................... 2-16
Sunroof ................................................. 2-50, 2-51
System Controls, DIC ...................................... 3-48
T
Tachometer .................................................... 3-36
TCS Warning Light .......................................... 3-40
Theft-Deterrent, Radio .................................... 3-111
Theft-Deterrent System .................................... 2-17
Theft-Deterrent Systems ................................... 2-17
Immobilizer ................................................. 2-18
Immobilizer Operation ................................... 2-19
Throttle, Adjustable .......................................... 2-23
Tilt Wheel ........................................................ 3-6
Tire
Pressure Light ............................................. 3-41
Tires ............................................................. 5-52
Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels,
Cleaning ................................................. 5-89
Buying New Tires ........................................ 5-64
Chains ....................................................... 5-68
Changing a Flat Tire .................................... 5-70
Cleaning .................................................... 5-90
Compact Spare Tire ..................................... 5-82
If a Tire Goes Flat ....................................... 5-69
Inflation -- Tire Pressure ............................... 5-58
Inspection and Rotation ................................ 5-63
Installing the Spare Tire ................................ 5-73
Pressure Monitor System .............................. 5-61
Removing the Flat Tire ................................. 5-73
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ............... 5-71
Secondary Latch System .............................. 5-77
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools ............ 5-79
Tire Sidewall Labelling .................................. 5-53
Tire Terminology and Definitions .................... 5-56
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ......................... 5-66
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ................. 5-67
Wheel Replacement ..................................... 5-67
When It Is Time for New Tires ...................... 5-64
Top Strap ...................................................... 1-38
Top Strap Anchor Location ............................... 1-39
Towing
Recreational Vehicle ..................................... 4-50
Towing a Trailer .......................................... 4-52
Your Vehicle ............................................... 4-50
Traction
Control System (TCS) .................................... 4-9
Control System Warning Light ....................... 3-40
Magnetic Ride Control .................................. 4-10
Stabilitrak® System ...................................... 4-10
Transmission
Fluid, Automatic ........................................... 5-23
Transmission Operation, Automatic .................... 2-25
Trip Odometers .............................................. 3-35
Turn and Lane-Change Signals .......................... 3-8
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever ........................... 3-7
U
Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA) ............... 3-20
Understanding Radio Reception ....................... 3-113
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ............................ 5-66
13
V
Vehicle
Control ........................................................ 4-6
Damage Warnings ........................................... iv
Symbols ......................................................... iv
Vehicle Data Collection and Event
Data Recorders ........................................... 7-10
Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN) ............................................. 5-92
Service Parts Identification Label ................... 5-92
Vehicle Personalization
DIC ........................................................... 3-66
Memory Seat and Mirrors ............................. 2-53
Ventilation Adjustment ...................................... 3-30
Visors ........................................................... 2-16
W
Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators ................ 3-33
Warnings
DIC Warnings and Messages ........................ 3-57
Hazard Warning Flashers ............................... 3-6
Other Warning Devices .................................. 3-6
Safety and Symbols ......................................... iii
Vehicle Damage .............................................. iv
14
Wheels
Alignment and Tire Balance ..........................
Replacement ...............................................
Where to Put the Restraint ...............................
Windows .......................................................
Power ........................................................
Windshield
Wiper Blades, Cleaning ................................
Windshield Washer .........................................
Fluid ..........................................................
Windshield Wiper
Blade Replacement ......................................
Fuses ........................................................
Windshield Wipers .......................................
Winter Driving ................................................
Wiper Activated Headlamps ..............................
5-67
5-67
1-37
2-13
2-14
5-88
3-11
5-36
5-50
5-93
3-10
4-40
3-16
X
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System .............. 3-114
Y
Your Vehicle and the Environment ....................... 6-2
Download PDF

advertising